7750 Installation Guide

Ciena
Confidential and Proprietary

40G, 100G, OSIC, and SLIC10 Circuit Packs
Release 9.3
323-1851-102.4 - Standard Issue 3
February 2014
Copyright 2010-2014 Ciena Corporation. All rights reserved.
6500 Packet-Optical Platform

Whats inside...
40G, OSIC, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs
100G circuit packs
6500 Packet-Optical Platform 40G, 100G, OSIC, and SLIC10 Circuit Packs
Release 9.3 323-1851-102.4 Standard Issue 3
Copyright 2010-2014 Ciena Corporation February 2014
LEGAL NOTICES
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA CORPORATION
AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE OR DISCLOSE ITS
CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION,
DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA
CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS COMPLETE
AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS
DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to
in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change
without notice.
The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and other
countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored in a data
base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation.
Security
Ciena
cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for
unauthorized use or access.
Contacting Ciena
For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.
Corporate Headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com
Customer Technical Support/Warranty
In North America 1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224)
410-865-4961
In Europe, Middle East,
and Africa
800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
+44-207-012-5508
In Asia-Pacific
800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
+81-3-6367-3989
+91-124-4340-600
In Caribbean and Latin
America
800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247)
410-865-4944 (USA)
Sales and General Information 410-694-5700 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In North America 410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In India +91-124-434-0500 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
Training
877-CIENA-TD (243-6283)
or 410-865-8996
E-mail: techtng@ciena.com
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE
INSTALLING OR USING CIENA CORPORATION ("Ciena") SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DOCUMENTATION
(COLLECTIVELY, THE "EQUIPMENT").
BY INSTALLING OR USING THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS
AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
1. Right to Use License; Restrictions. Subject to these terms, and the payment of all applicable license fees, Ciena
grants to you, as end user, a non-exclusive license to use the Ciena software (the "Software") in object code form
solely in connection with, and as embedded within, the Equipment,. You shall have the right to use the Software solely
for your own internal use and benefit. You may make one copy of the Software and documentation solely for backup
and archival purpose, however you must reproduce and affix all copyright and other proprietary rights notices that
appear in or on the original. You may not, without Ciena's prior written consent, (i) sublicense, assign, sell, rent, lend,
lease, transfer or otherwise distribute the Software; (ii) grant any rights in the Software or documentation not expressly
authorized herein; (iii) modify the Software nor provide any third person the means to do the same; (iv) create
derivative works, translate, disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer or attempt to obtain the source code of the
Software in any way; or (v) alter, destroy, or otherwise remove any proprietary notices or labels on or embedded within
the Software or documentation. You acknowledge that this license is subject to Section 365 of the U.S. Bankruptcy
Code and requires Ciena's consent to any assignment related to a bankruptcy proceeding. Sole title to the Software
and documentation, to any derivative works, and to any associated patents and copyrights, remains with Ciena or its
licensors. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in the Software and documentation not expressly granted
to you. You shall preserve intact any notice of copyright, trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership from any
original or copies of the Software or documentation.
2. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request, but not more frequently than annually without reasonable cause, you
shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software at such times as may be mutually agreed upon to ensure
compliance with this Agreement.
3. Confidentiality. You agree that you will receive confidential or proprietary information ("Confidential Information")
in connection with the purchase, deployment and use of the Equipment. You will not disclose Confidential Information
to any third party without prior written consent of Ciena, will use it only for purposes for which it was disclosed, use your
best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software from unauthorized disclosure or use, and must treat it
with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but with no less than reasonable care. You
acknowledge that the design and structure of the Software constitute trade secrets and/or copyrighted materials of
Ciena and agree that the Equipment is Confidential Information for purposes of this Agreement.
4. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and
52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Equipment and any accompanying technical
data (collectively "Materials") are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations. These
Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this
Agreement, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR Supplement
227.7202, software delivered to you is commercial computer software and the use of that software is further restricted
by this Agreement.
5. Term of License. This license is effective until terminated. Customer may terminate this license at any time by
giving written notice to Ciena [or] and destroying or erasing all copies of Software including any documentation. Ciena
may terminate this Agreement and your license to the Software immediately by giving you written notice of termination
in the event that either (i) you breach any term or condition of this Agreement or (ii) you are wound up other than
voluntarily for the purposes of amalgamation or reorganization, have a receiver appointed or enter into liquidation or
bankruptcy or analogous process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies Ciena may have. In the event of any termination you will have no right to keep or use the Software or any
copy of the Software for any purpose and you shall destroy and erase all copies of such Software in its possession or
control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been destroyed or erased.
6. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all applicable laws, including all import regulations, and to obtain
all required licenses and permits related to installation and use of Equipment. Software, including technical data, is
subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and
may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such
regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Software.
7. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF Ciena SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE AMOUNTS
PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION
ALSO APPLY TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER OF Ciena. NEITHER Ciena NOR ANY OF ITS THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, CONTRACTS,
DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING SUCH DATA OR PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE
8. General. Ciena may assign this Agreement to any Ciena affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property rights
in the Software, but otherwise neither this Agreement nor any rights hereunder may be assigned nor duties delegated
by either party, and any attempt to do so will be void. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of
Maryland (without regard to the conflict of laws provisions) and shall be enforceable in the courts of Maryland. The
U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This Agreement constitutes
the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties relating to the license for the Software and
supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements, verbal or written, between the
parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force
and effect.
v
Contents 0
New in this release and documentation roadmap xi
40G, OSIC, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs 1-1
40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5 and NTK539RxE5) 1-1
Overview 1-1
Supported functionality 1-8
Line support 1-8
Client support 1-10
Cross-connection types 1-10
Cross-connection rates 1-10
Performance monitoring 1-10
Alarms 1-11
Equipping rules 1-13
Technical specifications 1-19
Latency 1-22
40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and NTK529SJE5) 1-23
Overview 1-23
Line support 1-30
Client support 1-30
Cross-connection rate 1-33
Supported CFPs 1-34
Alarms 1-35
Latency 1-44
40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) 1-45
Overview 1-45
Line support 1-49
Client support 1-49
Cross-connection rate 1-51
Supported XFPs 1-51
Alarms 1-53
vi Contents
Latency 1-62
40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) 1-63
Overview 1-63
Alarms 1-68
Latency 1-74
40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) 1-75
Overview 1-75
Line support 1-78
Client support 1-81
Alarms 1-82
Latency 1-95
40G functions 1-96
40G OCLD (NTK539PxE5) and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD (NTK539RxE5)
circuit packs functions 1-96
40G OCI (NTK529SAE5), 40/43G OCI (NTK529SDE5), and 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJE5) circuit packs functions 1-97
40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) circuit packs functions 1-97
40G XCIF (NTK525FAE5) circuit packs functions 1-98
40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) circuit packs functions 1-98
OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5) 1-107
Overview 1-107
Line support 1-109
Client support 1-109
Alarms 1-110
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack (NTK554HA) and
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 Flex C-Band) circuit pack
(NTK554HC) 1-114
Overview 1-114
Alarms 1-120
Contents vii
DWDM wavelengths 1-123
Latency specifications for 40G circuit packs 1-126
40G, OSIC, and SLIC10 circuit packs provisioning procedures 1-133
40G OCI / 40/43G OCI / 40G+ CFP OCI and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD 1-134
40G MUX OCI and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD /
40G UOCLD 1-135
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD regenerator 1-136
40G XCIF and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD / 40G
UOCLD 1-137
OSIC submarine application 1-138
SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex submarine application 1-138
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCI circuit packs: 1-139
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs 1-139
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs: 1-139
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G XCIF circuit packs 1-140
List of procedures
1-1 Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 1-142
1-2 Provisioning a pluggable automatically 1-143
1-3 Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 1-144
1-4 Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs 1-147
1-5 Adding a facility to an equipment 1-150
1-6 Editing facility parameters 1-155
1-7 Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 1-157
1-8 Creating ring configurations 1-165
1-9 Adding a new entry in the communications settings 1-168
1-10 Adding transponder connections 1-170
1-11 Adding a path connection 1-173
1-12 Changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode 1-176
1-13 Changing the primary state of a facility 1-177
1-14 Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable 1-179
1-15 Deleting a facility from an equipment 1-181
1-16 Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 1-183
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters 1-184
Equipment and facility primary and secondary states 1-184
OC192/768/STM64/256 facility parameters 1-188
ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters 1-192
WAN facility parameters 1-197
40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters 1-199
40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters 1-203
OSIC OTM2 facility parameters 1-204
OTM3 facility parameters 1-208
FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX (NTK525CFE5 variant) 1-219
TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters 1-221
OPTMON facility parameters 1-222
IDLER facility parameters 1-223
ADJ facility parameters 1-225
Comms setting parameters 1-227
viii Contents
DCC/GCC support and parameters 1-227
IISIS parameters 1-229
OSPF parameters 1-232
Ring APS configuration editor parameters 1-236
Transponder connections parameters 1-238
Path connections parameters 1-242
100G circuit packs 2-1
100G OCLD (NTK539TxE5), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Bx), and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux) circuit packs 2-1
Overview 2-1
Line support 2-19
Client support 2-26
Alarms 2-26
Latency 2-60
100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5 and NTK529AC) 2-61
Overview 2-61
Line support 2-67
Client support 2-67
Supported CFPs 2-68
Alarms 2-70
Latency 2-82
100G MUX circuit packs (NTK529BAE5 and NTK529BBE5) 2-83
Overview 2-83
Line support 2-95
Client support 2-95
Supported SFP+s/XFPs 2-99
Alarms 2-101
Latency 2-112
Latency specifications for 100G and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs 2-112
100G circuit packs provisioning procedures 2-125
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX / 100GE OCI and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3
Contents ix
OCLD 2-125
100G OCI and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD 2-126
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator 2-127
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 2-128
100G OCI and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 2-129
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator 2-130
Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs 2-131
List of procedures
2-1 Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 2-134
2-2 Provisioning a pluggable automatically 2-136
2-3 Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 2-137
2-4 Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs 2-140
2-5 Adding a facility to an equipment 2-143
2-6 Editing facility parameters 2-147
2-7 Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 2-148
2-8 Adding a new entry in the communications settings 2-152
2-9 Adding a transponder connection 2-154
2-10 Changing the equipment profile 2-156
2-11 Changing the primary state of a facility 2-158
2-12 Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable 2-160
2-13 Deleting a facility from an equipment 2-162
2-14 Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 2-164
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters 2-165
Equipment and facility primary and secondary states 2-165
OC192/STM64 facility parameters for 100G circuit packs 2-168
ETH10G and ETH100G facility parameters 2-170
WAN facility parameters 2-175
FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX (NTK529BB) 2-191
TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters 2-193
ADJ facility parameters 2-194
Comms setting parameters 2-196
GCC support and parameters 2-196
IISIS parameters 2-197
OSPF parameters 2-200
Transponder connections parameters 2-204
x Contents
xi
New in this release and documentation
roadmap 0
The following section details whats new in 6500 Packet-Optical Platform
(6500) 40G, 100G, OSIC, and SLIC10 Circuit Packs, 323-1851-102.4
Standard Issue 3 for Release 9.3.
New features in Release 9.3 Issue 3
This technical publication was up-issued to include the following pluggable
modules:
103.1G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP (160-9113-900)
103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
(160-9114-900)
This technical publication was up-issued to include some general minor
updates.
The following new/enhanced features are covered in this document:
new software features
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs STORM enhancements
OTN TCM & DM enhancements
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (NTK529SJE5) enhancement:
supporting 1+1 TPT protection scheme
Supporting documentation
The following is a list of application-specific documents that are applicable to
the 6500.
The 6500 Packet-Optical Platform Control Plane Application Guide,
NTRN71AA, provides detailed information on Control Plane concepts,
applications, and engineering rules.
xii New in this release and documentation roadmap
The 6500 Packet-Optical Platform Submarine Networking Application
Guide, NTRN72AA, provides detailed information on Submarine
applications and engineering rules.
New in this release and documentation roadmap xiii
6500 Packet-Optical Platform technical publications
The following roadmap illustrates the structure of the 6500 technical
publications library.
Documentation
Roadmap
(323-1851-090)
Planning a Network
OC-n/STM-n
(323-1851-102.3)
Photonic Equipment
(323-1851-102.6)
OTN I/F and PKT I/F
(323-1851-102.8)
Installing,
Commissioning and
Testing a Network
Managing and
Provisioning
a Network
Maintaining and
Troubleshooting
a Network
Circuit Pack-Based
Documentation
Planning -
Ordering Information
(323-1851-151)
TL-1 Description
(323-1851-190)
Planning -
Parts 1, 2, 3, and 4
(NTRN10CF)
Site Manager for
6500 and CPL
Fundamentals
(323-1851-195)
Installation,
Parts 1 and 2
(323-1851-201)
Commissioning
and Testing
(323-1851-221)
Administration
and Security
(323-1851-301)
Configuration -
Provisioning
and Operating
Parts 1 and 2
(323-1851-310)
Configuration -
Bandwidth and
Data Services
Parts 1, 2 and 3
(323-1851-320)
Configuration -
Control Plane
(323-1851-330)
Fault Management -
Performance
Monitoring
(323-1851-520)
Fault Management -
Alarm Clearing
Parts 1 and 2
(323-1851-543)
Fault Management -
Module
Replacement
(323-1851-545)
Fault Management -
Customer Visible
Logs
(323-1851-840)
Common Eqpt
(323-1851-102.1)
Electrical
(323-1851-102.2)
40G/100G/
OSIC/SLIC10
(323-1851-102.4)
Broadband/SMUX
OTN FLEX MOTR
(323-1851-102.5)
Data and Layer 2
(323-1851-102.7)
SAOS-based
Packet Services
Documentation
Supporting
Documentation
Command
Reference
(323-1851-610)
Configuration
(323-1851-630)
Fault and
Performance
(323-1851-650)
MIB
Reference
(323-1851-690)
6500 Photonic
Layer Guide
(NTRN15DA)
6500 Data
Application Guide
(NTRN15BA)
Network
Interworking Guide
(NTCA68CA)
Common
Photonic Layer
Technical Publications
Submarine Networking
Application Guide
(NTRN72AA)
6500 Control Plane
Application Guide
(NTRN71AA)
Universal AC Rectifier
Application Note
(009-2012-900)
xiv New in this release and documentation roadmap
1-1
40G, OSIC, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex
circuit packs 1-
This chapter provides an overview of the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500)
40G, OSIC, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs and their associated
procedures. See Table 1-1 on page 1-1 for different circuit packs covered in
this chapter.
40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5 and NTK539RxE5)
Overview
The eDC40G OCLD 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band circuit pack (also referred to as
40G OCLD) and eDC40G OCLD Wavelength-selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
circuit pack (also referred to as Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD) are used to
implement mapping/wrapping functionality to a G.709 DWDM line. The 40G
OCLD circuit packs are offered in both C-Band and L-Band. The
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are offered in C-Band. Also the
combination of a 40G OCLD or a Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit
pack and a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK620AA) provides OTN mapping
(OTU3 to ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0).
Table 1-1
40G, OSIC, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs in this chapter
Topic Page
40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5 and NTK539RxE5) 1-1
40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and NTK529SJE5) 1-23
40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) 1-45
40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) 1-63
40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) 1-75
OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5) 1-107
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack
(NTK554HA) and Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 Flex C-Band)
circuit pack (NTK554HC)
1-114
1-2 40G, OSIC, SLIC10, and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs
The following variants of 40G OCLD C-Band and L-Band circuit packs are
supported:
eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Comp 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band
(NTK539PAE5): up to 1800 km and 25 ps PMD performance
eDC40G OCLD 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PBE5): up to 1800 km
and 10 ps PMD limit
eDC40G OCLD Regional 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PCE5): up
to 600 km and 8 ps PMD limit
eDC40G OCLD Metro 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PDE5): up to
300 km and 8 ps PMD limit
eDC40G OCLD Submarine 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PEE5):
Submarine reach and 25 ps PMD performance
eDC40G OCLD MetroHSRx 1xOTU3+ DWDM C-Band (NTK539PFE5):
up to 300 km and 11 ps PMD limit
eDC40G OCLD MetroHSRx 1xOTU3+ DWDM L-Band (NTK539PUE5):
Attention: The MetroHSRx variant of the 40G OCLD circuit pack has been
developed to optimize performance when used on an 565, 5100 and 5200
Advanced Services Platform optical line and allow overlay on deployed 565,
5100 and 5200 Advanced Services Platform networks. Other variants of the
40G OCLD circuit pack can also be used on the 565, 5100 and 5200
Advanced Services Platform optical line if there are special requirements,
such as high PMD. The MetroHSRx variant of the 40G OCLD circuit pack
must not be used on 6500 or Common Photonic Layer photonic lines as it will
not provide best performance except for some very limited single span
applications.
The following variants of Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD C-Band circuit
packs are supported:
eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539RAE5): up to 2300 km and 30 ps PMD limit
eDC40G OCLD Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band (NTK539RBE5):
eDC40G OCLD Regional Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539RCE5): up to 1000 km and 10 ps PMD limit
eDC40G OCLD Metro Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539RDE5): up to 300 km and 10 ps PMD limit
eDC40G OCLD Submarine Wavelength-Selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band
(NTK539REE5): Submarine reach and 30 ps PMD limit
Attention: Note that "-Sel" that appears on the faceplate label of the circuit
pack is an abbreviation for "Wavelength-Selective".
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs include a
single 40G tunable OTM3 line interface.
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs offer the
same functionality. The Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs offer
the following additional functionalities when compared to the 40G OCLD:
consume less power
improved PMD tolerance
improved reach
Balanced PIN Coherent Receiver allowing for wavelength selectivity when
used in colorless photonic systems.
Figure 1-1 on page 1-4 shows the faceplate of a 40G OCLD circuit pack and
Figure 1-2 on page 1-5 shows the functional block diagram of a 40G OCLD
circuit pack. Figure 1-3 on page 1-6 shows the faceplate of a
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack and Figure 1-4 on page 1-7
shows the functional block diagram of a Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
circuit pack.
Figure 1-1
40G OCLD circuit pack faceplate (example: eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Comp 1xOTU3+ DWDM
C-Band variant)
Type A
eDC40G OCLD
Enh PMD Comp
1xOTU3+DWDM
C-Band
Rx
Tx
Fail
Ready
In Use
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
Green rectangle (Ready)
- Used to communicate hardware or software functional state
- Card initializing = Blinking LED; Card OK = LED on; Card not ready = LED off
Red triangle (Fail)
- Used to communicate hardware or software failure state
- Card not failed = LED off, Card failed = LED on
Blue diamond (In Use)
- Used to communicate whether circuit pack can be extracted
(on->no pull, off->can be pulled)
- Equipment in-service = LED on; Equipment out-of-service = LED off
Yellow circle (LOS)
- Used to communicate Rx Loss of Signal
Transmit/receive fixed dual LC connector
1
Figure 1-2
40G OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539PxE5)
Ciena FEC
Transmit Line
Mapper and
Deskew
Receive
Equalizer and
Demapper
40G O/E Rx
Subsystem
40G E/O Tx
Subsystem
EOC Laser
Sync
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
E/O Electrical/Optical
EOC Electro-Optical Control
FEC Forward Error Correction
O/E Optical/Electrical
Legend
Figure 1-3
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack faceplate (example: eDC40G OCLD Enh PMD Comp
Wavelength-selective 1xOTU3+ C-Band variant)
Type A
eDC40G OCLD
Enh PMD -Sel
1xOTU3+C-Band
Rx
Tx
Fail
Ready
In Use
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
1
Figure 1-4
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539RxE5)
The 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5) and Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539RxE5) offer different functions by working
with different 40G circuit packs. For complete details and graphics, refer to
40G functions on page 1-96.
Ciena FEC
Transmit Line
Mapper and
Deskew
Receive
Equalizer and
Demapper
40G O/E Balanced
Pin Coherent
Rx Subsystem
40G E/O Tx
Subsystem
EOC Laser
Sync
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
Legend
Supported functionality
The 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PAE5, NTK539PBE5, NTK539PCE5,
NTK539PDE5, NTK539PEE5, NTK539PFE5, NTK539PUE5) and the
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539RAE5,
NTK539RBE5, NTK539RCE5, NTK539RDE5, NTK539REE5) provide the
following functionality.
Line support
one fixed OTM3 (40G) line interface (port 1) when 40G OCLD is in
Broadband mode. When in OTN switching mode (POTS), the circuit pack
has one fixed PTP facility.
same form and fit as 10G OTSC, all physical attributes (including LEDs)
are at parity with 10G OTSC
G.709 wrapper (OTU3+)
high coding gain FEC
dual polarization QPSK modulation
low to high PMD tolerance/compensation depending on the circuit pack
variant for 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs
the Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack has a Balanced PIN
Coherent Receiver allowing for wavelength selectivity when used in
colorless photonic systems
the Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack has two optical power
detectors on its Rx interface. One for total input power (channel power +
amplifier noise) and one for channel input power (the channel corresponds
to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). The total input power
corresponds to the sum total of all the wavelengths (up to 12) and amplifier
noise (ASE) when connected to the Colorless Channel Mux/Demux
(CCMD12) circuit pack
offers a fixed C-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant DWDM line interface
(1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm) for C-band circuit packs (applicable to 40G
OCLD circuit packs)
offers a fixed C-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant line interface
(1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm) for C-band circuit packs (applicable only to
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs)
offers a fixed L-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant DWDM line interface
(1568.77 nm to 1608.76 nm) for L-band circuit pack (applicable only to
40G OCLD circuit packs)
offers a wide dynamic range receiver with automatic VOA control on the
line interface receiver
offers GCC0 data communications channels between Broadband
interfaces
full monitoring and termination of the line G.709 OH bytes
no external bits sources required (line timing or on board reference
clocking is used)
supports facility and terminal loopbacks on the OTM3 line facility. Terminal
loopback on the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD is bridged,
that is, provisioned traffic will be sent on the line egress.
supports Short Term Optical Recovery Mechanism (STORM) in colored
Photonic systems (not supported in Photonic colorless systems) to enable
fast signal recovery from short term outages. For more information on
STORM, refer to Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating,
323-1851-310
supports Control Plane (only for 40G OCLD; NTK539PxE5 variants)
(supported as Network Control Plane facility)
Attention: Refer to the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform Control Plane
Application Guide, NTRN71AA, for detailed information on Control Plane
concepts, applications, and engineering rules supported in this release of
6500.
Line interworking between different 40G OCLD variants or between
different 40G Wavelength Selective OCLD variants are shown in the
Table 1-2.
Table 1-2
40G OCLD Line interworking
__40G OCLD (NTK539xx) 40G Wavelength-Selective OCLD
(NTK539xx)
PA PB PC PD PE PF PU RA RB RC RD RE
40G OCLD PA Same Partial Partial Partial No No No No No No No No
PB Same Partial Partial No No No No No No No No
PC Same Partial No No No No No No No No
PD Same No No No No No No No No
PE Same No No No No No No No
PF Same No No No No No No
PU Same No No No No No
Attention: Line interworking between 40G ULH OCLD variants (NTK539XA
and NTK539XE) is not supported. Also, line interworking between 40G
OCLD variants (NTK539Px-series or NTK539Rx-series) and 40G ULH
OCLD variants (NTK539XA and NTK539XE) is not supported.
Client support
There are no client ports on the 40G OCLD and Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs.
Cross-connection types
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs only
support the 2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder and OTN cross-connection
type, except ODU3 OTN connections.
Cross-connection rates
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs only
support the ODU3 transponder and OTN cross-connection rate, except ODU3
OTN connections.
Performance monitoring
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs support
the following monitored entities:
OTM3 line interface
PM collection for OTU3 layer
PM collection for ODU3 layer
40G
Wavelength
Selective
OCLD
(NTK539xx)
RA Same Partial Partial Partial No
RB Same Partial Partial No
RC Same Partial No
RD Same No
RE Same
Note: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance specifications. For
example, the NTK539PA can interwork with the NTK539PD but the link will only be able to support 8 ps mean DGD
and the reach will be limited to 300 km.
Table 1-2 (continued)
40G OCLD Line interworking
__40G OCLD (NTK539xx) 40G Wavelength-Selective OCLD
(NTK539xx)
PA PB PC PD PE PF PU RA RB RC RD RE
Protection switch count/duration for ODU3 layer
PM collection for Physical layer
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs support
the following monitored entities when mated with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit
pack:
PM collection for OTUTTP facilities
PM collection for PTP facilities
For detailed information and procedures associated with performance
monitoring, refer to Fault Management - Performance Monitoring,
323-1851-520.
Alarms
For a complete list of alarm clearing procedures for 6500, refer to Part 1 and
Part 2 of Fault Management - Alarm Clearing, 323-1851-543.
Equipment alarms
Autoprovisioning Mismatch
Circuit Pack Missing
Circuit Pack Mismatch
Circuit Pack Failed
Circuit Pack Latch Open
Circuit Pack Upgrade Failed
Circuit pack Operational Capability exceeded
Cold Restart Required: FPGA Changed
Database Not Recovered For Slot
Intercard Suspected
Internal Mgmt Comms Suspected
Provisioning Incompatible
OTM facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Clock
Loss of Channel (applies to Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD)
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Pre-FEC Signal Degrade
TX Manual Provisioning Required
TX Tuning in Progress
Rx Power Out Of Range
Rx Channel Power Out Of Range (applies to Wavelength-Selective 40G
OCLD)
TR Control Echo trace Mismatch
OTU Trace Identifier Mismatch
OTU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU Trace Identifier Mismatch
ODU BDI
GCC0 Link Fail
GCC0 OSPF Adjacency Loss
Loopback Active - Facility
Loopback Active - Terminal
Protection Scheme Mismatch
Protection Mode Mismatch
Protection Switch Byte Fail
Auto Protection Switch Acknowledge Time Out
Protection Exerciser Failed
Protection Switch Complete - Revertive
Protection Switch Complete
Forced Switch Active
Manual Switch Active
Lockout Active
Far End Protection Line Fail
OTUTTP facility alarms
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Loss Of Clock
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
OTU BDI
PTP facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
TR Control Echo Trace Mismatch
Photonic alarms
Adjacency Mismatch
Duplicate Adjacency Discovered
Control Plane alarms
Remote Node Unreachable (OSRP line level)
Configuration Mismatch
Configuration Mismatch - Common ID
Configuration Mismatch - Primary State
Software Auto-Upgrade alarms
Software Auto-Upgrade in Progress
Software Auto-Upgrade Failed
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G OCLD and Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs:
is a one-port single slot interface
can be equipped in any slot (1-14 except slots 7 and 8 if cross-connect
circuit packs are provisioned in slots 7 and 8) of the 14-slot packet-optical,
converged optical, converged optical/front electrical, or converged
optical/rear electrical shelves. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical
shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with this circuit pack.
can be equipped in slots 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and 31-38 of the 32-slot
packet-optical shelf.
can be equipped in slots 1 to 7 of the 7-slot optical shelf.
40G OCLD and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs cannot be
equipped in the NTK503MAE5 and NTK503NAE5 variants of 2-slot shelf.
40G OCLD and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs can be
equipped in slots 1 or 2 of the NTK503LA variant of 2-slot shelf.
can be equipped in the same shelf with any other type of circuit pack.
any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCI/40G OCLD,
40/43G OCI/40G OCLD, 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD, or
40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD is possible (for example, 40G OCI,
40/43G OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit pack on left or right of 40G OCLD
circuit pack) starting in any slot with the exception of connections across
slots 6 to 7 and 8 to 9 for 14-slot shelf types. Note that if you are planning
full-fill unprotected or regen 40G applications, connections across the
above slots will not occur, as they will be using the recommended slots 1
to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8 (not applicable to 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA)), 9 to 10, 11 to 12, and 13 to 14 for 14-slot shelf types.
any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD, 40/43G OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, 40G+ CFP
OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or
40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD is possible (for example,
40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit pack on left or right of
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack) starting in any slot with the
exception of connections across slots 6 to 7 and 8 to 9 for 14-slot shelf
types. Note that if you are planning full-fill unprotected or regen 40G
applications, connections across the above slots will not occur, as they will
be using the recommended slots 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8 (not applicable
to 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA)), 9 to 10, 11 to 12, and 13 to
14 for 14-slot shelf types.
In a 2-slot optical Type 2 shelf assembly (NTK503LA) and when one 40G
OCLD circuit pack is mated with one 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (OTR
configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in slot 1 or 2 and 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit pack can be in other slot. Similarly, one 40G OCLD circuit pack is
mated with one 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CFE5 variant) (MOTR
configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in slot 1 or 2 and 40G MUX OCI
circuit pack can be in other slot.
any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G
OCLD/40G OTN XCIF is possible as long as 40G XCIF or 40G OTN XCIF
circuit pack is in even slot (for example, 40G OCLD circuit pack on left side
of 40G XCIF or 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack). The exception is slot 8 for
14-slot shelf type, and slot 10 for 32-slot shelf type.
any adjacent two-slot combination of Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD/40G XCIF or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G OTN XCIF is
possible as long as 40G XCIF or 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is in even slot
(for example, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack on left side of
40G XCIF or 40G OTN XCIF). The exception is slot 8 for 14-slot shelf type,
and slot 10 for 32-slot shelf type.
two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs
provisioned in consecutive slots (except 6&7 and 8&9 for 14-slot shelf
types) can be configured as an ODU3-transparent line regenerator. The
first circuit pack must be in an odd slot and the second circuit pack must
be in the adjacent even slot. For the 7-slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4},
{5,6}. For the 14-slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8 except for
14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA}, {9,10}, {11,12}, and {13,14}. For
the 32-Slot shelf, that is slots {1,2}, {3,4}, {5,6}, {7,8}, {11,12}, {13,14},
{15,16}, {17,18}, {21,22}, {23,24}, {25,26}, {27,28}, {31,32}, {33,34},
{35,36}, {37,38}. Unlike 10G OC-192/STM-64 WT, 10GEL WT, 10G OTU2
WT, and 10G OTR circuit packs, where line regeneration is achieved by
back to back circuit packs interconnecting the client-side interfaces using
a patch cord, the line regeneration for 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs is achieved by back to back 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs in adjacent slots
interconnecting through backplane.
a 40G OCI circuit pack between two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs, a 40/43G OCI circuit pack between two 40G
OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, a 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit pack between two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
circuit packs, or a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack between two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs provides 1+1 OTN line-side
protection. Signals are exchanged between triplets using the backplane.
For 1+1 protection, the choices are:
slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {9,10,11}, and {12,13,14} for 14-slot shelf types
slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {13,14,15}, {16,17,18}, {21,22,23}, {24,25,26},
{33,34,35}, and {36,37,38} for 32-slot shelf type.
slots {1,2,3} and {4,5,6} for 7-slot shelf type.
two 40G XCIF circuit packs and two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs (two pairs of 40G XCIF/40G OCLD or 40G
XCIF/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD) along with two cross-connect
circuit packs provide 1+1/MSP linear and 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing
protection (40G TR protected group). Signals are exchanged between the
six slots using the backplane.
for 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing protection, the valid
protection group slots for 40G XCIF and 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD are: {1,2,3,4}, {5,6,9,10}, and
{11,12,13,14} for 14-slot shelf types and {1,2,3,4}, {5,6,7,8 except for
14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA}, {11,12,13,14}, {15,16,17,18},
{21,22,23,24}, {25,26,27,28}, {31,32,33,34}, and {35,36,37,38} for 32-slot
shelf type. The 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit
packs are equipped in odd slots. The 40G XCIF circuit packs are equipped
in even slots.
for 1+1/MSP linear protection, the working Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two lower slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The protection
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G OCLD/40G XCIF
must be the two higher slot numbers of the 40G TR protected group.
for 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, the east Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two lower slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The west Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD/40G XCIF or 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two higher slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group.
up to seven regenerators (two 40G OCLDs or Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD) can be supported in a 14-slot shelf (except for 14-slot
packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) where up to six regenerators can be
provisioned), up to three regenerators can be supported in a 7-slot shelf,
and up to 16 regenerators can be supported in a 32-slot shelf when using
the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
two 40G MOTR groups (40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD or 40G MUX
OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD while 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
must be NTK525CFE5 variant) provisioned in consecutive slots can be
configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without any cross-connect). The
first 40G MOTR group must be in the lower numbered slots (considered
the working path) and the second 40G MOTR group must be in the higher
numbered slots (considered the protection path). The working/protection
path slot is the slot number in which the working/protection 40G MUX OCI
is seated. The 40G MUX OCI circuit packs must always be in the odd slots
and the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs in
the adjacent even slots. The working and protection 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs require an XFP on the client interface. For 1+1 TPT protection, the
choices are
slots [{1,2}, {3,4}] and [{9,10}, {11,12}] for 14-slot shelf types
slots [{1,2}, {3,4}], [{13,14}, {15,16}], [{21,22}, {23,24}], and [{33,34},
{35,36}] for 32-slot shelf type.
slots [{1,2}, {3,4}] for 7-slot shelf type.
two 40G OTR groups (40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD or
40G+ CFP OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD) provisioned in
consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without
any cross-connect). The first 40G OTR group must be in the lower
numbered slots (considered the working path) and the second 40G OTR
group must be in the higher numbered slots (considered the protection
path). The working/protection path slot is the slot number in which the
working/protection 40G+ CFP OCI is seated. The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs must always be in the odd slots and the 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs in the adjacent even slots.
The working and protection 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs require a CFP on
the client interface. For 1+1 TPT protection, the choices are
slots [{1,2}, {3,4}], [{5,6}, {7,8}], [{11,12}, {13,14}], [{15,16}, {17,18}],
[{21,22}, {23,24}], [{25,26}, {27,28}], [{31,32}, {33,34}], and [{35,36},
the maximum number of back-to-back 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD regenerator sites is eight.
requires high flow cooling fan modules (NTK507LDE5, NTK507MDE5,
NTK507LS, and NTK507MS) when equipped in a 14-slot shelf.
does not use any cross-connect capacity and can be installed in shelves
equipped with or without cross-connect circuit packs
The following restrictions on using a cross-connect circuit pack are applied
when deploying a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit
pack:
In a 14-slot shelf type (except for 14-slot packet-optical shelf type;
NTK503SA), you cannot provision a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit pack in slot 7 or 8 if one of these slots already contains
a cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
NTK503SA), you cannot provision a cross-connect circuit pack in slot 7 or
8 if one of these slots already contains a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot
packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
NTK503SA), when the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
circuit packs are installed in slot 7 or 8, only Broadband circuit packs or
Photonic circuit packs can be provisioned in the other interface slots (slots
1 to 6 and 9 to14), as MSPP interface circuit packs require a
cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs. See Part 1 of 6500
Planning, NTRN10CF (Chapter 3) for a full list of supported Broadband
and Photonic circuit packs.
Technical specifications
Table 1-3 lists the weight, power consumption, transmitter, and receiver
specifications for the 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs. Table 1-4 on
page 1-21 lists the weight, power consumption, transmitter, and receiver
specifications for the Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD optical interface circuit
packs.
Table 1-3
Technical specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G OCLD
(NTK539PAE5/NTK539PBE5/NTK539PCE5/NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/NTK539PFE5/NTK539PUE5)
Weight (estimated) 1.5 kg (3.4 lb)
Power consumption Typical (W): 137 (see Note 1)
Power Budget (W): 147 (see Note 2)
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation eDC40 Dual-polarization QPSK
Laser spectral width < 1 MHz
Line rate 46.0 Gbit/s (carried as 11.5 Gbaud Dual-polarization QPSK)
Tunable wavelength range 1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm for C-band circuit packs (see DWDM
wavelengths on page 1-123 for a list of supported wavelengths)
1568.77 nm to 1608.76 nm for L-band circuit pack
Tunable wavelength spacing 50 GHz
Central Wavelength Accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -11 to 0 dBm
Tx Power monitor accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver
Receiver type PIN
Connector type LC
Wavelength range C-Band (1527.60 nm to 1565.50 nm)
Receiver sensitivity (minimum
EOL)
-20 dBm for NTK539PAE5/NTK539PBE5/NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/NTK539PEE5 (see Note 3)
-25 dBm for NTK539PFE5 (see Note 4)
-25 dBm for NTK539PUE5 (see Note 4)
Receiver overload 7 dBm (see Note 5)
Receiver damage level 17 dBm
Rx Power monitor accuracy +/- 0.5 dB at power levels >= -10 dBm
Rx Optical Signal to Noise Ra-
tio (OSNR)
10.4 dB
FEC coding gain at 1E-15 9.2 dB (using Ciena proprietary FEC)
Polarization Mode Dispersion
(PMD) tolerance
25 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PAE5
10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PBE5
8 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PCE5
8 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PDE5
25 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PEE5
11 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PFE5
11 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539PUE5
Chromatic dispersion
tolerance
+/- 50000 ps/nm
Reach Up to 1800 km for NTK539PAE5
Up to 1800 km for NTK539PBE5
Up to 600 km for NTK539PCE5
Up to 300 km for NTK539PDE5 and NTK539PFE5 and NTK539PUE5
Submarine reach for NTK539PEE5
Note 1: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature of
25 (+/-3
o
C) and voltage of 54 V dc (+/-2.5 V).
Note 2: The power budget values are based on the maximum power consumption in an ambient
temperature range from 5
o
C to 40
o
C at a voltage of 40 V dc (+/-2.5 V). These values must be used in
sizing feeders and estimating theoretical maximum power draw.
Note 3: The minimum received power level is -22.5 dBm which does not take into account any Rx
power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 4: The minimum received power level is -28 dBm which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Note 5: The maximum received power level is +7.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx
power monitor inaccuracy.
Technical specifications for 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G OCLD
NTK539PEE5/NTK539PFE5/NTK539PUE5)
Table 1-4
Technical specifications for Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G
line interface)
Parameter Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
(NTK539RAE5/NTK539RBE5/NTK539RCE5/NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5)
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation eDC40 Dual-polarization QPSK
Line rate 46.0 Gbit/s (carried as 11.5 Gbaud Dual-polarization QPSK)
Tunable wavelength range 1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm for C-band circuit packs (see DWDM
wavelengths on page 1-123 for a list of supported wavelengths)
Central Wavelength Accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -11 to -3 dBm
Tx Power monitor accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver
Receiver type Balanced PIN
Connector type LC
Wavelength range C-Band (1528.77 nm to 1566.72 nm)
EOL)
-20 dBm (per channel) (see Note 3 and Note 4)
Receiver overload 0 dBm (per channel) (see Note 4 and Note 5)
7 dBm (total power) (see Note 4 and Note 5)
Receiver damage level 17 dBm (total power) (see Note 4)
Rx Power monitor accuracy +/- 2 dB (per channel) at power levels >= -10 dBm (see Note 4)
+/- 0.5 dB (total power) at power levels >= -10 dBm (see Note 4)
Rx Optical Signal to Noise Ra-
tio (OSNR)
10.0 dB
Latency
Refer to Latency specifications for 40G circuit packs on page 1-126 for 40G
OCLD latency values.
(PMD) tolerance
30 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RAE5
10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RBE5
10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RCE5
10 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539RDE5
30 ps [mean DGD] for NTK539REE5
tolerance
+/- 50000 ps/nm
Reach Up to 2300 km for NTK539RAE5
Up to 2300 km for NTK539RBE5
Up to 1000 km for NTK539RCE5
Up to 300 km for NTK539RDE5
Submarine reach for NTK539REE5
25 (+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Note 3: The minimum per channel received power level is -22.5 dBm which does not take into account
any Rx power monitor inaccuracy.
Note 4: The Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One
for total input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when, connected to the
CCMD12 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]). And one for channel input power (the channel
corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). When the Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
is used in colored Photonic systems, the two 40G OCLD Rx interface detectors see similar power
levels. In colored line systems, the total input power monitor is the preferred monitor for channel power
since it is more accurate.
Note 5: The maximum per channel received power level is 0 dBm, which does not take into account
Technical specifications for Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G
line interface)
Parameter Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
(NTK539RAE5/NTK539RBE5/NTK539RCE5/NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5)
40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and
NTK529SJE5)
Overview
This type of circuit pack is used to transparently map the
OC-768/STM-256/OTM3/40GE clients onto an adjacent 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack (G.709 OTU3
frame interface) via the backplane.
This release of 6500 supports the following variants of the 40G OCI circuit
packs:
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit pack (also referred to as 40G OCI)
(NTK529SAE5)
OC-768/STM-256 clients onto an adjacent 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack (G.709
OTU3 frame interface) via the backplane.
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit pack (also referred to as
40/43G OCI) (NTK529SDE5)
OC-768/STM-256/OTM3 clients onto an adjacent 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack (G.709
OTU3 frame interface) via the backplane.
40G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit pack (also referred to as 40G+
CFP OCI) (NTK529SJE5)
OC-768/STM-256/OTM3/ETH40G clients onto an adjacent 40G OCLD or,
40G UOCLD, or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack (G.709
OTU3 frame interface) via the backplane. Also the combination of a
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack and a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack
(NTK620AA) provides OTN mapping (OTU3 to ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0).
The 40G OCI includes a single fixed 40G OC-768/STM-256 client interface.
The 40/43G OCI includes a single fixed 40G OC-768/STM-256/OTM3 client
interface. The 40G+ CFP OCI includes a single pluggable 40G
OC-768/STM-256/OTM3/ETH40G client interface.
Figure 1-5 on page 1-24 shows the faceplate of a 40G OCI
1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit pack. Figure 1-6 on page 1-25 shows the
faceplate of a 40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit pack. Figure 1-7 on
page 1-26 shows the faceplate of a 40G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit
pack.
Figure 1-8 on page 1-27 provides a functional block diagram of the 40G OCI
circuit pack. Figure 1-9 on page 1-28 provides a functional block diagram of
the 40/43G OCI circuit pack. Figure 1-10 on page 1-29 provides a functional
block diagram of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack.
Figure 1-5
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit pack faceplate
Type A
40G OCI
1xOC-768/STM-256
Rx
Tx
Fail
Ready
In Use
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
1
Figure 1-6
40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit pack faceplate
Type A
40G OCI
1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3
Rx
Tx
Fail
Ready
In Use
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
1
Figure 1-7
40G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit pack faceplate
Type A
Fail
Ready
In Use
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
Red triangle (Fail)
40G OCI
Multi-Protocol
1xCFP
Yellow circle (LOS)
Transmit/receive CFP dual LC connector
1
1
T
R
Figure 1-8
40G OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529SAE5)
40G Transponder
Module
OTU3+
Mapper
OTU3+
Demapper
Power
Supply
Sync
Processor
Module
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
1
Figure 1-9
40/43G OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529SDE5)
40/43G Transponder
Module
OTU3+
Mapper
OTU3+
Demapper
Power
Supply
Sync
Processor
Module
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
1
Figure 1-10
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529SJE5)
The 40G OCI circuit pack (NTK529SAE5), 40/43G OCI circuit pack
(NTK529SDE5), and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (NTK529SJE5) offer
different functions by working with different 40G circuit packs. For complete
details and graphics, refer to 40G functions on page 1-96.
40G CFP
OTU3+
Mapper
OTU3+
Demapper
Power
Supply
Sync
Processor
Module
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
1
The 40G OCI 1xOC-768/STM-256 circuit packs (NTK529SAE5), 40G OCI
Multi-Protocol 1xCFP circuit packs (NTK529SJE5), and 40G OCI
1xOC-768/STM-256/OTU3 circuit packs (NTK529SDE5) provide the following
functionality.
Line support
There are no line ports on the 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI
circuit packs.
Client support
40G OCI variant (NTK529SAE5) includes a fixed OC-768/STM-256 client
interface (port 1) offering 39.8 Gbit/s rate to facilitate client-side
interworking at OC768/STM256 signal rates.
40/43G OCI variant (NTK529SDE5) includes a fixed
OC-768/STM-256/OTM3 client interface (port 1) offering 39.8 Gbit/s and
43 Gbit/s rates to facilitate client-side interworking at
OC768/STM256/OTU3 signal rates.
40G+ CFP OCI variant (NTK529SJE5) includes a pluggable CFP
OC-768/STM-256/ETH40G/OTM3 client interface (port 1) offering 39.8
Gbit/s, 41.3 Gbit/s, and 43 Gbit/s rates to facilitates client-side
interworking at OC768/STM256/OTU3/40GE signal rates.
When mated with the 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack, the 40G+ CFP OCI
variant (NTK529SJE5) supports a pluggable CFP OTM3 client interface
(port 1) offering 43 Gbit/s rate to facilitate client-side interworking at OTU3
signal rate. The following OTN mappings are supported for OTN switching
applications:
OTU3 to ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0
same form and fit as 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD all
physical attributes (including LEDs) are at parity with 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
full transparency for OC-768/STM-256 clients when using 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI
ODU3 transparency on the OTU3 client of the 40G+ CFP OCI or
40/43G OCI circuit pack variant
full transparency on the ETH40G client of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
variant
40G OCI or 40/43G OCI circuit pack supports facility loopbacks on its
client interface (OC-768/STM-256 or OTM3).
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its
client interface (OC-768/STM-256, ETH40G, or OTM3). Terminal
loopback on the 40G+ CFP OCI turns off the transmit laser.
G.709 wrapper (OTU3)
Provisionable OTN tandem connection monitoring (TCM) for transponders
(only applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI variant; NTK529SJE5 variant)
offers GCC1 data communications channels between Broadband
interfaces
supports client side GCC0 data communications channels on the
40G+ CFP OCI or 40/43G OCI circuit pack variant
a 40G OTR using the 40G OCI circuit pack can interwork with a 40G OTR
using the 40/43G OCI or 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack provided that the
40/43G OCI or 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack client is provisioned as
OC-768/STM-256
a 40G OTR using the 40/43G OCI circuit pack can interwork with a 40G
OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack provided that the client on the
40/43G OCI circuit pack and 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack is provisioned as
OC-768/STM-256
a 40G OTR using the 40/43G OCI circuit pack can interwork with a 40G
OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack provided that the client on the
40/43G OCI circuit pack and 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack is provisioned as
OTU3
a 40G MOTR using the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CFE5 variant)
can interwork with a 40G OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack
provided that the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack client is provisioned as OTU3
and the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack clients are not provisioned to use the
11.05G or 11.09G ODU2 rates.
a 40G OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack can interwork with a 40G
OTR using the 40G+CFP OCI circuit pack when the clients are
provisioned differently. The following mixes are supported:
OTU3 at one end and OC-768/STM-256 at the other end.
OTU3 at one end and 40GE at the other end.
supports monitoring of OC-768/STM-256 section trace for 40G OCI,
40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs with option to edit the
expected Trace value (inducing a mismatch condition) with no support to
provision Tx Trace Value
clocking is used)
client protocols and mappings on 40G OCI circuit packs are shown in
Table 1-5.
Table 1-5
Client protocols and mapping for 40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and
NTK529SJE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
OPUk Mapping procedure Transparency
OC-768/STM-256
(39.813G 20 ppm)
Proprietary OPU3+ Proprietary Asynchronous
Mapping Procedure,
PT= 0x89
Data and timing transparent
40GBASE-R
(41.250G 100
ppm)
Proprietary OPU3+ Transcode + Proprietary
Asynchronous Mapping
Procedure,
PT= 0x8B
OTU3
(43.018G 20 ppm)
Proprietary OPU3+ Proprietary Asynchronous
Mapping Procedure,
PT= 0x8A
ODU3 transparent,
timing transparent
OTU3,
OC-768/STM-256
handoff
(43.018G 20 ppm)
Proprietary OPU3+ Mapping used towards
OTU3 client:
Bit-synchronous mapping
procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
Mapping used towards
OTU3+ line:
Proprietary
Bit-Asynchronous Mapping
Procedure,
PT= 0x89
ODU3 transparent,
timing transparent
OTU3, 40GE
handoff
(43.018G 20 ppm)
OTU3 client:
Transcode + Generic
Mapping Procedure (GMP),
PT= 0x07
OTU3+ line:
Proprietary Transcode +
Procedure,
PT= 0x8B
ODU3 transparent,
timing transparent
The 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs only support the
2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder and OTN (40G+ CFP OCI only)
cross-connection type.
Cross-connection rate
The 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs only support the
ODU3 transponder and OTN (40G+ CFP OCI only) cross-connection rate.
OTU3, 4xODU2
handoff
(43.018G 20 ppm)
OTU3 client:
Procedure (AMP),
PT= 20
OTU3+ line:
Proprietary Asynchronous
Mapping Procedure,
PT= 0x20
ODU3 transparent,
timing transparent
Note: OTU2 rate is OPU2 rate x 255/238 = 10.709G 20 ppm. OTU2e rate is OPU2e rate x 255/238 =
11.096G 100 ppm. OTU1e rate is OPU1e rate x 255/238 = 11.049G 100 ppm.
Client protocols and mapping for 40G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SAE5, NTK529SDE5, and
NTK529SJE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
OPUk Mapping procedure Transparency
Supported CFPs
There are no CFP ports on the 40G OCI or 40/43G OCI circuit packs.
However, a 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack contains a client CFP pluggable
module as seen in Table 1-6.
The 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs support the
following monitored entities:
Client interfaces
PM collection of SONET section (S)/SDH regenerator section (RS)
and SONET line (L)/SDH multiplex section (MS) for OC-768/STM-256
facilities
PM collection for OTU3 layer for 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit packs
PM collection for ODU3 layer for OTM3 mapping layer facilities for
40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs
PM collection for protection switch count/duration for ODU3 layer for
OTM3 mapping layer facilities for 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
Table 1-6
Supported CFP modules for the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported CFP module
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in a CFP may be supported by the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack. Refer
to Table 1-27 on page 1-152 to find out which facility types can be supported by 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs.
40G OCI Multi-Protocol
1xCFP (NTK529SJE5)
(see Note)
PCFP
40GBASE-LR4, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA11BAE6)
40GBASE-SR4, 4x10G, MMF, 850nm, 100m, MPO, CFP
(NTTA11AA)
39.8G to 44.6G, 40G Serial, SMF, 1550nm, 2km CFP
(NTTA13EEE6)
41.2G to 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 40km CFP
(160-9013-900)
39.8G to 44.6G, 4x10G CWDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA12BAE6)
Note: On the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the pluggable OC768/STM256/OTM3/ETH40G
CFP client interface (40G+). There are no line ports on the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs. A virtual OTM3
port 1 is also provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack. This is a mapping port used to
demarcate the ODU3 layer but does not have a physical connection.
PM collection for TCMTTP, TCMCTP, ETH40G facilities for 40G+ CFP
OCI circuit packs
PM collection of Physical layer for OC-768/STM-256 facilities
PM collection of Physical layer for OTU3 facilities for 40/43G OCI and
40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs
PM collection of Physical layer for ETH40G facilities for 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit packs
operational measurements for ETH40G facilities for 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit packs
The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored entities
when mated with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack:
PM collection for TCMTTP and TCMCTP facilities
323-1851-520.
Alarms
Attention: Some of the alarms listed below do not apply to all three variants
of the 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs.
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
Pluggable alarms (40G+ CFP OCI variant only)
Circuit Pack Missing - Pluggable
Circuit Pack Mismatch - Pluggable
Circuit Pack Failed - Pluggable
Circuit Pack Unknown - Pluggable
Autoprovisioning Mismatch - Pluggable
Intercard Suspected - Pluggable
Provisioning Incompatible - Pluggable
OTM facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
OTU Signal degrade
OTU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU BDI
OPU AIS
OPU Payload Type Mismatch
Far End Client Signal Fail
GCC0 Link Fail
GCC1 Link Fail
Laser Off Far End Failure Triggered
Lockout active
Protection Channel Match Fail
Integrated Test Set Configured
Integrated Test Set Data Save In Progress
Event Log Full
Mapping Mismatch
OCn/STMn facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
AIS
Trace Identifier Mismatch
Signal Fail
Signal Degrade (NTK529SJE5 variants only)
RFI
Rx Power Out of Range
Event Log Full
Loss of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Loss of Clock
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
OTU Signal Degrade
OTU BDI
PTP Facility alarms
Loss of Signal
Ethernet alarms
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Data Synch
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Excessive Error Ratio
Local Fault
Remote Fault
Event Log Full
TCM Facility alarms
ODU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
TCM Loss of Tandem Connection
ODU Signal Degrade
WAN alarms
CMF UPI Mismatch
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and
40/43G OCI circuit packs:
are one-port single slot interfaces.
packet-optical shelf.
40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs cannot be
equipped in the NTK503MAE5 and NTK503NAE5 variants of 2-slot shelf.
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack can be equipped in slots 1 and 2 of the
NTK503LA variant of 2-slot shelf.
any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD, 40G OCI/40G OCLD, 40G OCI/40G UOCLD, 40G+ CFP
OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD, 40G+
CFP OCI/40G UOCLD, 40/43G OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD,
40/43G OCI/40G OCLD, or 40/43G OCI/40G UOCLD is possible (for
example, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack on left or
right of 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD
circuit pack) starting in any slot with the exception of connections across
slots 6 to 7 and 8 to 9 for 14-slot shelf types. Note that if you are planning
full-fill unprotected or regen 40G applications, connections across the
above slots will not occur as they will be using the recommended slots 1
to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8 (not applicable to 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA)), 9 to 10, 11 to 12, and 13 to 14 for 14-slot shelf types.
OCLD circuit pack is mated with one 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack (OTR
configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in slot 1 or 2 and 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit pack can be in other slot.
a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack between two 40G
OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit packs
provides 1+1 OTN line-side protection. Signals are exchanged between
triplets using the backplane. For 1+1 protection, the choices are
slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {9,10,11}, and {12,13,14} for 14-slot shelf types.
slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {13,14,15}, {16,17,18}, {21,22,23}, {24,25,26},
any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G+ CFP OCI/40G OTN XCIF is
possible as long as 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is in even slot (for example,
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack on left side of 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack).
The exception is slot 8 for 14-slot shelf type, and slot 10 for 32-slot shelf
type. The use of 40G OCI (NTK529SAE5) or 40/43G OCI (NTK529SDE5)
circuit pack is not supported in combination with 40G OTN XCIF.
two 40G OTR groups (40G+ CFP OCI/40G OCLD or
40G+ CFP OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD) provisioned in
consecutive slots can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without
any cross-connect). The first 40G OTR group must be in the lower
numbered slots (considered the working path) and the second 40G OTR
group must be in the higher numbered slots (considered the protection
path). The working/protection path slot is the slot number in which the
working/protection 40G+ CFP OCI is seated. The 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs must always be in the odd slots and the 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs in the adjacent even slots.
The working and protection 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs require a CFP on
the client interface. For 1+1 TPT protection, the choices are
slots [{1,2}, {3,4}], [{5,6}, {7,8}], [{11,12}, {13,14}], [{15,16}, {17,18}],
[{21,22}, {23,24}], [{25,26}, {27,28}], [{31,32}, {33,34}], and [{35,36},
equipped with or without cross-connect circuit packs.
when deploying a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack:
NTK503SA), you cannot provision a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G
OCI circuit pack in slot 7 or 8 if one of these slots already contains a
cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit packs.
8 if one of these slots already contains a 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf
(NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit packs.
NTK503SA), when the 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit
packs are installed in slot 7 or 8, only Broadband circuit packs or Photonic
circuit packs can be provisioned in the other interface slots (slots 1 to 6
and 9 to14), as MSPP interface circuit packs require a cross-connect
circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA)
cannot be equipped with 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit
packs. See Part 1 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10CF (Chapter 3) for a full list
of supported Broadband and Photonic circuit packs.
Table 1-7 lists the transmitter and receiver specifications for the 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI optical interface circuit packs. The
governing document for the optical specifications for 40G OCI and 40/43G
OCI circuit packs is ITU G.693, in particular application class VSR2000-3R2
for 40G OCI and application class VSR2000-3L2F for 40/43G OCI. For the
40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack, application class is tied to the CFP module used
in this circuit pack.
Table 1-7
Transmitter and receiver specifications for 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI optical
interface circuit packs (40G, 40G+, and 40/43G client interface)
Parameter 40G OCI
(NTK529SAE5)
40/43G OCI
(NTK529SDE5)
40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJE5)
40G rate
(Note 1)
43G rate
(Note 2)
Weight (estimated) 1.5 kg (3.4 lb) 1.5 kg (3.4 lb) 1.0 kg (2.1 lb)
Power consumption Typical (W): 80
(see Note 3)
Power Budget (W): 89
(see Note 4)
Typical (W): 80
(see Note 3)
(see Note 4)
Typical (W): 33
(see Note 3)
(see Note 4)
Transmitter
Connector type LC LC LC (see Note 5)
Laser modulation IMDD NRZ IMDD NRZ IMDD NRZ
Wavelength range 1530 nm to 1565 nm 1530 nm to
1565 nm
1530 nm to
1565 nm
Minimum laser side mode
suppression ratio (SMSR)
35 dB 35 dB 35 dB
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 dB 8.2 dB 8.2 dB
Transmit output power 0 to 3 dBm 0 to 3 dBm 0 to 3 dBm
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 1.5 dB +/- 1.5 dB +/- 1.5 dB
Electronic dispersion
compensation range
N/A N/A N/A
Receiver
Receiver type PIN PIN PIN (see Note 5)
Connector type LC LC LC
Wavelength range wide band (C-Band) wide band
(C-Band)
wide band
(C-Band)
Receiver sensitivity
(minimum EOL), BER not
worse than 1E-12
-6 dBm -6 dBm -8 dBm (see
Note 6)
Minimum receiver overload 3 dBm (see Note 7) 3 dBm (see
Note 7)
3 dBm (see
Note 7)
Receiver damage level 5 dBm 5 dBm 5 dBm
Polarization mode
dispersion (PMD)
7.5 ps [peak DGD] 7.5 ps
[peak
DGD]
7.5 ps [peak
DGD]
Maximum chromatic
dispersion tolerance
40 ps/nm 40 ps/nm 40 ps/nm
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 1 dB +/- 1 dB +/- 1 dB
Optical path
Optical path budget MPI-S
to MPI-R
0 to 4 dB 0 to 4 dB 0 to 6 dB (see Note 5)
Maximum optical path
penalty
2 dB 2 dB 2 dB
Parameter 40G OCI
(NTK529SAE5)
40/43G OCI
(NTK529SDE5)
40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJE5)
40G rate
(Note 1)
43G rate
(Note 2)
Latency
OCI latency values.
Note 1: The technical specifications written in this column for 40/43G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SDE5)
are only applicable to 40G rate.
Note 2: The technical specifications written in this column for 40/43G OCI circuit packs (NTK529SDE5)
are only applicable to 43G rate.
Note 3: The typical power consumption values are based on operation at an ambient temperature of 25
(+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Note 5: For optical CFP client specifications, see the following sections in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10CF (Chapter 8):
CFP optical specifications
Note 6: The BER for this application is specified after error correction only in ITU-T Rec. G.693.
Note 7: Although the receiver overload threshold is set at 8.5 dBm in Site Manager, the physical power
at the input of the receiver that can be guaranteed is 3 dBm and must not be exceeded.
Parameter 40G OCI
(NTK529SAE5)
40/43G OCI
(NTK529SDE5)
40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJE5)
40G rate
(Note 1)
43G rate
(Note 2)
40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5)
Overview
The 4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit pack (also referred to as
40G MUX OCI) is used for transparent aggregation of up to four 10G client
channels into a G.709 OTU3+ signal for handoff across the backplane to the
adjacent 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD.
The 40G MUX OCI includes four 10G, XFP-based client interfaces. Each 10G
client is independently configurable and independently operated. Non-OTU2
clients are first mapped into an ODU2 prior to multiplexing. OTU2 clients have
the OTU2 layer terminated on ingress, resulting in an ODU2 as well. The four
resulting ODU2 signals are then multiplexed into an OTU3+ frame structure
and this OTU3+ is then transmitted to the 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD via the backplane.
The following variants of 40G MUX OCI circuit packs are supported:
NTK525CAE5
NTK525CFE5
Also the combination of a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CFE5 variant
only) and a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK620AA) provides the following
OTN mappings.
OC-192/STM-64 to ODU2
10GE to ODU2
OTU2 to ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0
The 40G MUX OCI variants offer the same functionality with NTK525CFE5
consuming less power. Table 1-8 on page 1-46 lists some other differences
between two variants of 40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
Attention: The NTK525CFE5 variant of the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack does
not interwork with the NTK525CAE5 variant at the OTU3 layer (cannot be
book-ended). This means that you cannot have an NTK525CAE5 circuit
pack at one end of the 40G link and an NTK525CFE5 at the other end of the
40G link. However the NTK525CFE5 variant does interwork with the
NTK525CAE5 variant via the 10G client ports. This means that you can
connect an NTK525CAE5 circuit pack to a NTK525CFE5 circuit pack via
XFP ports (assuming same client protocol/XFP type is used on both),
therefore separating 40G channels on the same link. In-service PEC editing
from NTK525CAE5 variant to NTK525CFE5 variant is supported. However
the NTK525CFE5 circuit pack cannot be used as a spare for the
NTK525CAE5 circuit pack unless 40G MUX OCI circuit packs at both ends
of the 40G link are replaced at the same time.
Table 1-8
40G MUX OCI circuit pack variants
Functionality 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
NTK525CAE5 NTK525CFE5
FC800 protocol support on FLEX facility (see Note 1 and Note 2) Not supported Supported
FC1200 protocol support on FLEX facility (see Note 1 and Note 2) Not supported Supported
TPT client side protection Not supported Supported
DWDM tunable XFPs Not supported Supported
G.7041 compliant Client Management Frames (CMF) and
Ordered Set Transparency (see Note 3)
Not supported Supported
Terminal loopback Not supported Supported
Note 1: The FLEX uses a flexible facility concept where there is a common facility type (FLEX) that
has a protocol attribute to indicate what facility it can support. The intent is to group all protocols into
this model. For example, for the NTK525CFE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, the FLEX
facility includes FC800 (only when using NTTP86BA or NTTP86AA XFP), and FC1200 protocols
(only when using NTTP86AA, NTTP84BA, or NTTP86BA XFP).
Note 2: Refer to Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310 (Chapter 1) to
see the type of pluggables used to support FC800 and FC1200 protocols in this circuit pack.
Note 3: Compliancy to G.7041 Sub-clause 7.9.2.2, which provides a mapping mode that preserves
the Ordered Set information of the 10GBase-R client signal by mapping Ordered Sets into their own
GFP-F frames (Client Data Frame). Consequently, this mapping mode does not require the
GFP Client Management Frames (CMF) to communicate local faults, remote faults, all
clears, and other PCS layer ordered set information. Therefore, this feature allows 6500
systems to better interop with other vendors products when using 10GE GFP mapping.
not interwork with the 40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) in a 40G link.
Use the NTK525CAE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit pack to interwork with
the 40G XCIF circuit pack in a 40G link.
Figure 1-11 shows the faceplate of a 4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit
pack and Figure 1-12 on page 1-48 shows the functional block diagram of a
40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
Figure 1-11
4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit pack faceplate
Type A
Fail
Ready
In Use
S
/N
N
T030M
E
E
9999E
N
TU
D
99E
E
E
E
E
E
E
99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
- Used to communicate hardware or
software functional state
- Card initializing = Blinking LED;
Card OK = LED on;
Card not ready = LED off
Red triangle (Fail)
software failure state
- Card not failed = LED off,
Card Failed = LED on
- Used to communicate whether
circuit pack can be extracted
- Equipment in-service = LED on;
Equipment out-of-service = LED off
4x10G MUX
4x10-11.1G SFP
Transmit/receive XFP
dual LC connector
Red/yellow bi-color circle (Fail/LOS)
- Used to communicate Rx Loss
of Signal/optical module (XFP) fail
- Red = module fail;
Yellow = Rx Loss of Signal
1
2
3
4
Figure 1-12
40G MUX OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK525CAE5/NTK525CFE5)
The 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) offer
Left
Mate
XFP
10G
Client Monitor
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
eXFP
10G
Client Monitor
XFP
10G
Client Monitor
XFP
10G
Client Monitor
OTU3+
Mapper/
Demapper
Backplane
Interface
Right
Mate
Sync
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
2
3
4
1
The 4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G XFP circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and
NTK525CFE5) provide the following functionality.
Line support
There are no line ports on the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (except for OTN
switching and OTN Control Plane where both line and add/drop ports are
supported when NTK525CFE5 circuit pack is mated with OTN XCIF circuit
pack).
Client support
when in Broadband mode, up to four OC192/STM64, ETH10G, or OTM2
(at 10.7, 11.05, or 11.09) client interfaces (ports 1 to 4), a virtual OTM3
port 100 is also provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack
when in OTN switching mode (POTS), up to four PTP client interfaces
(ports 1 to 4)
the OTN digital wrappers enable transporting any mix of the client rates
shown below:
complete transparency for OC-192/STM-64/10G-BASE-W (9.95328
Gbit/s) and 10GBASE-R (10.3125 Gbit/s)
ODU2 transparency for OTU2 (10.7 Gbit/s), OTU2 (11.05 Gbit/s), and
OTU2 (11.09 Gbit/s)
each client port supports:
optical power monitoring with 3 dB accuracy
threshold crossings alerts (TCA) based on Rx Power High and Rx
Power Low
offers fixed C-band 100 GHz-compliant EML DWDM XFP client interfaces
(1546.92 nm to 1554.13 nm)
offers tunable C-band 50 GHz-compliant DWDM XFP tunable client
interfaces (1528.38 nm to 1568.77 nm)
multirate DWDM, SR, IR, and LR client via XFP optics
facilitates broad cross-portfolio interoperability at 10G line rate on the
client interfaces
FEC support (RS8)
Attention: The RS8 FEC algorithm is also known as ITU-T G.709 RS-8.
GCC1 supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 100). GCC0
supported on the OTM2 client facilities (ports 1 to 4).
40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports facility loopbacks on its client
interfaces (OC-192/STM-64, ETH10G, FLEX, and OTM2).
40G MUX OCI circuit pack (NTK525CF variant only) also supports
terminal loopbacks on its client interfaces (OC-192/STM-64, ETH10G,
FLEX, and OTM2). Terminal loopback on the 40G MUX OCI turns off the
transmit laser.
Provisionable OTN tandem connection monitoring (TCM) for client ports
clients protocols and mappings on 40G MUX OCI circuit packs are shown
in Table 1-9:
Table 1-9
Client protocols and mapping for 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
OPUk (rate) (see Note) Mapping procedure Transparency
OC-192/STM-64
(9.953G 20 ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G 20 ppm)
Bit-synchronous Mapping
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
10GBASE-W
(9.953G 20 ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G 20 ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
OTU2
(10.709G 20 ppm)
N/A N/A ODU2 transparent,
timing transparent
OTU1e
(11.049G 100 ppm)
timing transparent
OTU2e
(11.096G 100 ppm)
timing transparent
10GBASE-R
(10.313G 100 ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G 20 ppm)
GFP-F, PT= 0x05 Ethernet MAC and LF/RF
transparent
Extended OPU2
(10.000G 20 ppm)
GFP-F with Ordered Sets
transparency
(NTK525CFE5 only),
PT= 0x09
Ethernet MAC and
preamble and ordered sets
transparent
Extended OPU2
(10.000G 20 ppm)
GFP-F, PT= 0x08F
(default)
Ethernet MAC and
preamble transparent
OPU2e
(10.356G 100 ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
OPU1e
(10.313G 100 ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x11
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the 2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder
and OTN cross-connection type, including OTN Control Plane sub-network
connections.
Cross-connection rate
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the ODU3 transponder and OTN
cross-connection rate, including OTN Control Plane sub-network connections.
Supported XFPs
Table 1-10 provides a list of the XFPs that are supported on the 40G MUX OCI
circuit pack.
FC800
(8.500G 100 ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G 20 ppm)
Proprietary enhanced
CBR mapping
(NTK525CFE5 only),
PT= 0x81 (default)
FC1200
(10.519G 100 ppm)
OPU2e
(10.356G 100 ppm)
GFP-T (NTK525CFE5
only)
MAC transparent
Table 1-10
Supported XFP modules for the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported XFP module
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in an XFP may be supported by the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack. Refer
to Table 1-27 on page 1-152 to find out which facility types can be supported by 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs.
Client protocols and mapping for 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
4x10G MUX 4x10-11.1G
XFP (NTK525CAE5 and
NTK525CFE5)
(see Note 1)
P10GSEL
OC192/STM64 IR-2 / S-64.2 / 10GBase-ER,EW (NTTP80DA)
P10GEL
10GBASE-SR/SW, 850 nm, 30-300 m, MMF (NTTP81AA) (see
Note 2)
P10GSOEL
OC192/STM64 SR-1/ I-64.1 / 10GBase-LR,LW / OTU2 / 10G
FC1200 (NTTP84BA)
Multirate 15xx.yy nm EML DWDM 1600 ps/nm XFP (NTK587Ax to
NTK587Dx where x= see Note 3)
5G-11.09G multirate 1310 nm (NTTP86BAE6), only supported in
NTK525CFE5 variant
8.5G-10.52G multi-rate, 850nm MMF (NTTP86AA), only supported
in NTK525CFE5 variant
9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP84AAE6)
9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP81KAE6)
PXFP
Multirate 15xx.yy nm EML DWDM 800 ps/nm XFP (NTK587Ex to
NTK587Hx where x= see Note 3)
Multirate 15xx.yy nm DWDM 3200 ps/nm XFP (NTK588xx where xx=
see Note 3), only supported in NTK525CAE5 variant
Multirate 1528.38 to 1568.77 (1-88) 50GHz DWDM XFP
(NTK583AAE6)
Multirate 1528.38 to 1568.77 (1-88) 50GHz Type 2 DWDM XFP
(NTK583AB)
Multirate 15xx.yy 15xx.yy Tunable Dispersion Tolerant
DWDM (NTK589xx where xx= see Note 3) (only applicable to
NTK525CFE5 variant)
Note 1: On the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, port 1 to 4 are the client interfaces (FC800, FC1200,
OC192/STM64, ETH10G, or OTM2 (at 10.7, 11.05, or 11.09) when 40G MUX OCI is in Broadband
mode and PTP when in OTN switching mode (POTS)). There is no line ports on 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs.
Note 2: MMF stands for multi-mode fiber.
Note 3: Refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, Chapter 3: Table Multirate
DWDM/CWDM pluggable optics modules (XFP), for the complete list of ordering codes.
Supported XFP modules for the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported XFP module
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored entities:
OTM3 mapping layer interface
Client interfaces
facility
PM collection for TCMTTP, TCMCTP, ETH10G, FLEX (FC800 and
FC1200), and WAN facilities
PM collection for Physical layer, except for WAN facilities
operational measurements for ETH10G, FLEX (FC800 and FC1200),
and WAN facilities
The 40G MUX OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored entities when
mated with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack:
PM collection for STTP facilities
PM collection for ETTP facilities
operational measurements for ETTP facilities
323-1851-520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
Pluggable alarms
Circuit Pack Missing - Pluggable
Circuit Pack Failed - Pluggable
Circuit Pack Unknown - Pluggable
Provisioning Incompatible - Pluggable
OTM facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
OTU Signal Degrade
OTU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU BDI
OPU AIS
GCC0 Link Failure
GCC1 Link Failure
Laser Off far End Failure Triggered
Lockout Active
Multiplexed Rate Mismatch
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
AIS
Signal Fail
RFI
Frequency Out of Range
Ethernet and fiber channel facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Local Fault
Remote Fault
Loss of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Loss of Clock
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
OTU Signal Degrade
OTU BDI
ETTP facility alarms
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Local Fault
Remote Fault
OPU AIS
STTP facility alarms
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
AIS
RFI
Signal Fail
Signal Degrade
OPU AIS
Flex facility alarms
Loss of Signal
Loss of Data Synch
Loss of Clock
Fiber Channel Link Not Operational
Local Fault
Remote Fault
TCM Facility alarms
ODU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU Signal Degrade
WAN alarms
Link Down
Loss of Frame delineation
Far End Client Rx Signal Failure
CMF UPI Mismatch
Photonic alarms
Adjacency Mismatch
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G MUX OCI circuit packs:
is a four-port single slot interface
Attention: All 40G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 40G
groups if the shelf is adequately powered. However, for specific feeder
ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and
some or all of the remaining slots may need to be equipped with filler circuit
packs to avoid exceeding shelf power capacity. Prior to equipping the shelf
with high power circuit packs, you must always consider power budgeting
and power feeds by referring to the "Power specifications" section in Part 3
of 6500 Planning, NTRN10CF (Chapter 8).
packet-optical shelf
both NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5 variants of 40G MUX OCI circuit
pack cannot be equipped in the NTK503MAE5 and NTK503NAE5 variants
of 2-slot shelf.
NTK525CFE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit pack can be equipped in
slots 1 and 2 of the NTK503LA variant of 2-slot shelf.
any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD or 40G
MUX OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD is possible (for example, 40G
MUX OCI circuit pack on left or right of 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack) starting in any slot with the
exception of connections across slots 6 to 7 and 8 to 9 for 14-slot shelf
types. Note that if you are planning full-fill unprotected or regen 40G
applications, connections across the above slots will not occur, as they will
be using the recommended slots 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6, 7 to 8 (not applicable
to 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA)), 9 to 10, 11 to 12, and 13 to
14 for 14-slot shelf types. However for 40G MUX OCI/40G UOCLD slot
combination, you must see the details in 40G UOCLD circuit packs
(NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) on page 1-75.
OCLD circuit pack is mated with one 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
(NTK525CFE5 variant) (MOTR configuration), the 40G OCLD can be in
slot 1 or 2 and 40G MUX OCI circuit pack can be in other slot.
a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack between two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs provides 1+1 OTN line-side
protection. Signals are exchanged between triplets using the backplane.
For 1+1 protection, the choices are:
slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {9,10,11}, and {12,13,14} for 14-slot shelf types
slots {1,2,3}, {4,5,6}, {13,14,15}, {16,17,18}, {21,22,23}, {24,25,26},
a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack between two 40G UOCLD circuit packs
provides 1+1 OTN line-side protection. Signals are exchanged between
triplets using the backplane. For 1+1 protection, the choices are
slots {2,3,4,5,6} and {10,11,12,13,14} for 14-slot shelf types
slots {2,3,4,5,6}, {14,15,16,17,18}, {22,23,24,25,26}, and
{34,35,36,37,38} for 32-slot shelf type.
slots {2,3,4,5,6} for 7-slot shelf type.
two 40G MOTR groups (40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD or 40G MUX OCI/
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD while 40G MUX OCI circuit pack must
be NTK525CFE5 variant) provisioned in consecutive slots can be
configured as 1+1 protection using TPT (without any cross-connect). The
first 40G MOTR group must be in the lower numbered slots (considered
the working path) and the second 40G MOTR group must be in the higher
numbered slots (considered the protection path). The working/protection
path slot is the slot number in which the working/protection 40G MUX OCI
is seated. The 40G MUX OCI circuit packs must always be in the odd slots
and the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs in
the adjacent even slots. The working and protection 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs require an XFP on the client interface. The 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD at one end of protection group must talk
to the same 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD at the other
end of protection group.
any adjacent two-slot combination of 40G MUX OCI/40G OTN XCIF is
possible as long as 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is in even slot (for example,
40G MUX OCI circuit pack on left side of 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack). The
exception is slot 8 for 14-slot shelf type, and slot 10 for 32-slot shelf type.
The use of NTK525CAE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit pack is not
supported in combination with 40G OTN XCIF.
the maximum number of back-to-back 40G Mux OCI regenerator sites is
eight.
Attention: The regen limits do not apply to "daisy chain/ loopback" systems
acceptance test set soaks. It is expected that the number of
"daisy chain/ loopback" XFP connections can exceed these limits for idle test
set soaks (no fiber pulls, card re-seats, protection switching, etc.) at ambient
temperature with nominal clock frequencies.
when deploying a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack:
NTK503SA), you cannot provision a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack in slot 7 or
8 if one of these slots already contains a cross-connect circuit pack. Slots
7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped
with 40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
8 if one of these slots already contains a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack. Slots
7 and 8 of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped
with 40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
NTK503SA), when the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs are installed in slot 7
or 8, only Broadband circuit packs or Photonic circuit packs can be
provisioned in the other interface slots (slots 1 to 6 and 9 to14), as MSPP
interface circuit packs require a cross-connect circuit pack. Slots 7 and 8
of a 14-slot packet-optical shelf (NTK503SA) cannot be equipped with
40G MUX OCI circuit packs. See Part 1 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10CF
(Chapter 3) for a full list of supported Broadband and Photonic circuit
packs.
Table 1-11 lists the weight, power consumption, and XFP specifications for the
40G MUX OCI optical interface circuit pack.
Latency
MUX OCI latency values.
Table 1-11
Technical specifications for 40G MUX optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 40G MUX OCI
NTK525CAE5 NTK525CFE5
Weight (estimated) 1.1 kg (2.5 lb) 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)
Power consumption Typical (W): 80 (see
Note 1 and Note 3)
(see Note 2 and Note 3)
Typical (W): 36 (see
Note 1 and Note 3)
XFP specifications (see Note 4)
25 (+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Note 3: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with XFPs, the power values published in this table
do not include XFPs power values. You must add 2 W to typical power value and 3 W to power budget
for each XFP module with reach less than IR-2/S-64.2b. You must add 3 W to typical power value and
4 W to power budget for each XFP module with IR-2/S-64.2b reach or greater.
Note 4: For optical XFP client specifications, see the following sections in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for SONET/SDH applications
Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for 10G Ethernet applications
XFP transmitter, receiver, and link specifications for OTU2 applications
Multirate DWDM/CWDM XFP optical specifications
Multirate Tunable DWDM XFP optical specifications
40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5)
Overview
The XC I/F 40G STS-1/HO circuit pack (also referred to as 40G XCIF) allows
STS-n grooming capabilities between 6500 MSPP interfaces and 6500
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit packs by
using the shelf cross-connect circuit pack. It provides the following
capabilities:
40G line integration within 6500 MSPP applications
40G interfacing with the existing cross-connect architecture
leveraging of the existing STS traffic routing and protection capabilities of
the cross-connect for 40G circuit packs
The 40G XCIF circuit pack provides up to 40G of bandwidth shared between
two slots for STSn/STMn traffic as follows:
20G from/to the cross-connect circuit pack to/from the 40G XCIF slot
20G from/to the cross-connect circuit pack via the mate 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD slot to/from the
40G XCIF slot
not interwork with the 40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK525FAE5) in a 40G link.
Use the NTK525CAE5 variant of 40G MUX OCI circuit pack to interwork with
the 40G XCIF circuit pack in a 40G link.
Figure 1-13 on page 1-64 shows the faceplate of a 40G XCIF circuit pack and
Figure 1-14 on page 1-65 shows the functional block diagram of a 40G XCIF
circuit pack.
Figure 1-13
40G XCIF circuit pack faceplate
Type A
XC I/F
40G STS-1/HO
Fail
Ready
In Use
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Red triangle (Fail)
Figure 1-14
40G XCIF circuit pack block diagram (NTK525FAE5)
40G Backplane
Interface
Sync
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
Legend
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
OTU3+
Mapper/
Demapper
40G / 4 x10G
SONET/SDH
OHP
OHP Overhead Processor
XC
Mate
The 40G XCIF circuit pack (NTK529FAE5) offers different functions by
working with different 40G circuit packs. For complete details and graphics,
refer to 40G functions on page 1-96.
The 40G XCIF circuit packs (NTK525FAE5) provide the following functionality.
supports up to four virtual OC-192/STM-64 ports (101-104) that are user
manually provisioned, up to four virtual OTM2 10.7G ports (101-104) that
are auto-created when the OC-192/STM-64 ports are user provisioned
and one OTM3 virtual port (port 100) that is auto-created when the
40G XCIF equipment is provisioned. The OC-192/STM-64 facilities can be
manually provisioned provided that the 40G XCIF circuit pack is mated
with the adjacent 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or
40G UOCLD circuit pack (that is, an ODU3 connection is assigned
between the 40G XCIF OTM3 facility and the 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD OTM3 facility).
offers OTU2 rate of 10.709 Gbit/s for OTM2 facility
terminates section/RS and line/MS overhead on OC-192/STM-64 facilities
terminates section/RS and line/MS overhead bytes in Rx direction
inserts section/RS and line/MS overhead bytes in Tx direction
terminates GCC1 overhead on OTM3 facility
terminates GCC1 overhead bytes in Rx direction
inserts GCC1 overhead bytes in Tx direction
line/MS DCC for SONET/SDH Control Plane
supports unprotected, 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, 1+1/MSP linear, and
UPSR/SNCP traffic protection schemes on the four virtual
OC-192/STM-64 ports (101-104)
line timing synchronization support (provides the handover between the
line timing and the shelf)
supports SSM monitoring/generation
supports Control Plane (supported as both add/drop Control Plane facility
and Network Control Plane facility)
6500.
The 40G XCIF circuit pack supports the following cross-connection types:
path cross-connection types when connecting to a shelf cross-connect
circuit pack:
1WAY (Unidirectional)
2WAY (Bidirectional)
1WAYPR (Unidirectional Path Ring)
2WAYPR (Bidirectional Path Ring)
2WAYDPR (Dual Bidirectional Path Ring)
Transponder cross-connection type when connecting to a 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack:
The 40G XCIF circuit pack supports the following cross-connection rates:
path cross-connection rates when connecting to a shelf cross-connect
circuit pack for OC-192/STM-64 facilities
STS1/HO VC3, STS3c/VC4, STS12c/VC4-4c, STS24c/VC4-8c,
STS48c/VC4-16c and STS192c/VC4-64c
Transponder cross-connection rate when connecting to a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit pack
ODU3
The 40G XCIF circuit pack supports the following monitored entities:
PM collection of SONET section (S)/SDH regenerator section (RS),
SONET line (L)/SDH multiplex section (MS), and SONET path (P)/SDH
path (P) for OC-192/STM-64 facilities
PM collection for STS1, STS3c/VC4, STS12c/VC4-4c, STS24c/VC4-8c,
STS48c/VC4-16c, and STS192/VC4-64c concatenated payloads
323-1851-520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
Warm Restart Required
OTM facility alarms
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU BDI
OPU AIS
GCC1 Link Fail
Multiplexed Rate Mismatch
AIS
DCC OSPF Adjacency Loss
Forced Ring Switch Active
LINE DCC Link Failure
LINE DCC OSPF Adjacency Loss
Lockout Active
Lockout Protection Active
Lockout Working Ring Active
Loopback Active
Loss Of Frame
Manual Ring Switch Active
Node Id Mismatch
Protection Switch Fail
Protection Channel Match Fail
Protection Default K-bytes
Protection Invalid K-bytes
Ring Protection Switch Complete
RFI
Signal Fail
Signal degrade
SECTION DCC Link Failure
SECTION DCC OSPF Adjacency Loss
STS Path alarms
Loss of Pointer
AIS
Unequipped
Payload Label Mismatch
Excessive Error Rate
Signal Degrade
RFI
Test Access in Progress - Monitor E
Test Access in Progress - Monitor F
Test Access in Progress - Monitor EF
Test Access in Progress - Split A
Test Access in Progress - Split B
Test Access in Progress - Split E
Test Access in Progress - Split F
Test Access in Progress - Split EF
Traffic Squelched
Control Plane alarms
Remote Node Unreachable (OSRP line level)
Configuration Mismatch
Configuration Mismatch - Common ID
Configuration Mismatch - Primary State
Common alarms
Timing Distribution Loss Of Reference - n Ref (n=1 to 4)
Timing Distribution Forced Switch - n Ref
Timing Distribution Lockout - n Ref
Timing Generation Loss Of Reference - n Ref - Major
Timing Generation Loss Of Reference - n Ref - Minor
Timing Generation Forced Switch - n Ref
Timing Generation Lockout - n Ref
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G XCIF circuit packs:
is a single-slot circuit pack with no physical port but it has a virtual OTM3
port 100, four virtual OC-192/STM-64 ports (ports 101-104) and four
virtual OTM2 ports (ports 101-104) that are provisioned by software
internally on the circuit pack.
can be equipped in the 14-slot converged optical, converged optical/front
electrical, converged optical/rear electrical, or packet-optical shelves in
even slots (2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14) if mated with a 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack.
different slots if mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack (as defined as
follows)
40G XCIF in slot 1 when mated with 40G UOCLD in slot 2/3
Attention: When mated with a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD circuit pack in a 14-slot shelf type, the 40G XCIF is only supported
when using with STS-1/VC-3 (160/0), 240G+ STS-1/VC-3 (240/0), or
240G+/80G VT1.5/VC-12 (240/80) cross-connect circuit packs. Also if the
14-slot shelf is equipped with X-Conn 160G+ STS-1/VC-3 (160/0) circuit
packs (NTK557BA), the 40G XCIF circuit pack can be only equipped in slots
6 and 10. When mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack in a 14-slot shelf type,
the 40G XCIF is only supported when using with 240G+ STS-1/VC-3 (240/0)
or 240G+/80G VT1.5/VC-12 (240/80) cross-connect circuit packs.
can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf in
even slots (2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18, 22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38)
if mated with a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit
pack.
different slots if mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack (as defined as
follows)
Attention: In a 32-slot shelf type, the 40G XCIF is only supported when
using X-Conn 640G+ STS-1/VC-3 (640/0) circuit packs (NTK610BBE5).
cannot be equipped in the 7-slot optical shelf.
cannot be equipped in the 2-slot shelf.
it cannot be operated as a single circuit pack and must be mated with a
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit
pack.
two 40G XCIF circuit packs and two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs form a 40G TR protected group. The protection
group circuit packs provide 1+1/MSP linear and 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing
protection with support from a cross-connect circuit pack where signals
are exchanged between the 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF pairs and the shelf
cross-connect over the backplane.
the combination of 40G XCIF and 40G UOCLD circuit packs can only form
unprotected group (no 40G UOCLD/40G XCIF protected group in this
release).
for 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing protection, the valid
protection group slots for 40G XCIF and 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD are: {1,2,3,4}, {5,6,9,10}, and
{11,12,13,14} for 14-slot shelf types and {1,2,3,4}, {5,6,7,8}, {11,12,13,14},
{15,16,17,18}, {21,22,23,24}, {25,26,27,28}, {31,32,33,34}, and
{35,36,37,38} for 32-slot shelf type. The 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are equipped in odd slots.
The 40G XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even slots.
for 1+1/MSP linear protection, the working 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two lower slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The protection 40G OCLD/40G
XCIF or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two
higher slot numbers of the 40G TR protected group. Protection can be
configured between OC192/STM64 facilities on working and protection
40G XCIF circuit packs.
for 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, the east 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two lower slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. The west 40G OCLD/40G XCIF
or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF must be the two higher slot
numbers of the 40G TR protected group. Protection can be configured
between OC192/STM64 facilities on east and west 40G XCIF circuit
packs.
for both 1+1/MSP linear protection and 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, the
facilities forming a 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing
protection group must have the same port mode (SONET or SDH) and the
same port number.
uses cross-connect capacity and must be installed in shelves equipped
with cross-connect circuit packs.
Table 1-12 lists the weight and power consumption specifications for the 40G
XCIF interface circuit packs. This circuit pack is physically portless (no optical
or electrical ports), therefore optical or electrical specifications are not
applicable to 40G XCIF circuit pack.
Latency
Table 1-13 shows the latency specifications for the 40G XCIF circuit pack.
Table 1-12
Technical specifications for 40G XCIF optical interface circuit packs
Parameter 40G XCIF (NTK525FAE5)
25 (+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Table 1-13
Latency for 40G XCIF circuit packs
Description PEC Typical Latency (s)
Fiber 40G OCLD
OC-n/STM-n (XCIF)
XC
or
Fiber
Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD
OC-n/STM-n (XCIF)
XC
XC OC-n/STM-n
(XCIF) 40G OCLD
fiber
or
XC OC-n/STM-n
(XCIF)
40G OCLD fiber
XC I/F 40G STS-1/HO Circuit Pack NTK525FAE5 74 9
40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5)
Overview
The eDC40G OCLD ULH C-Band 1xOTU3+ DWDM circuit pack (also referred
to as 40G UOCLD) is used to implement the mapping/wrapping functionality
to a G.709 DWDM line. Also the combination of a 40G UOCLD circuit pack
and a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack (NTK620AA) provides OTN mapping (OTU3
to ODU2, ODU1, or ODU0).
The following variants of 40G UOCLD circuit pack are supported:
eDC40G OCLD ULH C-Band 1xOTU3+ DWDM circuit pack
(NTK539XAE5): up to 3000 km reach and 25 ps PMD compensation
eDC40G OCLD ULH Submarine C-Band 1xOTU3+ DWDM circuit pack
(NTK539XEE5): up to 8000 km reach and 25 ps PMD compensation
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack includes a single 40G C-band tunable OTM3
line interface and is compatible with the 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5 and
NTK525CFE5), 40G OCI (NTK529SAE5), 40G+ CFP OCI (NTK529SJE5),
and 40/43G OCI (NTK529SDE5) in this release of 6500.
Figure 1-15 on page 1-76 shows the faceplate of a 40G UOCLD circuit pack
and Figure 1-16 on page 1-77 shows the functional block diagram of a 40G
UOCLD circuit pack.
Figure 1-15
40G UOCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
Figure 1-16
40G UOCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)
The 40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) offer
Ciena FEC
Transmit Line
Mapper and
Deskew
Receive
Equalizer and
Demapper
40G O/E
DP-BPSK
Rx Subsystem
40G E/O
DP-BPSK
Tx Subsystem
EOC Laser
Sync
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
DP-BPSK Dual Polarization Binary Phase Shift Keying
Legend
The 40G UOCLD circuit packs (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) provide the
following functionality.
Line support
one fixed OTM3 (44.57 Gbit/s) line interface (port 1) when 40G UOCLD is
in Broadband mode. When in OTN switching mode (POTS), the circuit
pack has one fixed PTP facility
G.709 wrapper (OTU3+)
coherent optical frequency division multiplexing (CoFDM) dual polarized
binary phase shift keying (DP-BPSK) modulation
reach of greater than 8000 km
high PMD tolerance/compensation
C-band tunable 50 GHz-compliant DWDM line interface (1527.99 nm to
1565.50 nm)
total of 95 wavelengths supported within 1527.99 nm to 1565.50 nm
wavelength range
88 wavelengths supported with Ciena Common Photonic Layer in SLTE
configuration
wide dynamic range receiver (33 dB) with automatic VOA and EDFA
control on the line interface receiver
GCC0 data communication channels between Broadband interfaces
OTU3 provisioning (including trace)
full monitoring and termination of line G.709 overhead bytes
no ODU3 termination
OTU3 alarm monitoring
no external BITS sources required (line timing or on board reference
clocking is used)
88 wavelengths supported with Ciena Common Photonic Layer line
system wavelengths. Refer to Table 1-14 on page 1-80 for a complete list
of supported wavelengths.
Attention: For this release of 6500, the supported amplifier line system link
is between the 40G UOCLD and the Ciena Common Photonic Layer
Release 4.0 or higher, 6500 Release 7.0 or higher, and foreign Photonic line
system. The 40G UOCLD is not compatible with the Common Photonic
Layer Filtered Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux (SCMD8) module
(NTT861AA-AH, AJ). Line inter-working with 565, 5100 and 5200 Advanced
Services Platform is not supported in this release.
Table 1-14
40G UOCLD supported wavelengths (for the CMD44 50 GHz and Enhanced CMD44 50GHz)
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
1 196.20 1527.99 0 33 194.60 1540.56 27 65 193.00 1553.33 59
2 196.15 1528.38 0 34 194.55 1540.95 28 66 192.95 1553.73 60
3 196.10 1528.77 93 35 194.50 1541.35 29 67 192.90 1554.13 61
4 196.05 1529.16 94 36 194.45 1541.75 30 68 192.85 1554.54 62
5 196.00 1529.55 95 37 194.40 1542.14 31 69 192.80 1554.94 63
6 195.95 1529.94 96 38 194.35 1542.54 32 70 192.75 1555.34 64
7 195.90 1530.33 1 39 194.30 1542.94 33 71 192.70 1555.75 65
8 195.85 1530.72 2 40 194.25 1543.33 34 72 192.65 1556.15 66
9 195.80 1531.12 3 41 194.20 1543.73 35 73 192.60 1556.55 67
10 195.75 1531.51 4 42 194.15 1544.13 36 74 192.55 1556.96 68
11 195.70 1531.90 5 43 194.10 1544.53 37 75 192.50 1557.36 69
12 195.65 1532.29 6 44 194.05 1544.92 38 76 192.45 1557.77 70
13 195.60 1532.68 7 45 194.00 1545.32 39 77 192.40 1558.17 71
14 195.55 1533.07 8 46 193.95 1545.72 40 78 192.35 1558.58 72
15 195.50 1533.47 9 47 193.90 1546.12 41 79 192.30 1558.98 73
16 195.45 1533.86 10 48 193.85 1546.52 42 80 192.25 1559.39 74
17 195.40 1534.25 11 49 193.80 1546.92 43 81 192.20 1559.79 75
18 195.35 1534.64 12 50 193.75 1547.32 44 82 192.15 1560.20 76
19 195.30 1535.04 13 51 193.70 1547.72 45 83 192.10 1560.61 77
20 195.25 1535.43 14 52 193.65 1548.11 46 84 192.05 1561.01 78
21 195.20 1535.82 15 53 193.60 1548.51 47 85 192.00 1561.42 79
22 195.15 1536.22 16 54 193.55 1548.91 48 86 191.95 1561.83 80
23 195.10 1536.61 17 55 193.50 1549.32 49 87 191.90 1562.23 81
24 195.05 1537.00 18 56 193.45 1549.72 50 88 191.85 1562.64 82
25 195.00 1537.40 19 57 193.40 1550.12 51 89 191.80 1563.05 83
26 194.95 1537.79 20 58 193.35 1550.52 52 90 191.75 1563.45 84
27 194.90 1538.19 21 59 193.30 1550.92 53 91 191.70 1563.86 85
28 194.85 1538.58 22 60 193.25 1551.32 54 92 191.65 1564.27 86
29 194.80 1538.98 23 61 193.20 1551.72 55 93 191.60 1564.68 87
30 194.75 1539.37 24 62 193.15 1552.12 56 94 191.55 1565.09 88
31 194.70 1539.77 25 63 193.10 1552.52 57 95 191.50 1565.50 89
32 194.65 1540.16 26 64 193.05 1552.93 58
does not support PEC editing. This means that different variants of
40G UOCLD circuit packs cannot be used as spares for each other.
the submarine variant of 40G UOCLD circuit pack (NTK539XEE5) cannot
interwork with any of the other 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539PxE5),
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539RxE5), or another
40G UOCLD variant (NTK539XAE5).
supports Control Plane (supported as both add/drop Control Plane facility
and Network Control Plane facility)
6500.
Client support
There are no client ports on the 40G UOCLD circuit packs.
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the 2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder
and OTN cross-connection type, including OTN Control Plane sub-network
connections.
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the ODU3 transponder and OTN
cross-connection rate, including OTN Control Plane sub-network connections.
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the following monitored entities:
OTM3 line interface
The 40G UOCLD circuit pack supports the following monitored entities when
mated with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack:
323-1851-520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
OTM3 facility alarms
GCC0 Link Fail
Loopback Active - Terminal (R7.0)
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Loss Of Signal
ODU AIS
ODU BDI
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
OTU BDI
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Lockout Active
PTP facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
OTU BDI
GCCTTP facility alarms
GCC0 Link Failure
Photonic ADJ facility alarms
Adjacency Mismatch
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 40G UOCLD circuit packs:
occupies two slots, and offers one 40G line port.
is identified by the left-hand slot number of the two occupied slots.
can be equipped in 7-slot optical shelf, 14-slot packet-optical, converged
optical, 14-slot converged optical/front electrical, 14-slot converged
optical/rear electrical, and 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in
Table 1-15 on page 1-85.
Table 1-15
40G UOCLD allowable slots
Configuration 7-slot shelf (see Note 1) 14-slot shelf (see Note 1
and Note 2)
32-slot shelf (see Note 1
and Note 3)
Unprotected TR
group with 40G
XCIF or 40G OTN
XCIF
N/A a 40G UOCLD in slots
2/3 and a 40G XCIF or
40G OTN XCIF in slot 1
a 40G UOCLD in slots
(see Note 4)
Unprotected optical
muxponder with
40G MUX OCI to the
left
2/3 and a 40G MUX OCI
in slot 1
in slot 4
in slot 1
in slot 4
10/11 and a
40G MUX OCI in slot 9
13/14 and a
in slot 1
in slot 4
14/15 and a
17/18 and a
22/23 and a
25/26 and a
34/35 and a
37/38 and a
Unprotected optical
muxponder with
40G MUX OCI to the
right
(see Note 5)
in slot 4
in slot 4
10/11 and a
in slot 4
14/15 and a
22/23 and a
34/35 and a
and Note 2)
and Note 3)
Protected optical
muxponder
2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 5/6, and a
2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 5/6, and a
10/11, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 13/14, and a
2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 5/6, and a
slots 17/18, and a
slots 25/26, and a
slots 37/38, and a
and Note 2)
and Note 3)
Unprotected optical
transponder with
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI to the
left
2/3 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI in slot 1
5/6 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
2/3 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
5/6 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
10/11 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
2/3 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
5/6 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
and Note 2)
and Note 3)
Unprotected optical
transponder with
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI to the
right
(see Note 6)
2/3 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
2/3 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
2/3 and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40G+ CFP OCI, or
Protected optical
transponder with a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI
2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 5/6, and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 5/6, and a 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
slots 13/14, and a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
2/3, a 40G UOCLD in
slots 5/6, and a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
slots 17/18, and a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
slots 25/26, and a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
slots 37/38, and a
40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, or
and Note 2)
and Note 3)
Optical regen with
another 40G
UOCLD
1/2 and another
40G UOCLD in slots 3/4
3/4 and another
9/10 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
11/12
1/2 and another
5/6 and another
11/12 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
13/14
15/16 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
17/18
21/22 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
23/24
25/26 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
27/28
31/32 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
33/34
35/36 and another
40G UOCLD in slots
37/38
and Note 2)
and Note 3)
Optical regen with a
40G OCLD or
Wavelength-
selective 40G OCLD
2/3 and a 40G OCLD or
40G OCLD in slot 1
40G OCLD in slot 4
40G OCLD in slot 1
40G OCLD in slot 4
10/11 and a 40G OCLD
or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD in slot 9
40G OCLD in slot 12
40G OCLD in slot 1
40G OCLD in slot 4
40G OCLD in slot 13
40G OCLD in slot 16
40G OCLD in slot 21
40G OCLD in slot 24
40G OCLD in slot 33
40G OCLD in slot 36
and Note 2)
and Note 3)
Note 1: The slot positions of the 40G UOCLD and 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G
OCI are not interchangeable.
Note 2: Mixing of different 40G groups (40G MOTR, 40G OTR, and 40G Regen) is allowed, however, for
specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and some or all of
the remaining slots may need to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf power
capacity. Prior to equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider power
budgeting and power feeds by referring to the "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10CF (Chapter 8). For example:
40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, {4, 5/6}, {11/12, 10}
40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3} and 40G UOCLD MOTR (protected) in {10/11, 12,
13/14}
40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, 40G 40G UOCLD Regen in {4, 5/6}, and 40G UOCLD
40G UOCLD Regen in {9/10, 11/12}
Note 3: Mixing of different 40G groups (40G MOTR, 40G OTR, and 40G Regen) is allowed, however, for
specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and some or all of
the remaining slots may need to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the shelf power
capacity. Prior to equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider power
budgeting and power feeds by referring to the "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10CF (Chapter 8). For example:
40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, {4, 5/6}, {14/15, 16}, {22/23, 24}
40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, {4, 5/6} and 40G UOCLD MOTR (protected) in {14/15,
16, 17/18}
40G UOCLD MOTR (unprotected) in {1, 2/3}, 40G 40G UOCLD Regen in {4, 5/6}, and 40G UOCLD
40G UOCLD Regen in {11/12, 13/14}
Note 4: When a 40G XCIF is mated with a 40G UOCLD circuit pack in a 14-slot shelf type, the 40G XCIF
is only supported when using 240G+ STS-1/VC-3 (240/0) or 240G+/80G VT1.5/VC-12 (240/80)
cross-connect circuit packs.
Note 5: This configuration allows in-service reconfiguration to the protected optical muxponder
configuration.
Note 6: This configuration allows in-service reconfiguration to the protected optical transponder
configuration.
and Note 2)
and Note 3)
a 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI circuit pack
between two 40G UOCLD circuit packs provides 1+1 OTN line-side
protection. Two 40G UOCLD circuit packs carry the working and
protection paths with a 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or
40/43G OCI circuit pack in between. Signals are exchanged between
triplets using the backplane. The 40G triplet must be equipped in
consecutive slots. The working 40G UOCLD circuit pack must be in the left
slot of the triplet and the protection 40G UOCLD circuit pack must be in
the right slot of the triplet. In a 14-slot shelf, two 40G U OCLD 1+1
protection groups are supported. In a 32-slot shelf, four 40G UOCLD 1+1
protection groups are supported. In a 7-slot shelf, one 40G UOCLD 1+1
protection group is supported. For 1+1 protection, the choices are:
slots {2/3,4,5/6} and {10/11,12,13/14} for 14-slot shelf types
slots {2/3,4,5/6}, {14/15,16,17/18}, {22/23,24,25/26}, and
{34/35,36,37/38} for 32-slot shelf type.
slots {2/3,4,5/6} for 7-slot shelf type.
the combination of 40G XCIF and 40G UOCLD circuit packs can only form
unprotected group (no 40G UOCLD/40G XCIF protected group in this
release).
The combination of 40G OTN XCIF and 40G UOCLD circuit packs can
form unprotected group.
requires that all unequipped slots be equipped with filler circuit packs
(NTK505YA).
requires that the 6500 shelf is equipped with the SP-2 shelf processor
(NTK555CAE5, NTK555EAE5, or NTK555FAE5) or an SPAP-2 w/2xOSC
(NTK555NA) in the case of a 7-slot optical Type 2 shelf (NTK503KA),
otherwise the 40G UOCLD equipment does not provision.
specifications for the 40G UOCLD optical interface circuit packs.
Table 1-16
Technical specifications for 40G UOCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation eDC40 CoFDM dual-polarization BPSK
Line rate 46.01 Gbit/s (carried as two 23.0034G sub-carriers CoFDM
dual-polarization BPSK sharing the same 50 GHz ITU channel)
Tunable wavelength range
(Note 3)
1527.99 nm to 1565.50 nm
(see DWDM wavelengths on page 1-123 for a list of supported
wavelengths)
Central wavelength accuracy +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -14 dBm to -4 dBm
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver
Receiver type Coherent
Connector type LC
Wavelength range 1527.99 nm to 1565.50 nm
EOL)
-17 dBm (with 6 dB PDL) (Note 4)
Receiver operating range -26 dBm to 7 dBm
Receiver overload +7 dBm
Receiver damage level +16 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.7 dB between -10 dBm and 10 dBm
Latency
UOCLD latency values.
Rx Optical Signal to Noise
Ratio (OSNR)
10.5 dB
ROADM support 10 (estimate)
tolerance
+/- 50000 ps/nm
(PMD) tolerance
25 ps (mean DGD)
Polarization Dependent Loss
(PDL)
2 dB
Reach > 3000 km for NTK539XAE5
> 8000 km for NTK539XEE5
25 (+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Note 3: Tx wavelength indicates the center frequency of the channel, not that of either subcarrier.
Note 4: This value does not include +/- 1.5 dB Rx Power monitor accuracy.
Technical specifications for 40G UOCLD optical interface circuit packs (40G line interface)
Parameter 40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)
40G functions
40G circuit packs can perform in different functions as described below:
40G OCLD (NTK539PxE5) and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
(NTK539RxE5) circuit packs functions
The 40G OCLD and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs can
form optical transponders (40G OTRs) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCI, a 40G+ CFP OCI, or a 40/43G OCI circuit pack (see
Figure 1-17 on page 1-100).
form optical muxponders (40G MOTRs) when used in conjunction with a
40G MUX OCI circuit pack (see Figure 1-17 on page 1-100).
form regenerators (40G Regen) when used in conjunction with a
40G UOCLD circuit pack or another 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit pack (see Figure 1-17 on page 1-100).
be used for GbE aggregation when used in conjunction with a L2 MOTR
or SuperMux circuit pack and mating with a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
(see Figure 1-18 on page 1-101).
form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are used in conjunction
with one 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit
pack (see Figure 1-19 on page 1-102).
form 40G MOTR 1+1 TPT protection when two 40G OCLD or
with two 40G MUX OCI circuit packs and a TPT (see Figure 1-20 on
page 1-103).
form 40G OTR 1+1 TPT protection when two 40G OCLD or
with two 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs and a TPT (see Figure 1-21 on
page 1-104).
be used in conjunction with a 40G XCIF circuit pack and two
cross-connect circuit packs to allow STS-1 grooming capabilities between
6500 MSPP interfaces and a 6500 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit pack. Two pairs of 40G OCLD/40G XCIF or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G XCIF circuit packs and two
cross-connect circuit packs form a 40G protected TR group. Such a
protection group can provide 1+1/MSP linear protection or 2-Fiber
BLSR/MS-SPRing on the four virtual OC192/STM64 ports of 40G XCIF
circuit packs (see Figure 1-22 on page 1-105).
be used in conjunction with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack and two OTN
cross-connect circuit packs to allow grooming capabilities by enabling
OTN I/F interface into new fabric of existing 40G line by mapping OTU-3
into ODU-3, ODU-2, ODU-1, or ODU-0 container (see Figure 1-23 on
page 1-105).
Attention: A circuit pack described as an "OTN I/F" interfaces between OTN
mappings on its client or line ports and the cross-connect or fabric circuit
packs.
40G OCI (NTK529SAE5), 40/43G OCI (NTK529SDE5), and 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJE5) circuit packs functions
40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs can
form optical transponder (40G OTR) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack
form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when used in conjunction with two
packs (see Figure 1-19 on page 1-102).
form 40G OTR 1+1 TPT protection when two 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs
are used in conjunction with two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD circuit packs and a TPT (see Figure 1-21 on page 1-104).
OTN I/F interface into new fabric of 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack by
mapping OTU-3 into ODU-3, ODU-2, ODU-1, or ODU-0 container (only
applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI variant; NTK529SJE5) (see Figure 1-24 on
page 1-106).
40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5 and NTK525CFE5) circuit packs functions
40G MUX OCI circuit packs can
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack
or SuperMux circuit pack and mating with a 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit pack (see
form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when used in conjunction with two
packs (see Figure 1-19 on page 1-102).
form 1+1 40G MOTR TPT protection when two 40G MUX OCI circuit
packs are used in conjunction with two 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs and a TPT (see
OTN I/F interface to interwork with fabric of existing 10G OCI circuit packs
by providing OTN mapping (only applicable to NTK525CFE5 variant) (see
40G XCIF (NTK525FAE5) circuit packs functions
40G XCIF circuit packs can
mate with 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD
circuit packs to form unprotected TR group (see Figure 1-22 on
page 1-105).
mate with 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs to
form protected TR group (see Figure 1-22 on page 1-105).
40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5 and NTK539XEE5) circuit packs functions
40G UOCLD circuit packs can
form optical transponders (40G OTRs) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCI, a 40G+ CFP OCI, or a 40/43G OCI circuit pack (see
form regenerators (40G Regen) when used in conjunction with a
40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack or another
40G UOCLD circuit pack (see Figure 1-17 on page 1-100).
or SuperMux circuit pack and mating with a 40G MUX OCI circuit pack
form 1+1 OTN line-side protection when two 40G UOCLD circuit packs are
used in conjunction with one 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40/43G OCI, or
be used in conjunction with a 40G XCIF circuit pack and two
cross-connect circuit packs to allow STS-1 grooming capabilities between
6500 MSPP interfaces and a 6500 40G UOCLD circuit pack. Unlike 40G
OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, 40G protected
TR group is not supported (see Figure 1-22 on page 1-105).
can be used in conjunction with a 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack and two OTN
OTN I/F interface into new fabric of existing 40G line by mapping OTU-3
into ODU-3, ODU-2, ODU-1, or ODU-0 container (see Figure 1-23 on
page 1-105).
Figure 1-17
40G circuit packs functions (40G OTRs, 40G MOTRs, 40G Regens)
Optical Transponder (OTR)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
40G OCLD/40G OCI
or
40G OCLD/40/43G OCI
or
40G OCLD/40G+ CFP OCI
or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G OCI
or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40/43G OCI
or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G+ CFP OCI
or
40G UOCLD/40G OCI
or
40G UOCLD/40/43G OCI
or
40G UOCLD/40G+ CFP OCI
O
C
-
7
6
8
/
S
T
M
-
2
5
6
/
O
T
U
3
o
r

E
T
H
4
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
Regenerator (Regen)
40G OCLD/40G OCLD
or
40G UOCLD/40G UOCLD
or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
or
40G OCLD/40G UOCLD
or
40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
or
40G UOCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
O
C
-
1
9
2
,
S
T
M
-
6
4
,

1
0
G
b
E
,

O
T
U
-
2
,

F
C
8
0
0
/
1
2
0
0
)
Optical Muxponder (MOTR)
40G OCLD/40G MUX OCI
or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G MUX OCI
or
40G UOCLD/40G MUX OCI
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
Other 10G signals are
added/dropped
Back-to-back 40G Regen with 40G MUX OCI
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
O
C
-
1
9
2
,
S
T
M
-
6
4
,
1
0
G
b
E
,

O
T
U
-
2
,

F
C
8
0
0
/
1
2
0
0
)
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
O
C
-
1
9
2
,
S
T
M
-
6
4
,
1
0
G
b
E
,

O
T
U
-
2
,

F
C
8
0
0
/
1
2
0
0
)
Some 10G signals are passed through
using patch cords
Figure 1-18
40G circuit packs functions (GbE aggregation)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
GbE aggregation
40G MUX OCI/40G OCLD
or
40G MUX OCI/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
or
40G MUX OCI/40G UOCLD
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
G
)
O
T
U
3
+
4 times
L
2

M
O
T
R

1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y

o
r

O
T
U
2
G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
GbE aggregation
or
or
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
O
C
1
9
2
)
O
T
U
3
+
4 times
S
M
U
X

O
C
1
9
2

o
r

O
T
U
2
G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
GbE aggregation
or
or
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
O
T
U
2
)
O
T
U
3
+
4 times
(
1
+
8
)
x
O
T
N

F
l
e
x

M
O
T
R

O
T
U
2
G
b
E
Figure 1-19
40G circuit packs functions (1+1 OTN line-side protection)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
1+1 OTN line-side protection
Protection Working
40G 1+1 Protected Line
40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI with two 40G OCLDs. The two 40G OCLDs
can be two 40G UOCLDs, two 40G OCLDs, two Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs, or
one 40G OCLD and one Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD.
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
3
+
L
i
n
e
(
O
v
e
r
c
l
o
c
k
e
d
)
1+1 OTN line-side protection
40G 1+1 Protected Line
40G MUX OCI with two 40G OCLDs. The two 40G OCLDs can be two 40G UOCLDs,
two 40G OCLDs, two Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs, or one 40G OCLD and one
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD.
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
O
C
-
1
9
2
,

S
T
M
-
6
4
,
1
0
G
b
E
,

O
T
U
-
2
,

F
C
8
0
0
/
1
2
0
0
)
O
C
-
7
6
8
/
S
T
M
-
2
5
6

o
r

O
T
U
3

C
l
i
e
n
t
Protection
Working
Figure 1-20
40G circuit packs functions (40G TPT protected MOTR group)
T
P
T
40G TPT protected MOTR group
4-slot groups to TPT

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
4
0
G

M
U
X

O
C
I
4
0
G

M
U
X

O
C
I

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
T
P
T
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
4
0
G

M
U
X

O
C
I
4
0
G

M
U
X

O
C
I

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
T
P
T
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
4
0
G

M
U
X

O
C
I
4
0
G

M
U
X

O
C
I
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
Figure 1-21
40G circuit packs functions (40G TPT protected OTR group)
T
P
T
40G TPT protected OTR group

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
4
0
G
+

C
F
P

O
C
I
4
0
G
+

C
F
P

O
C
I

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
T
P
T
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
4
0
G
+

C
F
P

O
C
I
4
0
G
+

C
F
P

O
C
I

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
T
P
T
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
4
0
G
+

C
F
P

O
C
I
4
0
G
+

C
F
P

O
C
I
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
Figure 1-22
40G circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G XCIF)
Figure 1-23
40G circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G OTN XCIF)
40G TR
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
,
4
0
G

O
C
L
D
,

o
r

4
0
G

U
O
C
L
D
Unprotected TR group
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
4
0
G

X
C
I
F

4
0
G

X
C
I
F
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
40G protected TR group
4-slot groups to cross-connect
4
0
G

X
C
I
F
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
o
r

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
o
r

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
The two 40G OCLDs forming the protection group can be
two 40G OCLDs, two Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs, or
one 40G OCLD and one Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD.
40G TR
W
a
v
e
l
e
n
g
t
h
-
s
e
l
e
c
t
i
v
e

4
0
G

O
C
L
D
,
4
0
G

O
C
L
D
,

o
r

4
0
G

U
O
C
L
D
O
T
N

C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
O
T
N

C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
4
0
G

O
T
N

X
C
I
F

Figure 1-24
40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G OTN XCIF)
Figure 1-25
40G MUX OCI circuit packs functions (TR groups with 40G OTN XCIF)
40G TR
4
0
G
+

C
F
P

O
C
I
4
0
G

O
T
N

X
C
I
F

O
T
N

C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
O
T
N

C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
40G TR
4
0
G

M
U
X

O
C
I
4
0
G

O
T
N

X
C
I
F

O
T
N

C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
O
T
N

C
r
o
s
s
-
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5)
Overview
The Optical Supervisory and Idler Channel circuit pack (also referred to as the
OSIC circuit pack) is used to monitor and manage optical amplifiers and
repeaters in a submarine optical transmission network. It provides a dedicated
management channel that allows fault sectionalization.
The Idler Channel fills the spectrum as required to meet wet plant amplifier
input power level while allowing optimized launch power for the 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD submarine circuit packs.
The OSIC circuit pack is optimized for co-propagation with DP-BPSK and
DP-QPSK signals, and should be used in all cases where idler channels are
required.
The 6500 OSIC card includes a Command Channel (CCTX) for transmitting
an optical signal including an operation command to notify of a state of a
supervisory target; an optical amplifier repeater that transmits a response
optical signal including a response code obtained by measuring the
supervisory target in response to the operation command.
The 6500 OSIC card also includes a Response Channel (RCRX) for receiving
the response optical signal via an optical fiber and an information processing
unit for converting the response code into a numerical form by using a
predetermined expression that links the response code with measured
information obtained by measuring in advance the supervisory target with an
external measuring device during operation of the optical amplifier repeater in
response to the operation command.
Figure 1-26 on page 1-108 shows the faceplate of an OSIC circuit pack and
Figure 1-27 on page 1-109 shows the functional block diagram of an OSIC
circuit pack.
Figure 1-26
OSIC circuit pack faceplate
- Card initializing = Blinking LED; Card OK = LED on;
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
Figure 1-27
OSIC circuit pack block diagram (NTK528XAE5)
The OSIC circuit pack (NTK528XAE5) provides the following functionality.
Line support
one fixed OTM2 line interface (port 1) for idler and supervisory features
only
1565.09 nm)
supports Idler Channel
AM support for Supervisory Channel
supports SBS (NLS) Dither
Client support
There are no client ports on the OSIC circuit packs.
DWDM
Optics
Supervisory Channel Tx/Rx
Sync
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
1
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
OTM2 facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to OSIC circuit packs:
occupies a single slot, and offers one line port (port 1)
can be equipped in any slot (1-14, except slots 7 and 8 if cross-connect
packet-optical shelf
can be equipped in slots 1-7 of the 7-slot optical shelf
can be equipped in the same shelf with any other type of circuit pack
each 6500 shelf supports a maximum of one OSIC circuit pack with Tx AM
Format provisioned to SC Idler, but can support several OSIC circuit
packs with Tx AM Format provisioned to Idler in the same shelf. In other
words, a single 6500 shelf can support up to one SC Idler circuit pack and
multiple Idler circuit packs.
cannot be equipped in the same shelf as an OSIC circuit pack associated
with another repeater wet plant. However, OSIC circuit packs associated
with different repeater wet plants can be equipped in different shelves that
are member shelves of the same consolidated node.
specifications for the OSIC optical interface circuit packs.
Table 1-17
Technical specifications for OSIC optical interface circuit packs (10G line interface)
Parameter OSIC (NTK528XAE5)
Transmitter
Connector type LC
Laser modulation IMDD NRZ
Tunable wavelength range 1528.77 nm to 1565.09 nm
(see DWDM wavelengths on page 1-123 for a list of supported
wavelengths)
Central Wavelength Accuracy 0.02 nm
Transmit output power -7 to 3.0 dBm
Tx power monitor accuracy +/- 0.5 dB
Sub-carrier Frequency Modu-
lation
100 kHz to 250 kHz
Modulation Type On-Off Keying (OOK)
Baud Rate 333.33 or 1667 baud
Encoding Format NRZ or 3SB1 (3 symbols/bit)
Receiver
Receiver type PIN
Connector type LC
Wavelength range 1528.77 nm to 1565.09 nm
Receiver operating range -7 dBm to 3.1 dBm
Receiver damage level 10 dBm
Rx power monitor accuracy +/- 1 dB between -15 dBm and 5 dBm
Sub-carrier Frequency Modu-
lation
4.0 kHz to 63.0 kHz
Modulation Type On-Off Keying (OOK)
Baud Rate 16.67 or 83.33
Encoding Format NRZ or 3SB1 (3 symbols/bit)
25 (+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Technical specifications for OSIC optical interface circuit packs (10G line interface)
Parameter OSIC (NTK528XAE5)
Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack
(NTK554HA) and Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 Flex
C-Band) circuit pack (NTK554HC)
Overview
The Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 C-Band) circuit pack (also
known as SLIC10) and Submarine Line Idler 10 Channel (SLIC10 Flex
C-Band) circuit pack (also known as SLIC10 Flex) are idler circuit packs for
submarine photonics line systems. They are used to control the
per-wavelength power in an amplified system that uses a total output power
amplifier control scheme. These circuit packs are improvement over the
existing OSIC idlers currently in use.
The primary purpose of the SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs are to
provide lasers to form an idler pair. The main difference between SLIC10 and
SLIC10 Flex circuit packs is that in case of a SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA),
all idler pairs will be C-band provisionable with a fixed ITU grid offset capability
of +12.5 GHz or -12.5 GHz while in case of a SLIC10 Flex circuit pack
(NTK554HC), all idler pairs will be C-band provisionable with tunable ITU grid
offset capability from +12.5 GHz to -12.5 GHz in 0.1 increments.
One or more idler pairs can be required at different wavelengths depending on
the system implementation. SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex wavelengths are
intended to be inserted into the line like any other channel (for example, via a
WSS port). The SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs are primarily used in
Submarine applications.
Figure 1-28 on page 1-115 shows the faceplate of a SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex
circuit pack. Figure 1-29 on page 1-116 provides a functional block diagram of
the SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack.
Figure 1-28
SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack faceplate (example: NTK554HA or NTK554HC)
Red triangle (Fail)
- Used to communicate hardware or software
failure state
- Used to communicate hardware or software
functional state
- Card initializing = Blinking LED; Card OK = LED
on; Card not ready = LED off
- Used to communicate whether circuit pack can
be extracted
- Equipment in-service = LED on; Equipment
out-of-service = LED off
Monitor port
Common Out
port
Figure 1-29
SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack block diagram (NTK554HA or NTK554HC)
PD
ITLA# 1
ITLA# 2
ITLA# 3
ITLA# 4
ITLA# 5
ITLA# 6
ITLA# 7
ITLA# 8
ITLA# 9
ITLA# 10
Power Combiner
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
1
Processor
Module
Power
Supply
ITLA Integrated tunable laser assembly
Legend
2
PD Photodiode
The SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA) and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack
(NTK554HC) provide the following functionality.
includes five idler facility pairs, each creating a dual idler channel (against
the common out port) to control the output power in a total output power
(TOP) controlled system
supports a tunable range of 88 wavelengths
in case of a SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA), all idler pairs will be C-band
provisionable with a fixed ITU grid offset capability of +12.5 GHz or -12.5
GHz
in case of a SLIC10 Flex circuit pack (NTK554HC), all idler pairs will be
C-band provisionable with tunable ITU grid offset capability from +12.5
GHz to -12.5 GHz in 0.1 increments
requires WSS 50 GHz w/OPM 9x1 circuit packs (such as NTK553FAE5)
to function
not allowed as pass thru channel type
see Table 1-18 for function and connector type for each port
The 6500 monitors and collects physical PMs for SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex
circuit pack facilities. Table 1-19 on page 1-118 provides a list of monitor types
supported on SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs. Figure 1-30 on
page 1-119 shows the SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack optical monitoring
points.
323-1851-520.
Table 1-18
SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex optical interfaces
Interface name Physical port # Function Connector type
Mon 1 Monitor output port LC
Common Out 2 Optical output from the idler circuit pack LC
Table 1-19
Monitor types table for SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit packs
Monitor Type Facility
OPTMON
OPT-OTS
OPTAVG-OTS
OPTMIN-OTS
OPTMAX-OTS
X
X
X
X
Figure 1-30
SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack optical monitoring points
PD
ITLA# 1
ITLA# 2
ITLA# 3
ITLA# 4
ITLA# 5
ITLA# 6
ITLA# 7
ITLA# 8
ITLA# 9
ITLA# 10
Power Combiner
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
1
Processor
Module
Power
Supply
Legend
2
PMs collected at PD location
Facility: OPTMON port 2
Parameter: OPT-OTS*
* AVG, MIN, and MAX measurements also provided
ITLA Integrated tunable laser assembly
PD Ph t di d
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
Idler Facility alarm
Laser Failed
Target Unachievable
Tx Tuning In Progress
COM alarms
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack:
is a double slot interface
can be equipped in slot 1 to 13 (except slots 7 and 8 if cross-connect circuit
packs are provisioned in slots 7 and 8) of the 14-slot packet-optical,
optical, converged optical, optical/front electrical, converged optical/front
electrical, optical/rear electrical, or converged optical/rear electrical
shelves. SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack cannot be placed in slot 14
since SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack is a double slot interface.
Attention: SLIC10 circuit pack (NTK554HA) and SLIC10 Flex circuit pack
(NTK554HC) are not supported with metro front electrical shelf
(NTK503GA).
packet-optical shelf. SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack cannot be placed
in slot 8, 18, 28, or 38 since SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack is a double
slot interface.
can be equipped in slots 1 to 6 of the 7-slot optical shelf. SLIC10 or
SLIC10 Flex circuit pack cannot be placed in slot 7 since SLIC10 or
SLIC10 Flex circuit pack is a double slot interface.
when deploying a SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit pack:
the SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit packs do not use any cross-connect
capacity and can be installed in shelves equipped with or without
cross-connect circuit packs
In a 14-slot shelf type, when the SLIC10 or SLIC10 Flex circuit packs are
installed in slots 7 and 8, only Broadband circuit packs or Photonic circuit
packs can be provisioned in the other interface slots (slots 1 to 6 and 9
to14), as MSPP interface circuit packs require a cross-connect circuit
pack. See Part 1 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10CF (Chapter 3) for a full list of
supported Broadband and Photonic circuit packs.
Table 1-20 lists the weight, power consumption, and other specifications for
the SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex optical interface circuit packs.
Table 1-20
Technical specifications for SLIC10 and SLIC10 Flex optical interface circuit packs
Parameter SLIC10 (NTK554HA) and
SLIC10 Flex (NTK554HC)
Connector type LC
Frequency range (50 GHz spacing) 191.5375 THz to 195.9125 THz
Wavelength range (50 GHz spacing) 1530.237 nm to 1565.190 nm
Total Output Power (max) 15 dBm
Per-wavelength power range -2.4 dBm to +6.0 dBm
Nominal loss for MON port to Tx 10 dB
Frequency offset SLIC10 (NTK554HA): fixed at +/-12.5 GHz
SLIC10 Flex (NTK554HC): adjustable
between +12.5 GHZ and -12.5 GHZ in 0.1 GHz
increments
25 (+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
DWDM wavelengths
Table 1-21 lists the DWDM C-band frequencies and wavelengths for the
following circuit packs supporting tunable transmitters in 50 GHz spacing:
40G OCLD C-band
NTK539PEE5/NTK539PFE5) and Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD
C-band (NTK539RAE5/NTK539RBE5/NTK539RCE5/NTK539RDE5)
40G UOCLD (NTK539XAE5/NTK539XEE5)
Table 1-21
DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelength (nm) Frequency
(THz)
(THz)
Wavelength (nm)
196.25 1527.60
(see Note 1)
195.25 1535.43 194.25 1543.33
196.20 1527.99
(see Note 2)
195.20 1535.82 194.20 1543.73
196.15 1528.38
(see Note 2)
195.15 1536.22 194.15 1544.13
196.10 1528.77 195.10 1536.61 194.10 1544.53
196.05 1529.16 195.05 1537.00 194.05 1544.92
196.00 1529.55 195.00 1537.40 194.00 1545.32
195.95 1529.94 194.95 1537.79 193.95 1545.72
195.90 1530.33 194.90 1538.19 193.90 1546.12
195.85 1530.72 194.85 1538.58 193.85 1546.52
195.80 1531.12 194.80 1538.98 193.80 1546.92
195.75 1531.51 194.75 1539.37 193.75 1547.32
195.70 1531.90 194.70 1539.77 193.70 1547.72
195.65 1532.29 194.65 1540.16 193.65 1548.11
195.60 1532.68 194.60 1540.56 193.60 1548.51
195.55 1533.07 194.55 1540.95 193.55 1548.91
195.50 1533.47 194.50 1541.35 193.50 1549.32
195.45 1533.86 194.45 1541.75 193.45 1549.72
195.40 1534.25 194.40 1542.14 193.40 1550.12
195.35 1534.64 194.35 1542.54 193.35 1550.52
195.30 1535.04 194.30 1542.94 193.30 1550.92
Table 1-22 on page 1-125 lists the DWDM L-band frequencies and
wavelengths for the 40G OCLD L-band circuit pack (NTK539PUE5)
supporting tunable transmitters in 50 GHz spacing.
193.25 1551.32 192.65 1556.15 192.05 1561.01
193.20 1551.72 192.60 1556.55 192.00 1561.42
193.15 1552.12 192.55 1556.96 191.95 1561.83
193.10 1552.52 192.50 1557.36 191.90 1562.23
193.05 1552.93 192.45 1557.77 191.85 1562.64
193.00 1553.33 192.40 1558.17 191.80 1563.05
192.95 1553.73 192.35 1558.58 191.75 1563.45
192.90 1554.13 192.30 1558.98 191.70 1563.86
192.85 1554.54 192.25 1559.39 191.65 1564.27
192.80 1554.94 192.20 1559.79 191.60 1564.68
192.75 1555.34 192.15 1560.20 191.55 1565.09
192.70 1555.75 192.10 1560.61 191.50 1565.50
(see Note 2)
191.45 1565.90
(see Note 3)
191.40 1566.31
(see Note 3)
191.35 1566.72
(see Note 3)
Note 1: This wavelength is only applicable to 40G OCLD circuit packs.
Note 2: This wavelength is only applicable to 40G OCLD and 40G UOCLD circuit packs.
Note 3: This wavelength is only applicable to Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs.
DWDM C-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)
Frequency
(THz)
(THz)
(THz)
Wavelength (nm)

Table 1-22
DWDM L-band wavelengths (50 GHz spacing)
Frequency
(THz)
(THz)
(THz)
Wavelength (nm)
191.10 1568.77 189.50 1582.02 187.90 1595.49
191.05 1569.18 189.45 1582.44 187.85 1595.91
191.00 1569.59 189.40 1582.85 187.80 1596.34
190.95 1570.01 189.35 1583.27 187.75 1596.76
190.90 1570.42 189.30 1583.69 187.70 1597.19
190.85 1570.83 189.25 1584.11 187.65 1597.62
190.80 1571.24 189.20 1584.53 187.60 1598.04
190.75 1571.65 189.15 1584.95 187.55 1598.47
190.70 1572.06 189.10 1585.36 187.50 1598.89
190.65 1572.48 189.05 1585.78 187.45 1599.32
190.60 1572.89 189.00 1586.20 187.40 1599.75
190.55 1573.30 188.95 1586.62 187.35 1600.17
190.50 1573.71 188.90 1587.04 187.30 1600.60
190.45 1574.13 188.85 1587.46 187.25 1601.03
190.40 1574.54 188.80 1587.88 187.20 1601.46
190.35 1574.95 188.75 1588.30 187.15 1601.88
190.30 1575.37 188.70 1588.73 187.10 1602.31
190.25 1575.78 188.65 1589.15 187.05 1602.74
190.20 1576.20 188.60 1589.57 187.00 1603.17
190.15 1576.61 188.55 1589.99 186.95 1603.60
190.10 1577.03 188.50 1590.41 186.90 1604.03
190.05 1577.44 188.45 1590.83 186.85 1604.46
190.00 1577.86 188.40 1591.26 186.80 1604.88
189.95 1578.27 188.35 1591.68 186.75 1605.31
189.90 1578.69 188.30 1592.10 186.70 1605.74
189.85 1579.10 188.25 1592.52 186.65 1606.17
189.80 1579.52 188.20 1592.95 186.60 1606.60
189.75 1579.93 188.15 1593.37 186.55 1607.04
189.70 1580.35 188.10 1593.79 186.50 1607.47
189.65 1580.77 188.05 1594.22 186.45 1607.90
189.60 1581.18 188.00 1594.64 186.40 1608.33
189.55 1581.60 187.95 1595.06 186.35 1608.76
Latency specifications for 40G circuit packs
Table 1-23 to Table 1-25 on page 1-131 provide end-to-end, unidirectional
latency for a single component of the traffic path through 40G circuit packs.

Table 1-23
Latency specifications for Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40G MUX
OCI circuit packs
DWDM circuit
pack
Client circuit pack Typical uni-directional,
end-to-end latency (s) (see Note)
Description
and (PEC)
Description
and (PEC)
Client Mapping NTK525CAE5 NTK525CFE5
40G OCLD
(NTK539PAE5/
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5)
or
Wavelength-
selective 40G
OCLD
(NTK539RAE5/
NTK539RBE5/
NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5)
40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CAE5
and
NTK525CFE5)
OC-192/
STM-64
10.7G-OPU2 (Synchronous
CBR10G)
77 68
ETH10G 11.05G-OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
11.09G-OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
Any packet size
75 68
G
.
7
0
4
1

G
F
P
-
F

m
a
p
p
i
n
g
s
10.7G-GFP/OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent), or
10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/ordered
set/MAC transparent);
NTK525CFE5 only
Packet mapping with 64
byte packets
76 68
Add this value for all
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 1518
byte packets
2
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 9600
byte packets
9 15
FC800 Enh CBR10G to OPU2e NA 69
FC1200 512/513 TTT, GFP-T to
OPU2e (TCODEGFPT)
NA 69
40G OCLD
(NTK539PAE5/
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5)
or
Wavelength-
selective 40G
OCLD
(NTK539RAE5/
NTK539RBE5/
NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5)
40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CAE5
and
NTK525CFE5)
OTM2 ODU transparent regen, Null
FEC, 10.7G
77 69
FEC, 11.05G/11.09G
76 69
OTM2 ODU transparent regen,
RS8 FEC, 10.7G
83 75
RS8 FEC, 11.05G/11.09G
82 74
OCI circuit packs
DWDM circuit
pack
Description
and (PEC)
Description
and (PEC)
40G UOCLD
(NTK539XAE5/
NTK539XEE5)
40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CAE5
and
NTK525CFE5)
OC-192/
STM-64
10.7G-OPU2 (Synchronous
CBR10G)
158 149
ETH10G 11.05G-OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
11.09G-OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
Any packet size
157 149
G
.
7
0
4
1

G
F
P
-
F

m
a
p
p
i
n
g
s
G.7041 GFP-F packet
mappings (packet
mapping with 64 byte
packets):
10.7G-GFP/OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent), or
10.7G-GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/ordered
set/MAC transparent);
NTK525CFE5 only
157 150
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 1518
byte packets
2
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with 9600
byte packets
9 15
FC800 Enh CBR10G to OPU2e NA 151
FC1200 512/513 TTT, GFP-T to
OPU2e (TCODEGFPT)
NA 151
OCI circuit packs
DWDM circuit
pack
Description
and (PEC)
Description
and (PEC)
40G UOCLD
(NTK539XAE5/
NTK539XEE5)
40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CAE5
and
NTK525CFE5)
FEC, 10.7G
158 151
FEC, 11.05G/11.09G
157 150
RS8 FEC, 10.7G
165 156
RS8 FEC, 11.05G/11.09G
164 156
Note: The uni-directional, end-to-end latency is measured one way from (input to output). For example for a path
from a client 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CAE5) input to a far-end client 40G MUX OCI output through two 40G
OCLDs or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs when client mapping is OC-192/STM-64, the total latency is 77 s
(not 2x77= 154 s)
OCI circuit packs
DWDM circuit
pack
Description
and (PEC)
Description
and (PEC)

Table 1-24
Latency specifications for Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G OCLD/40G UOCLD and 40G OCI,
40G+ CFP OCI, and 40/43G OCI circuit packs
DWDM circuit
pack
Client circuit
pack
Typical uni-directional, end-to-end latency
(s) (see Note)
Description
and (PEC)
Description
and (PEC)
Client mapping NTK529SAE5 NTK529SJE5 NTK529SDE5
40G OCLD
(NTK539PAE5/
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5)
or
Wavelength-
selective 40G
OCLD
(NTK539RAE5/
NTK539RBE5/
NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5)
40G OCI, 40G+
CFP OCI, and
40/43G OCI
(NTK529SAE5,
NTK529SJE5,
and
NTK529SDE5)
40GE N/A 69 N/A
OC768/STM256 75 69 75
OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) N/A 71 81
OTU3 (with FEC OFF) N/A 69 75
40G UOCLD
(NTK539XAE5/
NTK539XEE5)
40G OCI, 40G+
CFP OCI, and
40/43G OCI
(NTK529SAE5,
NTK529SJE5,
and
NTK529SDE5)
40GE N/A 153 N/A
OC768/STM256 157 153 157
OTU3 (with RS8 FEC) N/A 155 163
OTU3 (with FEC OFF) N/A 153 157
Note: The uni-directional, end-to-end latency is measured one way from (input to output). For example for
a path from a client 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40/43G OCI input to a far-end client 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP
OCI, or 40/43G OCI output through two 40G OCLDs or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLDs when client
mapping is OC-768/STM-256, the total latency is 75 s (not 2x75= 150 s).

Table 1-25
Latency specifications for Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, 40G OCLD, and 40G UOCLD circuit
packs (regen)
DWDM circuit pack DWDM circuit pack Typical uni-directional, end-to-end
latency (s)
Description PEC Description PEC
40G OCLD NTK539PAE5/
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5
66 (see Note 1)
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5
Wavelength-
selective
40G OCLD
NTK539RAE5/
NTK539RBE5/
NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5
66 (see Note 2)
40G UOCLD NTK539XAE5/
NTK539XEE5
NTK539XEE5
148 (see Note 3)
NTK539XEE5
NTK539PBE5/
NTK539PCE5/
NTK539PDE5/
NTK539PEE5/
NTK539PFE5/
NTK539PUE5
215 (Dual Regen; see Note 4)
NTK539XEE5
Wavelength-
selective
40G OCLD
NTK539RAE5/
NTK539RBE5/
NTK539RCE5/
NTK539RDE5/
NTK539REE5
215 (Dual Regen; see Note 5)
Note 1: Regen mode is two 40G OCLD circuit packs with a transponder connection between the
line-side ports. The latency value is measured from the line-side Rx port of one 40G OCLD circuit pack
forming the regen pair to the line-side Tx port of the other 40G OCLD circuit pack forming the regen
pair.
Note 2: Regen mode is one 40G OCLD and one Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack with a
transponder connection between the line-side ports. The latency value is measured from the line-side
Rx port of 40G OCLD circuit pack forming the regen pair to the line-side Tx port of the
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack forming the regen pair.
Note 3: Regen mode is two 40G UOCLD circuit packs with a transponder connection between the
line-side ports. The latency value is measured from the line-side Rx port of one 40G UOCLD circuit
pack forming the regen pair to the line-side Tx port of the other 40G UOCLD circuit pack forming the
regen pair.
Note 4: This dual regen consists of two 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD regens connected by 0km of fiber
(additional fiber latency (in microseconds) = 4.897 X Fiber length (km)). Each 40G UOCLD => 40G
OCLD regen has one transponder connection between the line-side ports in each direction. This
latency applies to both (40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD ---fiber--- 40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD) as well as
(40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD ---fiber--- 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD) configurations. The latency value
is measured from the line-side Rx port of the first 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD regen to the line-side
Tx port of the other 40G UOCLD => 40G OCLD regen and includes the uni-directional latency for all
4 circuit packs.
Note 5: This dual regen consists of two 40G UOCLD => Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD regens
connected by 0km of fiber (additional fiber latency (in microseconds) = 4.897 X Fiber length (km)).
Each 40G UOCLD => Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD regen has one transponder connection
between the line-side ports in each direction. This latency applies to both (40G UOCLD =>
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD ---fiber--- Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD) as well
as (Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD => 40G UOCLD ---fiber--- 40G UOCLD => Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD) configurations. The latency value is measured from the line-side Rx port of the first 40G
UOCLD => Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD regen to the line-side Tx port of the other 40G UOCLD
=> Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD regen and includes the uni-directional latency for all 4 circuit
packs.
Latency specifications for Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, 40G OCLD, and 40G UOCLD circuit
packs (regen)
DWDM circuit pack DWDM circuit pack Typical uni-directional, end-to-end
latency (s)
Description PEC Description PEC
40G, OSIC, and SLIC10 circuit packs provisioning procedures
The following flowcharts provide the various steps/procedures that must be
performed in order to have the 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD,
40G UOCLD, 40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40G MUX OCI,
40G XCIF, OSIC, and SLIC10 circuit packs ready to carry traffic. Mating with
the 40G OTN XCIF circuit pack is covered in OTN I/F circuit packs,
323-1851-102.8.
40G OCI / 40/43G OCI / 40G+ CFP OCI and 40G OCLD /
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD
End
Procedure
Is this to be carried
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
Yes
Install 40G OCI, 40/43G OCI,
or 40G+ CFP OCI & 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD,
or 40G UOCLD Circuit Packs
and pluggables if applicable
Procedures 1-1 and 1-2
Fiber Client and Line
Side Ports
Procedures 1-3 & 1-4
See "Photonic
Network SLAT" in the
Photonic Layer Guide
NTRN15DA
Edit 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD
OTM3 Facility Parameters
(Tx Wavelength & Tx Power)
Procedure 1-6
Change Protection
Scheme to 1+1
Procedure 1-7
Provision GCC0/GCC1
Procedure 1-9
Is 40G 1+1 Line Side
Protection required?
Is line Side or
OTU3 mapping layer
GCC0/GCC1
Required?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Add and edit client facilities on 40/43G
OCI or 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack
Procedure 1-5
Note: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
layer is provisioned. Refer to "Photonic circuit packs
provisioning procedures" in 323-1851-102.6.
Provision ODU3 Transponder
Cross-Connection
between the OCI and the OCLD
Procedure 1-10
40G MUX OCI and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD /
40G UOCLD
Install 40G MUX OCI &
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective
circuit pack(s) and install clients
XFPs on 40G MUX OCI
Procedure 1-1 & 1-2
End
Procedure
Fiber client and line
side ports
OTM3 facility parameters
Procedure 1-6
See "Photonic
NTRN15DA
Add & edit 40G MUX OCI
OTM2, OC-192, STM-64, or
ETH10G client facility
Procedure 1-5
Change protection
scheme to 1+1 or
1+1 Port TPT
Procedure 1-7
Provision GCC0/GCC1
Procedure 1-9
Is line side or client side
protection required?
Is GCC0/GCC1
required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note : To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Cross-Connection
between the 40G MUX OCI and
the 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective
Procedure 1-10
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD regenerator
Install 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD circuit packs
Procedure 1-1
End
Procedure
Fiber line
side ports
Procedure 1-6
See "Photonic
NTRN15DA
Provision GCC0
Procedure 1-9
Is GCC0
required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
Yes
Yes
cross-connection
between the 2 OCLDs
Procedure 1-10
40G XCIF and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD
End
Procedure
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
Yes
No
Add OC192/STM64
client facility
Procedure 1-5
Edit the OC192/STM64
facility to OOS
Procedure 1-13
facility parameters
as required
Procedure 1-6
Provision lower layer DCC/GCC
and router circuit
Procedure 1-9
Change protection
scheme to 1+1
Procedure 1-7
Change protection
scheme to BLSR
/MS-SPRing
Procedure 1-7
Create ring
configuration
Procedure 1-8
Is DCC/GCC required?
Yes
OC192/STM64 protection?
Unprotected/UPSR
1+1
BLSR/MS-SPRing
facility to IS
Procedure 1-13
Install 40G XCIF & 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD,
or 40G UOCLD circuit pack(s)
Procedure 1-1
Fiber line side ports
See "Photonic
NTRN15DA
(Tx wavelength & Tx power)
Procedure 1-6
Change 40G XCIF
equipment mode
Procedure 1-12
No
Provision path
cross-connections
Procedure 1-11
Path connections
to be provisioned?
Yes
Note 1: To use the photonic layer, make sure the photonic
Note 2: Protection is not supported when
40G XCIF is mated with Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD or 40G UOCLD.
Note 3: For control plane provisioning procedures, refer to
Configuration - Control Plane, 323-1851-330.
OSIC submarine application
SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex submarine application
Install OSIC circuit packs
Procedure 1-1
Provisioning
complete
Edit OSIC OTM2 facility parameters (depending on whether
Idler or Supervisory Channel Idler mode required)

Procedure 1-6
Provision the supervisory channel address list
See Submarine Networking Application Guide,
NTRN72AA
Configure and test CPL or 6500 SLTE
NTRN72AA
Perform a supervisory scan
NTRN72AA
Provisioning
complete
Configure and test the SLTE
NTRN72AA
Install SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit pack(s)
Procedure 1-1
Install the WSS circuit pack
See Photonic Circuit Packs and Modules,
323-1851-102.6
Connect the fiber between SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex
and WSS circuit packs
Edit the IDLER facility parameters
on the SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex
Procedure 1-6
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCI circuit packs:
If an OTN cross-connect is not provisioned in the shelf, the circuit pack
supports the broadband facilities (OTMn, ETH40G, OC768/STM256) only.
If an OTN cross-connect is provisioned in the shelf, the facilities must be
manually provisioned.
Manual provisioning of broadband facilities is possible when mated with
40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD.
For the NTK529SJE5 variant, manual provisioning of OTN I/F facilities is
possible when mated with 40G OTN XCIF with an equipment profile of
40GNNI. PTP provisioning triggers equipment mating with the 40G OTN
XCIF. See OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-102.8, for more information
about the OTN I/F facilities.
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs
supports the broadband facilities (OTMn, ETH10G, OC192/STM64) only.
40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD.
For the NTK525CFE5 variant, manual provisioning of OTN I/F facilities is
possible when mated with 40G OTN XCIF with an equipment profile of
10G. PTP provisioning triggers equipment mating with the 40G OTN
XCIF. See OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-102.8, for more information
about the OTN I/F facilities.
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs:
supports the broadband facilities (OTM3) only.
40G OCI, 40G MUX OCI, or 40G XCIF.
Manual provisioning of OTN I/F facilities is possible when mated with
40G OTN XCIF with an equipment profile of 40GNNI, OTU3E2 or 4x10G.
PTP provisioning triggers equipment mating with the 40G OTN XCIF. See
OTN I/F circuit packs, 323-1851-102.8, for more information about the
OTN I/F facilities.
Provisioning rules summary for the 40G XCIF circuit packs
In a 14-slot converged shelf with a 160G cross-connect, the 40G XCIF
with 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD is only supported in
slots 6 and 10. The 40G XCIF and 40G UOCLD combination is not
supported with the 160G cross-connect.
With a 240G and above cross-connect, the 40G XCIF is supported in all
even slots, plus slots 1, 13, 21, and 33 of a 32-slot shelf and slots 1 and 9
of a 14-slot shelf.
If the 40G XCIF is paired with a 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD, the 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD must be in the
odd slot to the left of the 40G XCIF in even slot.
If the 40G XCIF is paired with a 40G UOCLD, they are supported in the
following slots on a 14-slot shelf:
40G XCIF in slot 1 and 40G UOCLD in slots 2/3
If the 40G XCIF is paired with a 40G UOCLD, they are supported in the
following slots on a 32-slot shelf:
The OTM3 facility is auto-created/deleted with the 40GXCIF equipment.
The OCn facilities can only be provisioned after 40G XCIF is mated
(ODU3 transponder connection is provisioned).
The ODU3 transponder connection can only be deleted after all OCn
facilities have been deleted.
The equipment profile attribute is supported on the 40GXCIF equipment
to configure the OCn mode as OC192/STM64. OC768/STM256 is not
supported in this release but not blocked.
The 40G XCIF does not support physical ports. All interfaces are defined
with virtual port numbers starting with value 100:
40G interface for OTM3: port 100
10G interfaces for OC192 and OTM2: ports 101 to 104
In OC192/STM64 mode, the OC192/STM64 facility is manually
created/deleted. The OTM2 layer facility and ODU2 connections are
auto-created/deleted/managed with the client OC192 facility.
Table 1-26 provides references to different procedures covered in this chapter.
Table 1-26
Procedures in this chapter
Topic Page
Procedure 1-1 Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 1-142
Procedure 1-2 Provisioning a pluggable automatically 1-143
Procedure 1-3 Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 1-144
Procedure 1-4 Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs 1-147
Procedure 1-5 Adding a facility to an equipment 1-150
Procedure 1-6 Editing facility parameters 1-155
Procedure 1-7 Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 1-157
Procedure 1-8 Creating ring configurations 1-165
Procedure 1-9 Adding a new entry in the communications settings 1-168
Procedure 1-10 Adding transponder connections 1-170
Procedure 1-11 Adding a path connection 1-173
Procedure 1-12 Changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode 1-176
Procedure 1-13 Changing the primary state of a facility 1-177
Procedure 1-14 Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable 1-179
Procedure 1-15 Deleting a facility from an equipment 1-181
Procedure 1-16 Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 1-183
Procedure 1-1
Provisioning a circuit pack automatically
If automatic equipping is enabled, a 40G circuit pack and any pluggables
present are automatically provisioned when inserted in the shelf. Facilities
may or may not auto-provision, depending on the circuit pack and pluggable
type. See Table 1-27 on page 1-152 for facilities that auto-provision and
facilities that must be manually provisioned.
To enable automatic equipping, refer to the Enabling/disabling slot-based
automatic equipping procedure in Administration and Security,
323-1851-301.
See the Equipping rules section for supported slots for 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, 40G OCI, 40G MUX OCI, 40G XCIF, 40G
UOCLD, OSIC and SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex. If a circuit pack is inserted in an
unsupported slot, an Autoprovisioning Mismatch alarm is raised.
Prerequisites
To provision equipment for an empty equipment slot, ensure the last
equipment that occupied the slot and its related facilities and
cross-connects have been deleted.
Ensure the plastic pin protector on the circuit pack has been removed.
Ensure automatic equipping is enabled.
Step Action
1 Insert the circuit pack in the correct slot in the shelf.
If you are logged in to Site Manager when you automatically provision a circuit
pack, the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application will auto-refresh to
display the circuit pack in the list of available equipment. You can also click
the Refresh button to do the manual refresh.
end
CAUTION
Risk of equipment damage
Electrostatic discharge can damage electrostatic sensitive
devices. Use antistatic protection to avoid damaging circuit
packs.
Procedure 1-2
Provisioning a pluggable automatically
Pluggables are supported on the 40G MUX OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs only. This procedure is not applicable to other 40G circuit packs.
If automatic equipping is enabled, when inserted in the circuit pack, a
pluggable equipment is automatically provisioned but facilities are not
auto-created.
If a pluggable was originally provisioned and then manually deleted, reseating
any pluggable on the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack will trigger the
auto-provisioning of all pluggable equipment present on the same circuit pack.
You need to manually delete the pluggables that are not desired.
323-1851-301.
Prerequisites
To provision a pluggable for an empty circuit pack port, ensure the last
pluggable that occupied the circuit pack port and its related facilities and
Ensure the plastic pluggable port protector has been removed.
Step Action
1 Insert the pluggable in the correct circuit pack port in the shelf. XFPs are
supported in ports 1 to 4 of the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack. CFPs are
supported in port 1 of the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack.
2 Repeat step 1 for all pluggables to be provisioned.
end
CAUTION
packs.
Procedure 1-3
Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf
Use this procedure to route fiber-optic cables onto the 2-slot, 7-slot, 14-slot or
32-slot 6500 shelf, as applicable.
In order to prevent congestion in the shelf fiber manager and minimize
interference between fiber patch cords and a shelf front cover, you must
consider the recommendations detailed in Some operational considerations
in 323-1851-151, Planning - Ordering Information, if any of the following apply:
using fiber patch cords with a boot length greater than 42.5 mm (not
recommended, but using an extended depth cover solution will provide
additional space in front of the circuit packs)
using in-line optical attenuators (fixed pads) (not recommended, but using
an extended depth cover solution will provide additional space in front of
the circuit packs)
using fiber patch cords with a 2.0 mm diameter when more than 192 fibers
are required per side in a 14-slot shelf or per quadrant in a 32-slot shelf
(using bend insensitive optical patch cords with 1.6 mm diameter is
recommended when fiber manager congestion is a concern)
See Figure 1-31 on page 1-146 for an example of fiber routing on the shelf.
CAUTION
Risk of fiber-optic cable damage
The minimum bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 1.5 in.
(3.8 cm). Observe this limit at all times to avoid low fiber-optic
cable performance or damage.
CAUTION
packs.
Procedure 1-3 (continued)
Step Action
1 Wear an antistatic wrist strap or foot straps to protect the shelf from static
damage. If using wrist strap, connect the wrist strap to the ESD jack on the
shelf.
2 Select your next step:
3 If applicable, flip down the fiber channel door.
4 Route the optical fibers or cables through the fiber channel.
Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 1 to 7 of 14-slot shelf or
slot 1 to 8 and 21 to 28 of 32-slot shelf to the left side of the rack through the
appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 8 to 14 of 14-slot shelf
or slot 11 to 18 and 31 to 38 of 32-slot shelf to the right side of the rack
through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
For 7-slot shelf, route optical fibers that terminate on slots1 to 4 toward the
bottom of the rack through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
Route optical fibers of slots 5 to 7 toward the top of the rack.
For the 2-slot shelf, route optical fibers that terminate on slot 1, 2, and 15
through the large slot on the right side of the shelf to the appropriate channel
of the fiber routing guide. Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the
fibers exiting the shelf.
Use external fiber management drawers to store excess fiber cable. Fiber
slack storage is not provided for fibers leaving the 6500 shelf.
5 Close the fiber channel door if applicable.
6 If you have removed the shelf cover to route optical fibers and cables,
re-install the shelf cover (refer to the appropriate procedure in Part 2 of
Installation, 323-1851-201).
end
If the shelf cover is Then
installed on the card cage Remove the shelf cover (refer to the
appropriate procedure in Part 2 of
not installed on the card cage Go to step 3.
Figure 1-31
Example of fiber routing on the 14-slot 6500 optical shelf
Procedure 1-4
Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs
Use this procedure to connect fiber-optic cables to circuit packs.
Prerequisites
Make sure you have the appropriate patch cords before connecting
fiber-optic cables.
Make sure you have the correct tool to disconnect the connector. See
Figure 1-32 on page 1-148.
If you are using fixed attenuators for the optical interfaces and the shelf is
equipped with a front cover, do not add the attenuators on the optical
interface. Instead, add the required attenuators to the patch panel or
inside a fiber storage tray.
For 6500 circuit packs such as SMUX that the fiber connection is coming
out from faceplate at 90 degrees, use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm
flexible strain relief boots, NTTC50++V6 Ciena supplied patchcords or
equivalent with Telcordia GR-326 compliant, short flexible LC strain relief
boot (Corning or equivalent).
Do not install in-line plug attenuators at the 6500 circuit pack faceplate on
ports that are perpendicular to the faceplate (also not recommended on
angled ports). See Figure 1-33 on page 1-149.
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury
When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack
emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
the optical interface circuit packs capped when they are not
connected to optical fiber cables. Never look directly into the
end of an optical fiber.
Step Action
1 Inspect and clean connectors and adaptors on patch cords. See Cleaning
Connectors chapter in Part 2 of Installation, 323-1851-201.
Make sure the two connectors to be mated are clean.
2 Connect the fiber-optic patch cord to the circuit pack port.
3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 for all ports on the circuit pack.
4 Making sure not to violate the fiber-optic cable minimum bend radius, place
any slack fiber-optic cable in external fiber management drawers.
end
Figure 1-32
LC connector assembly and connector tool
1
Figure 1-33
6500 optical fiber boot length
1
Example of
incorrect boot length
Procedure 1-5
Adding a facility to an equipment
Use this procedure to:
add a facility that was manually deleted
add a facility for a pluggable on which the facility is not auto-created
add an OC192/STM64 facility on a 40GXCIF
add child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facilities to an OTM facility
The OC192/STM64 facility on a 40GXCIF can only be provisioned after
40G XCIF is mated (ODU3 transponder connection is provisioned).
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure you must use an account with a level 3 or higher
UPC.
Step Action
1 Select the required network element in the navigation tree.
2 Select Equipment & Facility Provisioning from the Configuration
drop-down menu to open the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application.
3 Select the required shelf from the Shelf drop-down list.
4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment or pluggable and port (if
applicable) that will support the facility.
See Table 1-27 on page 1-152 for facilities supported on 40G circuit packs.
5 Click Add in the Facility area to open the Add facility dialog box.
The dialog box displays the first facility that is not provisioned and is available.
6 Select the required facility type from the Facility Type drop-down list (if
applicable).
Selecting the SONET or SDH facility automatically sets the port mode to the
appropriate mode.
7 If adding a child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facility, click the Add Child button in
the parent OTM facility area.
Step Action
8 Select the required parameters from the drop-down lists. See the following for
facility attribute descriptions:
Table 1-33 on page 1-188 for OC192 /STM64 and OC768/STM256
facility parameters
Table 1-34 on page 1-192 for ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters
Table 1-36 on page 1-199 for 40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-37 on page 1-203 for 40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-38 on page 1-204 for OSIC OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-39 on page 1-208 for OTM3 facility parameters
Table 1-41 on page 1-219 for FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX OCI
Table 1-42 on page 1-221 for TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters
Table 1-43 on page 1-222 for OPTMON facility parameters
Table 1-44 on page 1-223 for IDLER facility parameters
9 Click OK to add the facility and close the Add facility dialog box.
end
Table 1-27
Facilities supported on 40G, OSIC, and SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit packs (Note 1)
Circuit pack
(Equipment)
Facilities on the
circuit pack
Pluggable
equipment
Facilities on the pluggable (Note 2)
40G MUX OCI
40GMUX) (Note 3
and Note 4)
NTK525CAE5
NTK525CFE5 mated
with 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-S
elective 40G
OCLD/40G UOCLD
OTM3 (auto),
TCMCTP
P10GSEL ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2,
ADJ), TCMCTP (Note 12)
OC192/STM64 (OTM2, ADJ),
TCMCTP (Note 12)
P10GEL ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2,
P10GSOEL ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2,
OC192/STM64 (OTM2, ADJ),
TCMCTP (Note 12)
OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP
(Note 12)
FLEX (OTM2, ADJ, WAN Note 10)
(Note 13), TCMCTP (Note 12)
PXFP OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP
(Note 12)
OC192/STM64 (OTM2, ADJ)
ETH10G (WAN Note 9, OTM2, ADJ)
40G OCI (40GOCI)
(Note 5)
NTK529SAE5/SDE5
OC768/STM256
(OTM3) (Note 14)
OTM3 (ADJ)
(Note 15)
N/A N/A
40G+ CFP OCI
(40GOCI) (Note 6)
NTK529SJE5 mated
with 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-S
elective 40G
OCLD/40G UOCLD
N/A PCFP OC768/STM256 (OTM3), TCM CTP
OTM3 (ADJ), TCM TTP, TCM CTP
ETH40G (OTM3), TCM CTP
40G OCLD
(40GOCLD)
NTK539PAE5 to
NTK539PFE5,
NTK539PUE5,
40G OCLD
(40GOCLD)
NTK539RAE5 to
NTK539REE5
not mated with OTN
XCIF (Note 7)
OTM3 (ADJ) (auto
Note 8) (Note 16)
N/A N/A
40G UOCLD
(40GUOCLD)
NTK539XAE5/XEE5
not mated with OTN
XCIF (Note 7)
OTM3 (ADJ) (auto)
(Note 16)
N/A N/A
OSIC (OSIC)
NTK528XAE5
OTM2 (ADJ) (auto)
(Note 17)
N/A N/A
40G XCIF (40GXCIF)
NTK525FAE5
OTM3 (auto),
OC192/STM64
(OTM2)
N/A N/A
SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex
(SLIC)
NTK554HA/HC
IDLER (auto),
OPTMON (auto)
N/A N/A
Note 1: Refer to Table 1-10 on page 1-51 for the supported XFP modules in this release.
Note 2: The (auto) means the facility is auto-provisioned upon equipment/pluggable equipment
creation. The facilities in brackets are facilities auto-created on the same port as the main facility. These
facilities inherit the primary state of the main facility and are auto-deleted when the main facility is
deleted.
Circuit pack
(Equipment)
Facilities on the
circuit pack
Pluggable
equipment
Note 3: On the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, port 1 to 4 are the client interfaces (OC192/STM64,
ETH10G, or OTM2 (at 10.7, 11.05, or 11.09)). There are no line ports on 40G MUX OCI circuit packs.
A virtual port 100 is provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack. For more information on the
rules related to this circuit pack, see Provisioning rules summary for the 40G MUX OCI circuit packs
on page 1-139.
Note 4: All Broadband circuit packs that support transparent OC192/STM64 transport can similarly
support transparent 10GE WAN transport through the use of the OC192/STM64 facility type. Make sure
the selected XFP supports OC192/STM64 facility type. XFPs that do not support OC192/STM64 facility
type (such as NTTP81xx) cannot be used to support the 10GE WAN protocol on these circuit packs.
Note 5: On the 40G OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the client interface (40G). There are no line ports on
the 40G OCI circuit packs.
Note 6: On the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the CFP-based client interface. There are no line
ports on the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs. For more information on the rules related to this circuit pack,
see Provisioning rules summary for the 40G OCI circuit packs: on page 1-139.
Note 7: On the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs, port 1 is the
line interface (40G). There are no client ports on the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD circuit packs. For more information on the rules related to this circuit pack, see Provisioning
rules summary for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit packs: on
page 1-139.
Note 8: On the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, the OTM3 line facility
auto-provisions only if the Auto Facility Provisioning system parameter is set to On in the Node
Information application. The Auto Facility Provisioning system parameter does not impact the 40G
UOCLD circuit packs.
Note 9: The WAN facility is auto-created only when the ETH10G packet mapping is 10.7G GFP.
Note 10: The WAN facility is auto-created only with the FC1200 FLEX facility.
Note 11: The OC192/STM64 and ETH10G facilities are supported on the PXFP variants of
NTK583AA/AB and NTK587Ex to NTK587Hx only. Supported on the NTK529CF variant only.
Note 12: TCM is supported on the NTK529CF variant only.
Note 13: The FLEX facility is only supported on the NTTP86AA, NTTP86BA, or NTTP84BA XFP.
FC800 is supported on NTTP86AA and NTTP86BA only while FC1200 is supported on NTTP86AA,
NTTP86BA, and NTTP84BA.
Note 14: OC768/STM256 facility is auto-provisioned on the 40G OCI circuit pack but not on the
40/43G OCI circuit pack when the circuit pack is inserted. OTM3 layer facility on 40G OCI circuit pack
is auto-provisioned when OC768/STM256 facility is added.
Note 15: OTM3 client facility is applicable to 40/43G OCI circuit pack only.
Note 16: OTM3 TX and OTM3 RX facilities represent the TX and RX portions of the OTM3 facility.
Circuit pack
(Equipment)
Facilities on the
circuit pack
Pluggable
equipment
Procedure 1-6
Editing facility parameters
Use this procedure to edit the facility parameters for a facility.
The OSIC circuit pack OTM2 facility must have the following provisioning to
function in Idler mode:
Tx Power (dBm) must be provisioned to valid value
Tx Wavelength must be provisioned to valid non-default value
The OSIC circuit pack OTM2 facility must have the following provisioning to
function in Supervisory Channel Idler mode (enable repeater queries):
Tx Power (dBm) must be provisioned to valid value
Tx Wavelength must be provisioned to valid non-default value
Tx SBS Dither must be provisioned to On
Tx AM Format must be provisioned to SC Idler
Attention: Each 6500 shelf supports a maximum of one OSIC circuit pack
with Tx AM Format provisioned to SC Idler, but can support several OSIC
circuit packs with Tx AM Format provisioned to Idler in the same shelf. In
other words, a single 6500 shelf can support up to one SC Idler circuit pack
and multiple Idler circuit packs.
The SLIC IDLER facility must be put OOS before you can provision the
following parameters as indicated in the engineering data sheet:
Wavelength for the first laser: 1530.33 nm to 1565.09 nm
Wavelength for the second laser: 1530.33 nm to 1565.09 nm
Note: You must select either the same wavelength for both lasers or two
adjacent wavelengths, with the shorter wavelength assigned to the first
laser.
Output power for the first laser: -2.4 dBm to 6 dBm
Output power for the second laser: -2.4 dBm to 6 dBm
SBS dither for the first laser: OFF or ON
SBS dither for the second laser: OFF or ON
Put the SLIC IDLER facility back to IS after provisioning.
If a redundant SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex exists, make the same provisioning on the
second SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit pack.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must use an account with a level 3 or higher
UPC.
Step Action
4 In the Equipment area of the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application,
select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to edit.
5 Select the appropriate facility from the Facility Type drop-down list if more
than one facility type is supported.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to edit.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit Facility dialog box.
Table 1-33 on page 1-188 for OC192 /STM64 and OC768/STM256
facility parameters
Table 1-35 on page 1-197 for WAN facility parameters
Table 1-36 on page 1-199 for 40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-37 on page 1-203 for 40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-38 on page 1-204 for OSIC OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-41 on page 1-219 for FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX OCI
Table 1-43 on page 1-222 for OPTMON facility parameters
Table 1-44 on page 1-223 for IDLER facility parameters
Table 1-45 on page 1-225 for ADJ facility parameters
9 Click OK.
end
Procedure 1-7
Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities
Use this procedure to change the protection scheme for a pair of facilities:
from 1+1 linear (OTN) to unprotected (applicable to OTM3 line facilities on
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD)
from unprotected to 1+1 linear (OTN) (applicable to OTM3 line facilities on
40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, or 40G UOCLD)
from 1+1/MSP linear to unprotected (applicable to OC192/STM64 on
40G XCIF)
from unprotected to 1+1/MSP linear (applicable to OC192/STM64 on
40G XCIF)
from unprotected to 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing (applicable to
OC192/STM64 on 40G XCIF)
from 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing to unprotected (applicable to
OC192/STM64 on 40G XCIF)
from 1+1 Port TPT to unprotected (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 40G MUX OCI and OTM3 client or mapping facilities on 40G+
CFP OCI)
from unprotected to 1+1 Port TPT (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 40G MUX OCI and OTM3 client or mapping facilities on 40G+
CFP OCI)
The following apply when changing the protection scheme:
For 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, three 40G circuit
packs form the protection triplet. Two 40G OCLDs or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLDs carrying the working and protection paths with a 40G OCI,
40/43G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, or 40G MUX OCI circuit pack in between.
The 40G triplet must be equipped in consecutive slots. The working 40G
OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit pack must be in the left
slot of triplet and the protection 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD circuit pack must be in the right slot of triplet. The valid protection
group slots are {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {9, 10, 11}, and {12, 13, 14} on a 14-slot
shelf; {1, 2, 3}, {4, 5, 6}, {13, 14, 15}, {16, 17, 18}, {21, 22, 23}, {24, 25, 26},
{33, 34, 35}, and {36, 37, 38} on a 32-slot shelf. {1, 2, 3} and {4, 5, 6} on a
7-slot shelf.
CAUTION
Risk of traffic loss
Changing the protection scheme is a service impacting
procedure.
For 40G UOCLD circuit packs, the protection triplet occupies 5 slots, with
the working 40G UOCLD in the two left slots of the triplet and the
protection 40G UOCLD in the two right slots of the triplet. Two 40G
UOCLDs carrying the working and protected paths with a 40G MUX OCI,
40G OCI, 40/43G OCI, or 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack in between. The
valid protection group slots are {2-3, 4, 5-6} and {10-11, 12, 13-14} on a
14-slot shelf; {2-3, 4, 5-6}, {14-15, 16, 17-18}, {22-23, 24, 25-26}, and
{34-35, 36, 37-38} on a 32-slot shelf; {2-3, 4, 5-6} on a 7-slot shelf.
For 40G MUX OCI circuit packs (NTK525CF variant) in 1+1 Port TPT, the
working and protection circuit packs are both in odd slots. The mate 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD must be provisioned in the even
slot to the right. The valid protection group slots are:
{1, 2} and {3, 4}, or {9, 10} and {11, 12} in a 14-slot shelf
{1, 2} and {3, 4}, {13, 14} and {15, 16}, {21, 22} and {23, 24}, or {33, 34}
and {35, 36} in a 32-slot shelf
{1, 2} and {3, 4} in a 7-slot shelf
For 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs in 1+1 Port TPT, the working and
protection circuit packs are both in odd slots. The mate 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD must be provisioned in the even
slot to the right. The valid protection group slots are:
{1, 2} and {3, 4}, or {9, 10} and {11, 12} in a 14-slot shelf
{1, 2} and {3, 4}, {5, 6} and {7, 8}, {11, 12} and {13, 14}, {15, 16} and
{17, 18}, {21, 22} and {23, 24}, {25, 26} and {27, 28}, {31, 32} and
{33, 34}, or {35, 36} and {37, 38} in a 32-slot shelf
{1, 2} and {3, 4} in a 7-slot shelf
The CFPs equipped on the 40G+ CFP OCI that are connected to the TPT
must be NTTA12BA.
The port on which working and protection facilities are provisioned must
be the same. For example, if the working client facility is provisioned on
port 1 of the working 40G MUX OCI, the protection client facility must be
provisioned on port 1 of the protection 40G MUX OCI.
The LOFEF client port parameter must be set to Disabled when 1+1 Port
TPT is provisioned.
It is recommended that the LOFEF client port parameter be set to
Disabled when 1+1 OTN line-side protection is provisioned. Enabling
LOFEF may result in a longer switch time.
The XFPs equipped on the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack that is connected
to the TPT must be NTTP84BA or NTTP86BA. For 1550 nm applications,
the NTTP84AA XFP can be used, but only with the 10-channel TPT
(NT0H59ACE5), which is the only qualified variant for 1550 nm
applications. Performance is not guaranteed for other XFP types.
Two 40G XCIF circuit packs and two 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD circuit packs (two pairs of 40G XCIF/40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD) along with two cross-connect circuit
packs provide 1+1/MSP linear and 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing protection
(40G TR protected group). For 1+1/MSP linear or 2-Fiber
BLSR/MS-SPRing protection, the valid protection group slots for 40G
XCIF and 40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD are: {1,2,3,4},
{5,6,9,10}, and {11,12,13,14} for a 14-slot shelf and {1,2,3,4}, {5,6,7,8},
{11,12,13,14}, {15,16,17,18}, {21,22,23,24}, {25,26,27,28}, {31,32,33,34},
and {35,36,37,38} for a 32-slot shelf. The 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs are equipped in odd slots.
The 40G XCIF circuit packs are equipped in even slots.
The working and protection ports on 40G XCIF circuit packs must be
horizontally aligned. For example, if the working port is on slot 2 port 3,
then the protection port is on slot 4 port 3 (same port number). This rule
applies irrespective of protection scheme being utilized. You can provision
the ports to have different protection schemes.
For all protection schemes that involve the 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs, the 40G OCLD or
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD circuit packs for working and protection
must be both C-band or both L-band but can be different variants. The
working can be any NTK539Px PEC and the protection can be any
NTK539Px or NTK539Rx PEC. Or vice versa.
For 1+1/MSP linear and BLSR/MS-SPRing protection schemes, both
working and protection OC192/STM64 facilities must be set to the same
port mode.
You cannot change the protection scheme from unprotected to 1+1/MSP
linear if there are already path cross-connects provisioned on the facility
that will become the protection facility.
The BLSR/MS-SPRing scheme cannot be provisioned if there are already
path cross-connects provisioned on either of the two facilities to be
provisioned.
Before the 1+1 linear (OTN) protection is provisioned, equipment in
working slot (left 40G OCLD or 40G UOCLD) must be in Equipment Mode
of M; equipment in protection slot (right 40G OCLD or 40G UOCLD) must
be in Equipment Mode of MP.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must:
ensure you have all the documentation relating to deleting transponder
and path cross-connects, editing a BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration, and
changing a facility state. Refer to the Deleting transponder connections,
Deleting path connections, and Editing a BLSR/MS-SPRing
configuration for a node procedures in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth
and Data Services, 323-1851-320, and Procedure 1-13, Changing the
primary state of a facility on page 1-177 for details.
use an account with a level 3 or higher UPC
Step Action
2
3
Delete any transponder cross-connects on the protection slot OTM3 facility.
Refer to the Deleting transponder connections procedure in Part 1 of
Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320, for details.
Go to step 14.
If you are changing the protection scheme Then go to
from unprotected to 1+1 linear (OTN) step 3
from 1+1 linear (OTN) to unprotected step 4
from unprotected to 1+1/MSP linear step 5
from 1+1/MSP linear to unprotected step 6
from unprotected to 1+1 Port TPT step 7
from 1+1 Port TPT to unprotected step 9
from unprotected to BLSR/MS-SPRing step 10
from BLSR/MS-SPRing to unprotected step 11
CAUTION
Ensure cross-connects are not carrying traffic before
you delete them. Deleting a cross-connect that is
carrying traffic causes traffic loss.
Step Action
4
Change the protection slot OTM3 facility in OTN 1+1 to the out-of-service
state. See Procedure 1-13, Changing the primary state of a facility on page
1-177.
Go to step 14.
5
Ensure that any 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR (UPSR/SNCP protected) path
cross-connects that exist on the working slot facility are changed to 1WAY or
2WAY (unprotected).
To change from protected (1WAYPR or 2WAYPR) to unprotected (1WAY or
2WAY), you must delete the protected path cross-connects and re-add them
as unprotected path cross-connects. Refer to the Deleting path connections
procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services,
323-1851-320 and Procedure 1-11, Adding a path connection on page 1-173.
Go to step 14.
6
Change the protection slot facility in 1+1 protection to the out-of-service state.
See Procedure 1-13, Changing the primary state of a facility on page 1-177.
Go to step 14.
7 Change the protection facility to the out-of-service state. See Procedure 1-13,
Changing the primary state of a facility on page 1-177.
CAUTION
If you place a facility out-of-service, you can cause a
loss of traffic.
CAUTION
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
Step Action
8
Ensure that the protection Tx fiber is not connected to the TPT tray.
Go to step 14.
9 Ensure to disconnect the protection card fibers from the TPT tray. Change the
protection facility to the out-of-service state. See Procedure 1-13, Changing
the primary state of a facility on page 1-177.
Go to step 14.
10
Delete path cross-connects for the facilities that are in the unprotected
configuration. Refer to the Deleting path connections procedure in Part 1 of
Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
Go to step 14.
11
Delete path cross-connects for the facilities that are in a BLSR/MS-SPRing
configuration. Refer to the Deleting path connections procedure in Part 1 of
12 Delete the APSIDs for facilities in the ring map of the BLSR/MS-SPRing
configuration. Refer to the Editing a BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration for a
node procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services,
323-1851-320.
The APSIDs of the facilities must be deleted from the ring map at each
network element in the BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration.
CAUTION
You must provision the TPT protection group before
connecting the Tx fiber of the protection circuit pack to
the TPT tray. Otherwise, traffic can be impacted.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Step Action
13
Change the east and west slot facilities in BLSR/MS-SPRing protection to the
out-of-service state. See Procedure 1-13, Changing the primary state of a
facility on page 1-177.
14 Select Protection Provisioning from the Protection drop-down menu to
open the Protection Provisioning application.
15 Select the appropriate equipment or facility type and shelf from the Type and
Shelf drop-down lists.
The provisioning data table opens.
16 Select an entry from the table.
When changing the protection scheme, provisioning the protection scheme
for one of the facilities/circuit packs in a pair automatically provisions the
protection scheme for the other facility/circuit packs in the pair.
17 Click Edit to open the Edit protection provisioning dialog box.
18 Select the radio button of the new protection scheme (Unprotected,
1+1 linear, MSP linear, 1+1 Port TPT, 2F BLSR/MS-SPRing, or 1+1).
19
20 Select the OTN G.873.1 remote standard if applicable.
You can change the Switch mode (Unidirectional or Bidirectional), Revertive
mode (Yes or No), and Wait to restore time (if Revertive mode is Yes). See the
Changing the protection parameters for a pair of facilities or equipment
procedure in Part 2 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating,
323-1851-310.
Go to step 23.
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
from unprotected to 1+1 linear (OTN) or 1+1 Port TPT step 20
from unprotected to 1+1/MSP linear step 21
from unprotected to BLSR/MS-SPRing step 22
from protected to unprotected step 23
Step Action
21 Select the required remote standard (G-841, GR253, or EN300) if applicable.
You can change the Switch mode (Unidirectional or Bidirectional) and Route
diversity (On or Off). Route diversity is applicable to 40G XCIF only. See the
Changing the protection parameters for a pair of facilities or equipment
procedure in Part 2 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating,
323-1851-310.
Go to step 23.
22 Select the required wait to restore ring time (0 to 12 minutes or Infinite) if
applicable.
23 Click OK.
24 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
When changing the protection scheme from 1+1 linear (OTN), 1+1 Port TPT,
or 1+1/MSP linear to unprotected, any 1WAY or 2WAY transponder or path
cross-connects that were provisioned exist only against the working facility.
If any existing path cross-connects are required to form part of new
UPSR/SNCP cross-connects, delete the 1WAY or 2WAY path cross-connects
and create 1WAYPR or 2WAYPR path cross-connects as required. Refer to
the Deleting path connections procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320 and Procedure 1-11, Adding a
path connection on page 1-173.
25 Connect the protection Tx fiber to the TPT tray if 1+1 Port TPT is provisioned.
26 Change the working (or east) and protection (or west) slot facilities back to
the in-service state if applicable.
27 Repeat this procedure to provision the same protection scheme on the
remaining nodes in the protection configuration if it has not been done.
28 Run the protection exerciser to detect potential protection misconfigurations.
Refer to the Running/inhibiting the exerciser procedure in Part 2 of
Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.
end
Procedure 1-8
Creating ring configurations
Use this procedure to create configurations for BLSR/MS-SPRing rings for
OC-192/STM-64 facilities on 40G XCIF circuit packs.
You can save the configurations as ring configuration files to provide a starting
point or template for creating additional ring configurations. Refer to Ring
APS configuration editor parameters on page 1-236 for details on ring
parameters.
Attention: This is a general procedure to create a ring configuration for the
40G XCIF circuit pack. For detailed information on ring configurations and
procedures, refer to "BLSR/MS-SPRing APS configuration files editing" in
Chapter 1, and "BLSR/MS-SPRing APS provisioning" in Chapter 2 in Part 1
of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
Step Action
1 Select Ring APS Configuration Editor from the Tools menu to open the
Ring APS Configuration Editor application.
The Ring APS Configuration Editor application opens with no data if a
configuration file has not been previously opened with this session of Site
Manager. Otherwise, the latest configuration file will be displayed.
2 Type the name of the new ring in the Ring name field.
Refer to Table 1-52 on page 1-236 for parameter descriptions and options.
3 From the Ring type drop-down list, select the ring type of the new ring to be
2 Fiber.
4 Click on the Add Node tool icon. (Once at least one node has been created,
you can also double click on the Add diamond, the diamond shaped icon on
the facility connecting line directly under the center of the node graphic.)
The Add Node dialog box appears.
5 Select the node type of the new ring from the Node type drop-down list.
Step Action
6 Type a node identifier in the Node field or select a node from the drop-down
list. The drop-down list displays all nodes Site Manager is currently logged in
to that have at least one pair of facilities that are BLSR/MS-SPRing protected.
You can type in any other node identifier, whether or not the node is known
to Site Manager.
When a node is selected from the Node drop-down list, the entries in the
facility drop-down list(s) are updated. You should first define the node, then
the facilities, otherwise the user provided facility data is replaced whenever a
new node is selected. However, the facility entries are not affected if you type
the node name instead of selecting it from the drop down list.
7 Type an APS identifier in the APS ID field or select an APS ID from the
drop-down list.
8 Type a facility identifier in the East facility linked to: Next node field or select
a facility from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays all facilities Site
Manager knows to be an East facility (that is, a BLSR/MS-SPRing working
member of a 2-fiber group) and are associated with the node selected in the
Node field. You can type in any other facility identifier, whether or not it is
known to Site Manager.
Attention: Next node in the East facility linked to: Next node field
changes to the node name (for example, 6500-1, 6500-2, etc.) after the first
node has been entered. For example; East facility <facility-shelf-slot-port>
linked to: West of 6500-1. If the node is not the first node and the neighbor
has no node name or TID assigned to it but has an APS ID, the label appears
as: East facility <facility-shelf-slot-port> linked to: West of node with
APSID<#>.
When you select a value in one of the facility drop-down lists, the other list
automatically adjusts to show the protection group mate facility. If you modify
both facilities, the automatic selection of the mate is disabled, but becomes
re-enabled if you select another node.
When you add the node information to the Nodes area, this facility appears
on the right side of the node and connects the node to the node below it in
the Nodes area. The last node in the Nodes area is connected to the first
node.
Step Action
9 Type a facility identifier in the West facility linked to: Previous node field or
select a facility from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays all
facilities Site Manager knows to be a West facility (that is, a
BLSR/MS-SPRing protection member of the 2-fiber group) and are
associated with the node selected in the Node field. You can type in any other
facility identifier, whether or not it is known to Site Manager.
Refer to Table 1-52 on page 1-236 for parameter disruptions and options.
Attention: The Previous node in the West facility linked to: Previous
node field changes to the node name (for example, 6500-1, 6500-2, etc.)
after the first node has been entered. For example, West facility
<facility-shelf-slot-port> linked to: East of 6500-2. If the node is not the first
node and the neighbor has no name or TID assigned to it but has an APS ID,
the label appears as: West facility <facility-shelf-slot-port> linked to: East
of node with APSID<#>.
When you add the node information to the Nodes area, this facility appears
on left side of node and connects the node to the node above it in the Nodes
area. The first node in the Nodes area is connected to the last node.
10
11 Click Apply.
The node appears in the Nodes area of the Ring APS Configuration Editor
application and the Add Node dialog box remains open.
12 If you want to add another node, return to step 6. Otherwise, go to step 14.
13 Click OK.
The Add Node dialog box closes, and the node appears in the Nodes area
of the Ring APS Configuration Editor application.
14 Save the configuration as described in the "Saving a ring configuration file"
procedure in Chapter 1 in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data
Services, 323-1851-320.
15 Apply the configuration information to a node or nodes. Refer to the Applying
ring configuration files to nodes procedure in Chapter 1 in Part 1 of
end
If you want to use the Add Node dialog box information
to add a new node to the configuration, and want to
Then go to
add more nodes step 11
close the dialog box step 13
Procedure 1-9
Adding a new entry in the communications settings
Use this procedure to add a new entry (interface, circuit, router) in the
communications settings. For more information on these parameters and how
they apply to the DCN, refer to Part 4 of Planning, NTRN10CF.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must use an account with a level 3 UPC or
higher.
Step Action
2 Select Comms Setting Management from the Configuration drop-down
menu to open the Comms Setting Management application.
3 Select the required tab.
5 Select the appropriate comms type from the Router type or Interface type
drop-down list.
6 Click Add to open the appropriate add dialog box.
7 Add the parameters as required (if appropriate). See the following for
parameters that can be added:
Interfaces
Lower Layer DCC/GCC parameters on page 1-227
Routers
IISIS Router parameters on page 1-229
IISIS Circuit parameters on page 1-230
OSPF Router parameters on page 1-232
OSPF Circuit parameters on page 1-234
For the Add IISIS Router Parameters and the Add OSPF Router Parameters
dialogs, you have the option of adding distribution lists. To add a distribution
list, use the Add button in Redistribution section (lower section). A maximum
of 80 distribution lists can be added for each type of list. To delete a
distribution list, select the distribution list in the Redistribution section (lower
section) and select Delete.
Step Action
8
9 Click OK.
end
If Then
the dialog allows more than one entry to be
added and you want to add another entry
click Apply, go
to step 7
otherwise go to step 9
Procedure 1-10
Adding transponder connections
Use this procedure to add a 2WAY transponder connection to a network
element for the following circuit packs:
40G OCLD
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
40G OCI
40G+ CFP OCI
40/43G OCI
40G MUX OCI
40G XCIF
Attention: Although this procedure can be used to create an ODU3
transponder connection between 40G XCIF and 40G OCLD /
Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD circuit packs by using
Cross Connections: Transponder Connections application from the
Configuration menu (similar to creating ODU3 transponder connections
between 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD and
40G OCI / 40G+ CFP OCI / 40/43G OCI / 40G MUX OCI circuit packs), it is
recommended that for creating an ODU3 transponder connection between
40G XCIF and 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD / 40G UOCLD
circuit packs, the user change the 40G XCIF equipment mode from MPXC to
MXC or vice versa by using Equipment & Facility Provisioning application
from the Configuration menu.
Changing the equipment mode of a 40G XCIF circuit pack from MPXC to
MXC automatically creates the ODU3 transponder connection between the
40G XCIF and its mate 40G OCLD / Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD / 40G
UOCLD. For more information, refer to Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning
and Operating, 323-1851-310.
Prerequisites
Refer to Transponder connections parameters on page 1-238 for more
information on transponder connection parameters.
To perform this procedure, you must
ensure that you have provisioned the equipment and facilities you need for
the planned transponder connections
review and follow the engineering rules outlined in the Engineering rules
and considerations for transponder connections section in Part 1 of
Step Action
2 Select Cross Connections: Transponder Connections from the
Configuration menu.
If this is the initial launch of the Transponder Connections application, no
transponder connections appear until you perform a Retrieve. Subsequent
launches of the Transponder Connections application display transponder
connections based on the last filter criteria.
3 Click Add to display the Add Cross-Connect dialog box.
4 Click once in the Connection ID text field.
5 Type the connection identifier.
Refer to Table 1-53 on page 1-238 for supported options.
6 Select a signal rate from the Rate drop-down list.
Refer to Table 1-53 on page 1-238 for supported rates.
7 Select a connection type from the Type drop-down list.
Refer to Table 1-53 on page 1-238 for supported types.
8 Select the required equipment and facility from the drop-down lists for each
of the following panels:
From
To
Site Manager automatically populates the available parameter fields after you
select the Rate and Type.
Refer to Table 1-54 on page 1-239 for equipment and facility parameters for
transponder connections.
Step Action
9
end
If you Then click
want to provision another transponder connection
for this network element
Apply and go to step 4
completed the transponder connection
provisioning for this network element
OK (Apply & Close)
Procedure 1-11
Adding a path connection
Use this procedure to add a 1WAY, 1WAYPR, 2WAY, or 2WAYPR path
connection between a 40G XCIF circuit pack and an OC-n/STM-n circuit pack.
Prerequisites
have met all specific requirements for bandwidth management for path
connections in a BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration. Refer to the
"BLSR/MS-SPRing/HERS configuration requirements section in
Chapter 3 in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services,
323-1851-320.
have met all specific requirements for bandwidth management for path
connections in a UPSR/SNCP ring configuration. Refer to the
UPSR/SNCP ring requirements section in Chapter 3 in Part 1 of
Step Action
2 Select Cross Connections: Path Connections from the Configuration
menu.
If this is the initial launch of the Path Connections application, no path
connections appear until you perform a Retrieve. Subsequent launches of
the Path Connections application display path connections based on the last
filter criteria.
4
7 From the Rate drop-down list, select a signal rate.
Refer to Table 1-55 on page 1-242 for supported path connection rates.
If you Then go to
want to provision a Connection ID step 5
do not want to provision a Connection ID step 7
Step Action
8 From the Type drop-down list, select the connection type.
Refer to Table 1-56 on page 1-243 for supported path connection types.
9 Select the required equipment, facility, AU3, or AU4 mapping, and payload
parameters from the drop-down lists for each of the following panels:
From
To
Switch Mate (applicable to 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, and 2WAYDPR
connections only)
Destination Mate (applicable to 2WAYDPR connections only).
Refer to Table 1-57 on page 1-244 for equipment and facility parameters for
path connections and Table 1-56 on page 1-243 for allowable path
connections types between network configurations.
If only AU3 mapping is supported (when the port mode is SONET or an
STS3c/VC4 rate or above is selected), the AU3 and AU4 radio buttons do not
appear in the Add Cross-Connect dialog box.
10
11 Select the End NE A and End NE Z node from the APSIDs in the drop-down
lists in the BLSR/MS-SPRing Endpoints panel.
12
If you are adding a single path connection, the path connection is added. If
the path connection cannot be added, an error message appears. Go to
step 13.
If you are adding multiple path connections, the Multiple Cross Connect
Add Confirmation dialog box appears. Check that the multiple path
connections are correct, and then click Yes. If the path connections cannot
be added, an error message appears.
If Then go to
you want to create the connection on
BLSR/MS-SPRing endpoints
step 11
otherwise step 12
If you Then click
want to provision other path connections for this
network element
Apply
have completed the path connection provisioning for
this network element
OK (Apply & Close)
Step Action
13
end
If in step 12 you selected Then
Apply go to step 4
OK (Apply & Close) the Add Cross-Connect dialog box closes and
you have completed this procedure.
When adding an add/drop connection to/from a
BLSR/MS-SPRing configuration, if you
provision the From endpoint on the add/drop
port and the To endpoint on the
BLSR/MS-SPRing add/drop port, the From and
To endpoints automatically swap. Click
Refresh to display the updated information.
Procedure 1-12
Changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode
Use this procedure to change the 40G XCIF equipment mode from its default
MPXC to MXC or vice versa. Changing the equipment mode from MPXC to
MXC automatically creates the ODU3 transponder connection between the
40G XCIF and its mate 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD.
You must delete any existing OC192/STM64 facilities on the 40G XCIF before
you can change the equipment mode from MXC to MPXC.
Prerequisites
ensure there are no OC192/STM64 facilities provisioned on the 40G XCIF
if you are changing the 40G XCIF equipment mode from MXC to MPXC.
use an account with a level 3 or higher UPC.
Step Action
4 In the Equipment area, select the 40GXCIF equipment that you want to
change the equipment mode.
5 Click Edit in the Equipment area to open the Edit Equipment dialog box.
6 Select the required equipment mode from the Equipment Mode drop-down
list.
7 Click OK.
end
Procedure 1-13
Changing the primary state of a facility
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a facility.
You cannot change the facility state of protection equipment to out-of-service
if the working facilities are still in-service.
Note that the facilities in brackets in Table 1-27 on page 1-152 are facilities
auto-created on the same port as the main facility or equipment. These
facilities inherit the primary state of the main facility/equipment. To change the
primary state of these facilities, you must change the primary state of the main
facility or equipment.
The primary state of the ADJ facility is not editable.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action
select the circuit pack/port whose facility state you want to change.
5 Select the appropriate facility from the Facility Type drop-down list.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility whose state you want to change.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit facility dialog box.
CAUTION
Risk of service interruption
If you place a facility out-of-service, you can cause a loss of
traffic.
Step Action
8 Select OOS or IS from the Primary state drop-down list.
9 Click OK.
10 If changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog box.
end
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
Procedure 1-14
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
to in-service or out-of-service. You must change the primary state of any
related facilities to out-of-service before changing the primary state of a circuit
pack or pluggable to out-of-service. See Procedure 1-13, Changing the
primary state of a facility on page 1-177.
You cannot change the primary state of a pluggable to IS if the associated
circuit pack is OOS.
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack automatically changes the
primary state of any provisioned pluggables on that circuit pack to the same
state.
Prerequisites
when the 40G MUX OCI is used in 1+1 ETS protected configurations,
before putting the OTM3 facility on the mate 40G OCLD OOS, switch
traffic away from the 40G OCLD using the ETS user switch commands to
ensure that the switch time is within specification
Step Action
4 If you are changing the primary state to Then go to
OOS step 5
IS step 6
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
Step Action
5 Ensure any related facilities are out-of-service. See Procedure 1-13,
6 Select the circuit pack or pluggable in the Equipment area.
8 Select IS or OOS from the Primary state drop-down list.
9 Click OK.
10 If you are changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog
box.
end
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
Procedure 1-15
Deleting a facility from an equipment
Use this procedure to delete a facility.
Facilities that are auto-created (facilities in brackets in Table 1-27 on
page 1-152) when the main facility is created will be auto-deleted when the
main facility is deleted.
You cannot delete an OTM3 facility in a 40G MUX OCI or 40G XCIF circuit
pack.
Prerequisites
ensure the end-to-end service to be deleted is not carrying traffic
ensure the facility to be deleted is out-of-service and is not in maintenance
state
delete the sub-network connection if provisioned on this facility. Refer to
the Deleting a sub-network connection procedure in Configuration -
Control Plane, 323-1851-330.
delete the cross-connects of the entire path. Refer to the Deleting
transponder connections and Deleting path connections procedures in
Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
delete the IISIS circuit or OSPF circuit and then the GCC link if provisioned
on the OTM3 facility to be deleted. See the Deleting an entry in the
communications settings procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310.
delete the IISIS circuit or OSPF circuit and then the DCC link if provisioned
on the 40G XCIF OC192/STM64 facility to be deleted. See the Deleting
an entry in the communications settings procedure in Part 1 of
CAUTION
If you delete a facility, you can cause a loss of traffic.
ensure that the protection switching scheme on the facility to be deleted is
provisioned as unprotected. Refer to Procedure 1-7, Changing the
protection scheme for a pair of facilities on page 1-157.
ensure that no loopback exists on the facility. See the Operating/releasing
a loopback procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and
Operating, 323-1851-310 to release a loopback if it exists.
Step Action
select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to delete.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to delete.
7 Click Delete in the Facility area.
8 Click Yes in the warning dialog box.
end
Procedure 1-16
Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable
Use this procedure to delete a circuit pack or pluggable equipment from the
list of provisioned equipment in the Equipment and Facility Provisioning
application. Deleting a circuit pack automatically deletes any provisioned
pluggables on that circuit pack.
Prerequisites
delete all cross-connects provisioned through the equipment. Refer to the
Deleting transponder connections and Deleting path connections
procedures in Part 1 of Configuration - Bandwidth and Data Services,
323-1851-320, for details.
To delete the ODU3 transponder connection on a 40G XCIF circuit pack,
the associated OCn/STMn facility must be deleted first.
delete all facilities on the circuit pack and its associate pluggables, see
Procedure 1-15, Deleting a facility from an equipment on page 1-181.
put the circuit pack or pluggable out-of-service, see Procedure 1-14,
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable on page 1-179.
set the Equipment Mode to MP on 40G MUX OCI, 40G OCLD,
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD, 40G UOCLD, and 40G OCI circuit
packs by removing protection. To change the protection scheme, refer to
Procedure 1-7, Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities on
page 1-157.
Step Action
4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment (circuit pack or pluggable) you
want to delete.
5 Click Delete in the Equipment area.
end
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters
Equipment and facility primary and secondary states
Table 1-28 to Table 1-31 on page 1-186 provide information on equipment and
facility primary and secondary states.
Table 1-28
Equipment and facility primary states
Primary State Description
IS In-service; no failure detected
IS-ANR In-service - abnormal; failure exists but entity is still capable of performing
some of its provisioned functions (that is partial failure)
OOS-AU Out-of-service - autonomous; failure detected
OOS-MA Out-of-service - maintenance; no failure detected (OOS for maintenance
for provisioning memory administration)
OOS-AUMA Out-of-service autonomous maintenance; failure detected
OOS-MAANR Out-of-service - maintenance - abnormal; partial failure detected
Table 1-29
Equipment secondary states
Secondary State Description
Active Equipment has connections established to the facilities it supports and the
connected facilities are in-service
Fault detected Equipment failure detected
Idle No connections established to facilities supported on this equipment, all
connected facilities are out-of-service, or in-service connected facilities are
not on the active traffic path in a protected connection
Mismatched eqp. attribute Mismatched or unknown equipment detected in a provisioned slot
Supporting entity outage Supporting equipment has a failure (applicable to pluggables when
associated circuit pack is missing or has failed or is mismatched)
Unequipped Equipment is missing
Unknown Equipment cannot be identified
Table 1-30
Facility secondary states
<null> Active, working state for a facility
Working receiver
Working
transmitter
Active OCn/STMn facility in the specified direction
Protected Optical line in a BLSR/MS-SPRing/HERS protection scheme is protected
Hot standby Inactive facility in both directions (Hot standby)
Protection switch
inhibited
Protection switch inhibited. Lockout command issued on a line.
Disconnected Facility has no connections established
Fault detected Facility failure detected
Supporting entity
outage
Supporting equipment (XFP or circuit pack):
has a failure, or
is missing, or
is mismatched, or
has an associated connection which is failed.
Loopback active Loopback active on facility
Maintenance State Maintenance State is enabled. When in Maintenance State, a facility continues to
carry traffic if it can, but does not raise alarms, SNMP traps or Performance
Monitoring Threshold Crossing Alerts (PM TCAs).
Applies to facilities that support maintenance state. See Table 1-32 on page 1-187.
Maintenance state is applicable to these facilities only if they are in out-of-service
state.
Auto in-service AINS is enabled. Applies to facilities that support AINS. See Table 1-31 on
page 1-186.
Table 1-31
Facilities that support automatic in-service (AINS)
Equipment Facility type Default value Note
40GOCLD OTM3 Disabled
40GUOCLD OTM3 Disabled
40GOCI OC768/STM256 Enabled child facility (Note): OTM3
OTM3 Disabled
ETH40G Enabled child facility (Note): OTM3
40GMUX OTM3 Disabled Port 100
OTM2 Disabled
OC192/STM64 Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2
ETH10G Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2 or WAN
FLEX Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2 or WAN/OTM2
SLIC IDLER Disabled
OPTMON Enabled
Note: The child facility follows the AINS state of its parent facility. The AINS state of the TCM facility is
independent of the parent OTMn facility.
Table 1-32
Facilities that support maintenance state
Equipment Facility type Note
40GOCLD OTM3
40GUOCLD OTM3
40GOCI OC768/STM256 child facility (Note): OTM3
OTM3
ETH40G child facility (Note): OTM3
40GMUX OTM3 port 100
OTM2
OC192/STM64 child facility (Note): OTM2
ETH10G child facility (Note): OTM2/WAN (GFPSTD/GFPMACTR mapping),
OTM2 (PROP237/PROP238 mapping)
SLIC IDLER
OPTMON
Note: The child facility follows the Maintenance state of its parent facility. The maintenance state of the
TCM facility is independent of the parent OTMn facility.
OC192/768/STM64/256 facility parameters
Table 1-33 provides a list of the OC192/768/STM64/256 facility parameters.
Table 1-33
Parameters Options Description
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and port
number for the selected facility. Read-only
Primary state See Equipment and
facility primary states
on page 1-184
Sets the primary state of the facility. Default reflects
primary state of associated equipment.
Note: IS and OOS are selectable.
Secondary State See Facility
secondary states on
page 1-185
Displays the facility operational state.
The AINS state is editable. For more information, see
Facilities that support automatic in-service (AINS) on
page 1-186.
The Maintenance state is editable for supported circuit
packs. For more information, see Table 1-32 on
page 1-187.
Signal degrade
threshold
1x10^-5
1x10^-6 (default)
1x10^-7
1x10^-8
1x10^-9
Sets the signal degrade threshold. Applicable to 40G
MUX OCI (NTK525CFE5) and 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJ) only.
Excessive bit error
threshold
1x10^-3 (default)
1x10^-4
1x10^-5,
Sets the client receive BER threshold that triggers a
signal fail (SF) condition.
Editable for 40G XCIF, 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CFE5)
and 40G+ CFP OCI (NTK529SJ) only. Read-only for all
other 40G circuit packs.
Laser Off Far End Fail Disabled
Enabled
Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines type
of signal conditioning towards subtending equipment.
When Enabled, client transmitter laser is shutoff when
line faults or head-end client faults are detected. When
Disabled, line/multiplex section AIS is sent to
subtending equipment when line faults or head-end
client faults are detected.
Default setting is determined by the setting of the
system laser off far end fail parameter in the Node
Information application.
Not applicable to 40G XCIF.
Tx Wavelength (nm) 1528.38 (0) to
1568.77 at 50 GHz
spacing (default 0)
Sets the required line transmit wavelength.
Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility is
OOS, except when changing from 0 to a valid
wavelength, which can be IS. Editing to 0 is supported.
Provisionable on tunable pluggables only.
The number in brackets is the channel ID.
Applicable to the OC192/STM64 facility on the PXFP
variants of NTK583AA/AB and NTK587Ex to
NTK587Hx on 40G MUX OCI circuit packs only.
TX Actual Power
(dBm)
TX optical power
Unknown (if circuit
pack not present)
Displays the actual transmit optical input power.
Read-only
When the outgoing transmit optical power level for the
monitored port is out of range, the Tx Actual Power
parameter displays "OOR". The corresponding
OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT value in the Site Manager
Performance Monitoring application does not display
"OOR" when out of range; the lowest reading is
-45 dBm. Refer to Fault Management - Performance
Monitoring, 323-1851-520 for more information about
OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT values.
Rx Actual Power
(dBm)
Rx optical power
Unknown (if circuit
pack not present)
Displays the actual receive optical input power.
Read-only
When the incoming receive optical power level for the
monitored port is out of range, the Rx Actual Power
OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR value in the Site Manager
OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR values.
Tx Actual High Power
(dBm)
Tx optical power high
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Displays the highest measured transmit optical power of
the CFP multiple optical channels. Read-only.
Applicable only to the 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Tx Actual Low Power
(dBm)
Tx optical power low
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Displays the lowest measured transmit optical power of
Rx Actual High Power
(dBm)
Rx optical power
high value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Displays the highest measured received optical power
of the CFP multiple optical channels. Read-only.
Rx Actual Low Power
(dBm)
Rx optical power low
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Displays the lowest measured received optical power of
Port Mode SONET (default for
SONET mode)
SDH (default for
SDH mode)
Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or SDH).
Read-only
Signal mode SONET (default for
SONET port mode)
SDH (default for
SDH port mode)
Sets the signal mode (SS bits).
Only applicable to 40G XCIF circuit packs.
Signal degrade
threshold
1x10^-5
1x10^-6 (default)
1x10^-7
1x10^-8
1x10^-9
Sets the signal degrade threshold.
Used as timing
reference
Yes
No
Displays whether the facility is being used as a timing
reference. Read-only
Data communication
channel
Yes
No
Displays whether the facility is using a data
communications channel (DCC). Read-only
DUS Override Disabled (default for
SONET and SDH)
Enabled
Select the do not use for synchronization (DUS)
override status. Set to Enabled if you want to ignore
received synchronization status messages (SSM) when
facility is used as a timing reference port.
Unequip mode STS1
VC3
VC4
Select the unequip mode.
The only valid unequip mode for SONET port mode is
STS1. The valid unequip modes for SDH port modes
are VC3 and VC4.
The default unequip mode for SDH port mode is VC4.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same as
the Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI). The
provisioned value appears in the facility alarm report if
the SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters
Table 1-34 provides a list of the ETH10G and ETH40G facility parameters.
ETH10G is applicable to 40G MUX OCI circuit packs only. ETH40G is
applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs only.
Table 1-34
Parameter Options Description
40GMUX ETH10G
Primary State See Equipment and
facility primary states on
page 1-184
Secondary State See Facility secondary
states on page 1-185
Indicates the operational state of the facility. The
secondary state can be a combination of one or more
states.
Facilities that support automatic in-service (AINS) on
page 1-186.
The Maintenance state is editable for supported circuit
packs. For more information, see Table 1-32 on
page 1-187.
Packet Mapping See description Displays the mapping layer OTM2 OTURATE and client
mapping.
Not-editable (to change the Packet Mapping, the user
must delete the ETH10G facility and re-create the
ETH10G facility with the new Packet Mapping).
10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)
This packet mapping provides mapping of 10GE LAN
PHY (10G-BASE-R) signal to 10.709G OTU2 signal, via
GFP-F, asynchronous, standard WAN.
10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)
(default)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble and MAC transparent
WAN.
10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ Ordered Set/ MAC
transparent)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble, Ordered Set
transparent, and MAC transparent WAN.
11.05G - OPU1e (PCS transparent)
PHY (10G-BASE-R) to a proportionally wrapped
11.049G OTU1e signal, synchronous, CBR10G.
Laser Off Far
End Fail
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled, local fault (LF) is sent to subtending equipment
when line faults or head-end client faults are detected.
Default setting is determined by the setting of the system
laser off far end fail parameter in the Node Information
application.
Tx Wavelength
(nm)
1528.38 (0) to 1568.77 at
50 GHz spacing (default
0)
Sets the required line transmit wavelength.
OOS, except when changing from 0 to a valid
wavelength, which can be IS. Editing to 0 is supported.
Provisionable on tunable pluggables only.
The number in brackets is the channel ID.
Applicable to the ETH10G facility on the PXFP variants of
NTK583AA/AB and NTK587Ex to NTK587Hx only.
Maximum
Ethernet Frame
Size
9600(default)
1600
Sets the maximum Transfer Unit (MTU).
Tx Actual Power
(dBm)
Tx optical power
Unknown (if circuit pack
not present)
Displays the measured line transmitter optical power.
Read-only.
Rx Actual Power
(dBm)
Rx optical power
not present)
Displays the measured line receiver optical power.
Read-only.
"OOR" when out of range; the lowest reading is -45 dBm.
Refer to Fault Management - Performance Monitoring,
323-1851-520 for more information about
Holdoff Timer
(ms)
0 to 1000 in increments of
100 (default 0)
Sets the length of time (in ms) before Tx conditioning is
applied to the client. Applicable to 40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CFE5 variant) only when the ETH10G is GFP
mapped.
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same as the
Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI). The
provisioned value appears in the facility alarm report if the
SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
40GOCI ETH40G
page 1-184
states. The Auto in-service state is editable.
Laser Off Far
End Fail
Disabled
Enabled
application.
Packet mapping Proprietary Displays the mapping protocol.
Tx Actual High
Power (dBm)
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Tx Actual Low
Power (dBm)
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Rx Actual High
Power (dBm)
Rx optical power high
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Displays the highest measured received optical power of
Rx Actual Low
Power (dBm)
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
WAN facility parameters
Table 1-35 provides a list of the WAN facility parameters. Applicable to
40G MUX OCI circuit packs only.
Table 1-35
40GMUX WAN
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number,
and port number for the selected facility. Read-only
Primary State See Equipment and facility
primary states on
page 1-184
Indicates the primary state of the WAN facility,
which follows the ETH10G or FLEX(FC1200)
primary state. Read-only
secondary state can be a combination of one or
more states. Read-only
Frame Checksum 0 for ETH10G WAN
32 for FLEX(FC1200) WAN
Displays whether the GFP-F or GFP-T frame
checksum (4 Byte CRC-32) is appended to each
GFP-F or GFP-T frame. Read-only
"32" adds the frame checksum while "0" does not.
Note: To prevent packet loss, the Frame
Checksum must be kept at the default value of "0"
when using the "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7
(Preamble/MAC transparent)" packet mapping.
Packet Mapping GFP-F for ETH10G WAN
GFP-T for FLEX(FC1200)
WAN
Displays the WAN to OPU2 mapping format.
Read-only
Ethernet Preamble Keep
Discard
Sets whether the 8 byte Ethernet MAC preamble is
kept or discarded during GFP-F mapping.
Applicable to ETH10G WAN only. This parameter
is determined by the ETH10G packet mapping as
follows:
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC
transparent)" = Keep
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered
Set/MAC transparent)" = Keep
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)"
= Discard
Read-only
FCS Errored
Frames
For ETH10G WAN: Keep
(default), Discard
For FLEX(FC1200) WAN:
Keep
Sets whether the LAN FCS errored frames are kept
or discarded at the client ingress. (Note 2)
GFP RFI Enabled Controls the GFP remote failure indication (RFI)
client management frame (CMF) transmission.
When enabled, it allows GFP RFI CMF
transmission upon WAN link down. Read-only
Round trip delay
Status
Disable Controls the support (sending of CMFs) of round
trip delay calculation.
Read-only
Conditioning type GFP CMF Controls the type of conditioning on the WAN port.
WAN conditioning is triggered by local client
failures on the Ethernet port.
Read-only
User Payload
Indicator
Transmitted (In
HEX)
00 to FF
(Note 1)
Sets the GFP-F or GFP-T User Payload Identifier
used for Client Data Frames created in the WAN
layer during the GFP-F or GFP-T mapping. This
value is not monitored or alarmed and editing of
this parameter is only provided to potentially
improve interoperability with other equipment.
Transparent
Ordered Sets
G7041CMF (default)
LEGACYCMF
G7041CDF
Sets whether legacy client management frame
(LEGACYCMF) or G7041CMF is used.
For the "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered
Set/MAC transparent)" mapping, the only option is
G7041CDF.
Note 1: This value can only be provisioned (via the WAN facility) for the proprietary "10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC transparent)" ETH10G packet mapping.
Note 2: When the "FCS Errored Frames" WAN facility parameter is set to "Discard", FCS errored
frames (either GFP or MAC FCS errors) are not discarded at the client egress of the 40G MUX OCI
circuit packs. The only location FCS errored frames are discarded is at the ETH10G client Rx of the 40G
MUX OCI circuit packs. Additionally, the discarded frames are added to the DFR-E PM count and the
Ethernet In Frames Discarded: Total OM count, which do not normally include FCS errored frames.
40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-36 provides a list of the 40G MUX OCI OTM2 facility parameters.
Table 1-36
Parameter Options/ranges Description
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
port number for the selected facility.
page 1-184
IS and OOS are selectable.
The AINS state is editable for the OTM2 client facility.
For more information, see Facilities that support
automatic in-service (AINS) on page 1-186.
The Maintenance state is editable for the OTM2 client
facility. For more information, see Table 1-32 on
page 1-187.
Conditioning Type OPU_AIS (default)
ODU_AIS
Controls the type of conditioning on the OTM mapping
layer facility of a non-OTM client port. OTM mapping
layer facility conditioning is triggered by local client
failures on the non-OTM client port.
Applicable only to the OTM2 mapping layer facility of a
non-OTM2 client facility on the 40G MUX OCI
(NTK525CFE5 variant).
ODU_AIS conditioning is required when interfacing
with an OTN switch (such as the current 6500 OTN
switch) which uses only ODU_AIS as a switch criteria
(and not OPU_AIS).
Rate 10.7G
11.05G
11.09G
Displays the facility rate. 10.7G only for 40G XCIF
OTM2 facility.
Tx Actual Power
(dBm) (Note 1)
Tx optical power
not present)
Displays the measured line transmit optical power.
Read-only
Performance Monitoring application does not
display "OOR" when out of range; the lowest reading
is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault Management - Performance
Tx FEC Format
(Note 1)
Off
RS8 (ITU-T G.709
RS-8)
Sets the transmit Tx FEC format setting.
RS8 is the OTU FEC mode applied to achieve greater
margin on a given link.
Off state allows users to test the product for OTN
compliancy.
The OTM2 Tx FEC Format parameter cannot be
edited unless the facility is OOS.
Laser Off Far End
Fail (Note 1)
Disabled
Enabled
Sets the Laser Off Far End Fail status. Determines
type of signal conditioning towards subtending
equipment. When Enabled, client transmitter laser is
shutoff when line faults or head-end client faults are
detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is sent to
Rx Actual Power
(dBm) (Note 1)
Rx optical power
not present)
Displays the measured line receive optical power.
Read-only.
The value may not be accurate if it is outside the
normal operating range.
Rx FEC Format
(Note 1)
Off
RS8 (ITU-T G.709
RS-8)
Select the receive Rx FEC format setting.
RS8 is the OTU FEC mode applied to achieve greater
margin on a given link.
Off state allows users to test the product for OTN
compliancy.
The OTM2 Rx FEC Format parameter cannot be
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (dBQ)
-1.00 to +1.00 dBQ
(default 0)
Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
alarm (applicable only when FEC is On). Can be
provisioned in 0.01 steps. 0 dBQ equates to 1x10^-15
post FEC errors.
This parameter cannot be edited unless the facility is
OOS.
OTU Signal Degrade
Threshold (Note 1)
1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold (applicable only
when Rx FEC Mode is Off). Read-only.
Port Mode (Note 1) SONET (default for
SONET NE mode)
SDH (default for SDH
NE mode)
Select the mode of the port. Determines if SONET or
SDH terminology is used and whether bit (SONET) or
block (SDH) errors are used for performance
monitoring.
You cannot edit the port mode. To change the port
mode you must delete the OTM2 facility and then
re-add it with the correct port mode.
OPU2 + 7 Reserved
Bytes
Yes (default)
No
Sets whether 7 unused bytes of the OPU2 overhead
are used for payload.
This value can only be changed by deleting the
associated ETH10G facility and re-adding it using a
different Packet Mapping. Read-Only.
Payload Type
Expected (In HEX)
00 to FF
(Note 2)
OPU Payload Type byte expected in the off-ramp
direction for an OTM2 facility associated with an
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility.
Note: If the expected and the received do not match,
an OPU PT Byte mismatch alarm is raised.
Payload Type
Transmitted (In HEX)
00 to FF
(Note 2)
OPU Payload Type byte transmitted in the on-ramp
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility.
Delay Measurement Enabled (default)
Disabled
Enables or disables automatic delay measurement.
One Way Latency
(s)
numeric value
Unknown
Displays the value of the last one way delay
measurement in microseconds.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Note 1: In 40G MUX OCI circuit packs, this field is only visible for the OTM2 client facility.
Note 2: You can provision this value only for ETH10G facilities with packet mappings of "10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)", "11.05G - OPU1e (PCS transparent)", or "11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS transparent)". Achieved via the OTM2 facility associated with the client ETH10G facility for
the 40G MUX OCI circuit pack.
40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-37 provides a list of the 40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters.
Table 1-37
40G XCIF OTM2 facility parameters
page 1-184
Displays the facility operational state. Read-only
Rate 10.7G Displays the facility rate.
Payload Type
Expected (In HEX)
00 to FF OPU Payload Type byte expected in the off-ramp
OC192/STM64 client facility.
Payload Type
00 to FF OPU Payload Type byte transmitted in the on-ramp
OC192/STM64 client facility.
SONET NE mode)
NE mode)
Select the mode of the port. Determines if SONET or
SDH terminology is used and whether bit (SONET) or
block (SDH) errors are used for performance
monitoring.
OSIC OTM2 facility parameters
Table 1-38 provides a list of the OSIC OTM2 facility parameters.
Table 1-38
and port number for the selected OTM2 facility.
Read-only.
page 1-184
Sets the primary state of the OTM2 facility.
Optical System
Identifier
Up to 8 alphanumeric
characters (inclusive)
The identifier can include
any combination of upper
and lower case letters,
numbers, and special
characters.
Sets the optical system identifier used by other
applications for network topology building blocks to
build an optical network model including DWDM
transmit/receive elements.
Setting the optical system identifier overrides the
default setting provisioned in the Node Information
application that is used when OTM2 facilities are
auto-provisioned.
Tx Path Identifier 1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier, which allows two
different transmitters with identical wavelengths in
the same network element to be identified uniquely
in an optical system.
Setting the transmit path identifier overrides the
default setting provisioned in the Node Information
application that is used when OTM2 facilities are
auto-provisioned.
Provisioned Tx Power
(dBm)
-7.0 to 3.0 (default -7.0) Sets the required line transmit optical power
(provision power with 0.1 incremental range).
Tx Actual Power (dBm) Tx optical power
(-6.5 to 3.5)
not present) (default)
OOR-LO (if value below
minimum limit)
OOR-HO (if value
above maximum limit)
Displays the measured transmit optical power.
Read-only.
When the outgoing transmit optical power level for
the monitored port is out of range, the Tx Actual
Power parameter displays "OOR". The
corresponding OPT-OCH/OCH-OPT value in the
Site Manager Performance Monitoring application
does not display "OOR" when out of range; the
lowest reading is -45 dBm. The value may not be
accurate if it is outside the normal operating range.
Rx Actual Power (dBm) Rx optical power
-7.0 to 3.0
not present) (default)
OOR-LO (if value below
minimum limit)
OOR-HO (if value
above maximum limit)
Displays the measured receive optical power.
Read-only.
When the incoming receive optical power level for
the monitored port is out of range, the Rx Actual
corresponding OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR value in the
lowest reading is -45 dBm. The value may not be
accurate if it is outside the normal operating range.
Tx Wavelength (nm) 1528.77 to 1565.09
(default 0.00)
Sets the OTM2 transmit wavelength at 50 GHz
spacing.
Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility
is OOS.
Note: Tx Wavelength must be provisioned to a
non-default value for the OSIC circuit pack to be
able to query repeaters.
Tx SBS Dither On (default), Off Sets the transmit Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
(SBS) dither setting. If On, a dither frequency
applied to transmitter to compensate for the
non-linear effect of Stimulated Brillouin Scattering.
Note: Tx SBS Dither must be provisioned On for
the OSIC circuit pack to be able to query repeaters.
Tx AM Format Idler (default), SC Idler Sets the Analog Maintenance (AM) format.
Note: Tx AM Format must be provisioned to
SC Idler for the OSIC circuit pack to query the
repeaters.
Line Rate 10.7G Displays the line rate. Read-only,
SONET NE mode)
NE mode)
Displays the port mode of the facility. Read-only.
Tx Sub-carrier
Frequency (kHz)
100.0 to 250.0
(default 150.0)
Sets the OSIC-specific OTM2 facility Tx
sub-carrier frequency.
Tx Modulation Depth
(%)
20 to 100 (default 50) Sets the peak-to-peak modulation depth target in
percent for the OSIC OTM2 Tx facility, and is used
as the target by the Tx control loop.
Tx ASK Baud Rate
(Baud)
333.33 (default)
1667
Sets the transmit amplitude shift keying modulation
baud rate or symbols per second rate, and is used
to setup the Tx control loop.
Note: This value changes in step with the
Encoding/Decoding Format parameter, depending
on the Repeater type selected for the repeatered
system.
Tx Message Length (bit) 1 to 64 (default 16) Sets the Tx message length in bits.
Note: Kept at default value for normal use, but
provisionable for future use.
Tx Encoding Format NRZ
3SB1 (default)
Sets the Tx and Rx modulation encoding format.
Rx Sub-carrier
Frequency (kHz)
4.0 to 63.0 (default 12.5) Sets the OSIC-specific OTM2 facility Rx
sub-carrier frequency.
Note: This value is for information only, and does
not provision a change in hardware or firmware in
this release. However, it is important as a record of
the repeated system that is intended to be queried
using the OSIC OTM2 facility.
Rx Message Length
(bit)
1 to 64 (default 28) Sets the Rx message length in bits.
Note: Kept at default value for normal use, but
provisionable for future use.
Rx ASK Baud Rate
(Baud)
16.67 (default)
83.33
Sets the receive amplitude shift keying modulation
baud rate or symbols per second rate, and is used
to setup the Rx decoder control loop.
Note: This value changes in step with the
Encoding/Decoding Format parameter, depending
on the Repeater type selected for the repeatered
system.
Repeater System Name 64-character string
(default null)
Sets the name of the repeater system associated
with the OSIC OTM2 facility, which is used to query
the repeatered system.
This Repeater System Name is used in the
Supervisory Channel drop-down list of the Site
Manager SC Query application.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same
as the Common Language Facility Identifier
(CLFI). The provisioned value appears in the
facility alarm report if the SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC
is equipped.
Table 1-39 provides a list of the OTM3 facility parameters. Note that not all
OTM3 facilities support all the parameters. See Table 1-40 on page 1-216 for
applicability.
Table 1-39
and port number for the selected facility.
Port number is 1 for 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD and 40G OCI circuit pack and 100 for 40G
MUX OCI and 40G XCIF circuit pack in this
release.
primary states on page 1-184
Secondary
State
See Facility secondary states on
page 1-185
The AINS state is editable for supported circuit
packs. For more information, see Facilities that
support automatic in-service (AINS) on page
1-186.
The Maintenance state is editable for supported
circuit packs. For more information, see Table 1-32
on page 1-187.
Optical
System
Identifier
Up to 8 alphanumeric characters
(inclusive)
The identifier can include any
combination of upper and lower
case letters, numbers, and special
characters.
Applicable only to 40G
UOCLD circuit pack.
Tx Path
Identifier
1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier which allows two
UOCLD circuit pack.
Tx Power
(dBm)
0 to -11 for 40G OCLD
-3 to -11 for
Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD
-14.0 to -4.0 for 40G UOCLD
Sets the required line transmit optical power
(provision power with 0.1 incremental range). Tx
power may auto-provision.
Tx Actual
Power (dBm)
Tx optical power
Unknown (if circuit pack not
present) (Note 2)
Displays the actual transmit optical output power.
Read-only.
Site Manager Performance Monitoring
application does not display "OOR" when out of
range; the lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
Management - Performance Monitoring,
UOCLD and 40/43G OCI circuit packs.
Rx Actual
Power (dBm)
(Note 3)
Rx optical power
present) (Note 2)
Displays the actual receive optical input power.
Read-only.
When the incoming receive optical power level for
corresponding OPR-OCH/OCH-OPR value in the
Site Manager Performance Monitoring
application does not display "OOR" when out of
range; the lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
Only applicable to 40G
UOCLD and 40/43G OCI circuit packs.
Rx Channel
Actual Power
(dBm) (Note 3)
Rx channel optical power
present) (Note 2)
Displays the actual client receive channel optical
input power. Read-only.
Applicable only to Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD circuit packs.
Tx Actual High
Power (dBm)
Tx optical power high value
Unknown (if CFP not present)
Displays the highest measured transmit optical
power of the CFP multiple optical channels.
Read-only.
Applicable only to 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Tx Actual Low
Power (dBm)
Tx optical power low value
Displays the lowest measured transmit optical
Read-only.
Rx Actual High
Power (dBm)
Rx optical power high value
Displays the highest measured received optical
Read-only.
Rx Actual Low
Power (dBm)
Rx optical power low value
Displays the lowest measured received optical
Read-only.
Laser Off Far
End Fail
Disabled
Enabled
equipment. When Enabled, client transmitter laser
is shutoff when line faults or head-end client faults
are detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is sent to
Only applicable to the 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP
OCI circuit pack.
Rx FEC
Format
PFEC for 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-selective
40G OCLD/40G UOCLD
Off or RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8)
(default) for 40/43G OCI or 40G+
CFP OCI
Displays the receive Rx FEC format setting.
Rx FEC format cannot be edited unless the OTM3
client facility on 40/43G OCI or 40G+ CFP OCI is
OOS.
Tx FEC
Format
PFEC for 40G
40G OCLD/40G UOCLD
Off or RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8)
(default) for 40/43G OCI or 40G+
CFP OCI
Displays the transmit Tx FEC format setting.
Tx FEC format cannot be edited unless the OTM3
client facility on 40/43G OCI or 40G+ CFP OCI is
OOS.
Tx Wavelength
(nm)
1527.60 (0) to 1565.50 (89)
at 50GHz spacing for C-Band
40G OCLD
1568.77 to 1608.76 at 50GHz
spacing for L-Band 40G OCLD
1528.77 (93) to 1566.72 (92) at
50GHz spacing for
Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD
1527.99 (0) to 1565.50 (89) at
50GHz spacing for 40G UOCLD
Displays the OTM3 transmit wavelength in nm. The
number in brackets is the channel ID. Tx
wavelength may auto-provision.
Tx Wavelength cannot be edited unless the facility
is OOS.
Wavelength can be re-provisioned to zero when
the OTM3 facility is OOS, without deleting the
facility.
Note: 40G OCLD, Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD, or 40G UOCLD connected together must be
set to the same wavelength on both ends.
Otherwise, a loss of clock alarm will be raised.
Tuning Mode Performance-Optimized (default)
Accelerated
Sets the wavelength tuning mode.
Performance-Optimized tuning mode includes a
self-calibration test, which optimizes the
performance, whereas the Accelerated tuning
mode does not. Accelerated tuning time is ~30
seconds. Performance-Optimized tuning time is
~130 seconds.
Performance-Optimized (formerly called Normal)
tuning mode is the tuning mode that is supported in
all releases.
After a circuit pack cold restart, tuning is always
done as Performance-Optimized, regardless of the
tuning mode setting. All subsequent tuning is done
based on the tuning mode setting.
Pre-FEC
Signal Fail
Threshold
(dBQ)
-1.00 to +1.00 dBQ (default 0) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
provisioned in 0.01 steps.
This parameter cannot be edited unless the facility
is OOS.
UOCLD and 40/43G OCI, and 40G+ CFP OCI
circuit packs.
Pre-FEC
Signal
Degrade
Threshold
(dBQ)
-1.00 to +3.50 dBQ (default 0.5)
for 40G
40G OCLD/40G UOCLD
-1.00 to +2.00 dBQ (default 0.5)
for 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP
OCI
Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Can be provisioned in 0.01 steps. Applicable only
to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G
OCLD/40G UOCLD, 40/43G OCI, and 40G+ CFP
OCI circuit packs.
Pre-FEC
Signal Fail
Threshold
(BER)
numeric value Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Signal Fail alarm (applicable only when FEC is On).
Read-only
UOCLD, 40/43G OCI, and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs.
Pre-FEC
Signal
Degrade
Threshold
(BER)
Signal Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC
is On). Read-only
UOCLD, 40/43G OCI, and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit
packs.
Rate 44.5G
43G018
Displays the rate. Read-only
The 43G018 rate is only applicable to the 40/43G
OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit pack.
Port Mode SONET (default for SONET NE
mode)
SDH (default for SDH NE mode)
Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or
SDH). Read-only
OTU Signal
Degrade
Threshold
1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold (applicable
only when Rx FEC Format is Off). Read-only
Only applicable to the 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP
OCI circuit packs.
Total Rx Link
Dispersion
-50,000 to +50,000 ps/nm Display the total link dispersion in the receive
direction. Read-only
Supported
Mean DGD
Supported mean DGD Displays the maximum value of the mean DGD of
any link for which modem performance can be
guaranteed in ps. Read-only
Estimated
Unidirectional
Latency (s)
numeric value Displays the estimated unidirectional latency in s.
Estimated unidirectional latency includes fiber
latency and circuit pack latency. Circuit pack
latency is from the backplane to the line interface
port.
Estimated
Instance of
DGD (Note 1)
Estimated instantaneous of DGD
measurement
Unknown (Note 2)
Displays an estimate of the present value of the
differential group delay (DGD) that results from
polarization mode dispersion (PMD) present in the
link at the signal wavelength in ps. The maximum
instance of DGD observed over life is 3 times the
mean DGD of the link. Read-only
Estimated
Fiber Length
(km)
Estimated fiber length
Unknown (if no fiber is connected
to the port)
(Note 2)
Displays an estimate of the fiber length calculated
based on the round trip delay. Read-only
Reach
Specification
(km)
Reach specification in numeric
value
Displays the reach specification retrieved from a
40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD circuit pack. Read-only
Echoed Trace
Rx
TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the echoed trace received from the
far-end transmitter. Read-only
Trace Tx TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the transmitted trace used to determine if
the Tx/Rx fiber pairs are connected correctly.
Read-only.
Associated Far
End Rx ID
TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the associated far end Rx ID. Read-only.
Sub-Carrier
Spacing
WIDE20 (default), WIDE25,
MINSPACE20 for NTK539XA
WIDE20, WIDE25 (default),
WIDE50, MINSPACE20 for
NTK539XE
Sets the sub-carrier spacing.
Only applicable to 40G UOCLD circuit pack.
ODU
Monitoring
No
Yes
Indicates whether the OTM3 facility monitors the
ODU/OPU layers. When enabled, ODU/OPU layer
alarms are monitored and ODU layer PM counts
are monitored.
Customer
Defined
Facility
Identifier
string of up to 64 characters Used to identify a provisioned facility. It is the same
as the Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
The provisioned value appears in the facility alarm
report if the SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is
equipped.
Delay
Measurement
Enabled
Disabled
Default is disabled for 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CF
variant) and enabled for 40G+ CFP OCI
(NTK529SJ). Cannot enable OTM3 DM on 40G
MUX OCI (NTK525CF variant) if OTM3 GCC1 is
provisioned, and vice versa.
One Way
Latency (s)
numeric value
Unknown
measurement in microseconds.
Fast Receiver
Recovery
Disabled (default)
Enabled
Indicates whether STORM is enabled or disabled.
Editable in the STORM application. Only applicable
to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD
circuit packs.
Network
Configuration
Matched Chromatic Dispersion
(default)
Diverse Chromatic Dispersion
Indicates the network configuration type. Editable
in the STORM application. Only applicable to 40G
OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit
packs.
Link
Dispersion
Path 1
AUTO or numeric value Indicates the link dispersion for path 1. Displays
AUTO when Network Configuration is Matched
Chromatic Dispersion. Only applicable to 40G
packs.
Link
Dispersion
Path 2
packs.
Note 1: For the Mean DGD specification for the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G
UOCLD circuit packs, refer to the Technical Specifications section in Part 3 of Planning, NTRN10CF.
Note 2: The value Unknown will be displayed also when the Circuit Pack Operational Capacity
Exceeded alarm is present. If this alarm is present, the provisioning of the OTM3 facility, except for the
primary state, will not be sent to the 40G OCLD/Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD/40G UOCLD circuit
pack.
Note 3: The Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One
for the total input power, that is, the total of all the wavelengths plus the amplifier noise (ASE), reported
as the Rx Actual Power. And one for the channel input power (the channel corresponds to the
wavelength the transmitter is tuned to), reported as the Rx Channel Actual Power. When the
Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD is used in colored Photonic systems, the two Rx interface detectors
will see similar power levels and as such the Rx Actual Power and Rx Channel Actual Power values will
have similar values.
Table 1-40
OTM3 facility parameter applicability
Equipment type 40GMUX 40GOCI 40GOCI 40GOCLD/40GUOCLD
Facility Mux layer Mapping layer Client Line
Unit X X X X
Primary State X X X X
Secondary State X X X X
Optical System Identifier X
Tx Path Identifier X
Tx Power (dBm) X
Tx Actual Power (dBm) X (Note 6) X
Rx Actual Power (dBm) X (Note 6) X
Rx Channel Actual Power
(dBm)
X (Note 3)
Tx Actual High Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Tx Actual Low Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Rx Actual High Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Rx Actual Low Power (dBm) X (Note 5)
Laser Off Far End Fail X
Rx FEC Format X X
Tx FEC Format X X
Tx Wavelength (nm) X
Tuning Mode X
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (dBQ)
X X
Threshold (dBQ)
X X
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (BER)
X X
Threshold (BER)
X X
Rate X X X X
Port Mode X X X X
OTU Signal Degrade
Threshold
X
Total Rx Link Dispersion X
Supported Mean DGD X
Round Trip Delay X
Estimated Instance of DGD X
Estimated Fiber Length (km) X
Reach Specification (km) X
Echoed Trace Rx X
Trace Tx X
Associated Far End Rx ID X
Sub-Carrier Spacing X (Note 2)
ODU Monitoring X
Customer Defined Facility
Identifier
X X X
Delay Measurement X (Note 7) X (Note 7)
One Way Latency (s) X (Note 7) X (Note 7)
Fast Receiver Recovery X (Note 4)
Network Configuration X (Note 4)
Link Dispersion Path 1 X (Note 4)
Link Dispersion Path 2 X (Note 4)
Note 1: For 40G XCIF, the only applicable parameters are Unit, Primary state, Secondary state, Rate,
and Port mode.
Note 2: Only applicable to 40G UOCLD.
Note 3: Only applicable to the Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD.
Note 4: Only applicable to 40G OCLD/Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD.
Note 5: Only applicable to 40G+ CFP OCI.
Note 6: Only applicable to 40/43G OCI.
Note 7: Supported on the OTM3 Mux layer on the 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CF variant) and the OTM3
mapping layer on the 40G+ CFP OCI (NTK529SJ) only.
FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX (NTK525CFE5 variant)
Table 1-41
FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX
Unit FLEX-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
primary states on
page 1-184
Displays the facility operational state. The Auto
in-service state is editable.
Protocol FC800
FC1200
Displays the FLEX facility protocol.
Conditioning Type FC800: NOS (default) or
LOFEF
FC1200: LF (default) or
LOFEF
Determines type of signal conditioning towards
client faults are detected. When set to LOFEF,
client transmitter laser is shut off. When set to NOS
for FC800, NOS is sent to subtending equipment.
When set to LF for FC1200, LF is sent to subtending
equipment.
Holdoff Timer 0, 100 (default), 200, ... 1000
in 100 increments
Sets the length of time (in ms) before Tx
conditioning is applied to the client.
Before the holdoff timer expires, FC800/FC1200
idles are injected.
Packet Mapping FC800: ENHCBR: 10.7G -
OPU2 (Enhanced CBR)
FC1200: TCODEGFPT:
11.09G - OPU2e (GFP-T
Transcoded)
Displays the mapping type.
Tx Actual Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Tx actual power in dBm.
Tx Minimum Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Tx minimum power in dBm.
Tx Maximum
Power (dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Tx maximum power in dBm.
Rx Actual Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Rx actual power in dBm.
Rx Minimum Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Rx minimum power in dBm.
Rx Maximum
Power (dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Rx maximum power in dBm.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
report if the SP2, SPAP, or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is
equipped.
FLEX facility parameters for 40G MUX
TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters
Table 1-42
Unit TCMTTP-shelf-slot-port-
[ODUk]P[trib]T[level]
TCMCTP-shelf-slot-port-
Displays the AID for the selected facility, where
TCM level = 1 to 6
ODUk= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
trib =1 for an ODUk within an ODUk, 1 to 2 for an ODU0
within an ODU1, 1 to 4 for an ODU1 within an ODU2, 1 to
8 for an ODU0 within an ODU2
states.
The Auto in-service state and the Maintenance state are
editable and independent of the parent or sibling AINS
and MT state.
Supporting TP OTMn-shelf-slot-port Displays the supporting TP. Read-only
TCM mode Monitor
Terminated
Sets the mode of the TCM. TCMTTP is always
Terminated. TCMCTP can be Monitor or Terminated.
Owner USER Displays the entity which created the facility. Read-only
Delay
Measurement
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Applicable to TTP or terminated-CTP only.
Cannot enable DM on port 100 TCMCTP of 40G MUX
OCI (NTK525CF variant) if OTM3 GCC1 is provisioned,
and vice versa.
One Way
Latency (s)
numeric value
Unknown
measurement in microseconds. Applicable to TTP or
terminated-CTP only.
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
Auto In-Service
Time Left
(hh-mm)
hh-mm Displays the time left for the auto in-service timer.
Read-only
Signal Degrade
Threshold
1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold. Read-only
OPTMON facility parameters
Table 1-43
OPTMON facility parameters
Unit OPTMON-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number,
Sets the primary state of the facility. IS and OOS
are selectable.
Secondary
State
See Facility secondary states on
page 1-185
Sets the facility operational state.
The Auto in-service state is editable.
The Maintenance state is editable.
LOS Threshold
(dBm)
N/A Not applicable to the SLIC10/SLIC10 Flex circuit
pack.
IDLER facility parameters
Table 1-44
Unit IDLER-shelf-slot-
port-ch
Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number,
port number, and channel number for the selected
facility.
page 1-184
Sets the primary state of the facility. IS and OOS
are selectable.
Sets the facility operational state.
The Auto in-service state is editable.
Wavelength for the first
laser in the IDLER
facility (nm)
wavelength on 50 GHz
ITU grid (default 0)
Sets the wavelength for the channel.
Wavelength for the
second laser in the
IDLER facility (nm)
wavelength on 50 GHz
ITU grid (default 0)
Sets the wavelength for the channel.
Frequency offset for the
first laser in the IDLER
facility (GHz)
-12.5 Displays the frequency offset. Read only
Frequency offset for the
second laser in the
IDLER facility (GHz)
+12.5 Sets the frequency offset. Read only
Output power for the
first laser in the IDLER
facility (dBm)
-2.4 (default) to +6.0 Sets the target output power.
Output power for the
second laser in the
IDLER facility (dBm)
-2.4 (default) to +6.0 Sets the target output power.
SBS dither for the first
laser in the IDLER
facility
ON
OFF (default)
Enables or disables the SBS dither.
SBS dither for the
second laser in the
IDLER facility
ON
OFF (default)
Enables or disables the SBS dither.
Measured output power
for the first laser in the
IDLER facility (dBm)
numeric value Displays the power reading. Read-only
Measured output power
for the second laser in
the IDLER facility (dBm)
Minimum provisionable
power for the first laser
in the IDLER facility
(dBm)
Minimum provisionable
power for the second
laser in the IDLER
facility (dBm)
Maximum provisionable
power for the first laser
in the IDLER facility
(dBm)
Maximum provisionable
power for the second
laser in the IDLER
facility (dBm)
ADJ facility parameters
Table 1-45 provides a list of the ADJ facility parameters.
Table 1-45
ADJ
Unit ADJ-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and port
number for the selected facility.
page 1-184
Displays the primary state of the facility. Read-only.
Adjacency Type TXRX Sets the type of the adjacency.
Status Unverified
Derived
Reliable
Unreliable
Displays current status of the adjacency facility.
Unverified - The far end address is user- provisioned
but not discovered or verified.
Derived - the system has derived the value of the
provisioned far end address based on provisioning of
other parameters in the system.
Note: Adjacencies with the Derived status cannot be
altered by the user.
Reliable - The actual far end address is detected and it
matches the provisioned far end address.
Unreliable - The actual far end address is detected and
it does not match the provisioned far end address or the
discovery validation has detected a mis-fibering.
Actual Far End
Address
string format Displays the actual far end address which is the detected
TID, shelf, slot, and port of the far end of the fiber.
Read-only
Actual Far End
Address Format
See Note 2 Displays the option that each field of the far end address
represents. Read-only
Expected Far End
Address (Note 1)
TID-shelf-slot-port Sets the provisioned far end address of the fiber
connection.
Expected Far End
Address Format
See Note 2 Sets the expected far end line receive and client receive
addresses format reported by the adjacency.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Note 1: The Expected Far End Address is controlled by the Expected Far End Address Format
selection. If the Expected Far End Address Format is set to NULL, then the Expected Far End
Address is disabled; otherwise, it is enabled.
Note 2: The Far End Address Format options are:
NULL
TID-SH-SL-PRT
TID-SH-SL-SBSL-PRT
Comms setting parameters
DCC/GCC support and parameters
Table 1-46 on page 1-228 provides information on GCC support on 40G
circuit packs, and Table 1-47 on page 1-228 provides a list of the Lower Layer
DCC/GCC parameters.
Lower Layer DCC/GCC parameters
The Lower Layer DCC/GCC option provides a single table which displays the
DCC/GCC parameters for any OCn/STMn/OTMn facilities which have a lower
layer DCC/GCC provisioned.
For more information on GCC support on the circuit packs, refer to GCC
support on circuit packs on page 1-228.
Use the Add button to provision new DCC/GCC circuits and the Delete button
to delete existing DCC/GCC circuits. The Edit button is only enabled for editing
the LAPD parameters. When adding a DCC/GCC circuit, consider the
following:
Each end of the DCC/GCC circuit must be provisioned with the same
options.
When adding a DCC circuit, the L2 Frame Size and L2 Side Role fields
only become available when the LAPD option is selected.
Once a new DCC/GCC circuit has been added, an IISIS or OSPF circuit
must be added for this port. See IISIS Circuit parameters on page 1-230
and OSPF Circuit parameters on page 1-234.
You must delete the IISIS or OSPF circuit for the DCC/GCC circuit before
deleting the DCC/GCC circuit.
For OTM2 ports, a GCC0 or GCC1 PPP circuit (with IP address of 0.0.0.0)
and an associated IISIS or OSPF circuit are automatically created when
the OTM2 facility is provisioned if the default auto GCC0 mode or GCC1
mode parameter is set to IISIS or OSPF in the System tab of the Node
Information application and if the Shelf IP has been provisioned on the NE.
For OTM3 ports (except for OTM3 ports on 40G OCI circuit packs), a
GCC0 or GCC1 PPP circuit (with IP address of 0.0.0.0) and an associated
IISIS or OSPF circuit are automatically created when the OTM3 facility is
provisioned if the default auto GCC0 mode or the GCC1 mode parameter
is set to IISIS or OSPF in the System tab of the Node Information
application and if the Shelf IP has been provisioned on the NE.
Adding or deleting a DCC/GCC entry with its Protocol parameter set to
PPP, automatically adds or deletes an associated PPP circuit with IP
address of 0.0.0.0.
DCC and associated ISIS or OSPF circuits are only supported for
OC192/STM64 facilities on the 40G XCIF circuit packs.
Table 1-46
GCC support on circuit packs
Circuit Packs GCC0 GCC1
40G OCLD or Wavelength-selective 40G OCLD (Note 1) X
40G OCI (Note 2) X X
40G MUX OCI (Note 3) X X
40G ULH OCLD (Note 1) X
40G XCIF (Note 4) X
Note 1: Supported on the OTM3 line facility (port 1).
Note 2: GCC1 supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 1). GCC0 supported on the OTM3
client facility (port 1) on the 40/43G OCI and 40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs.
Note 3: GCC1 supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 100) and GCC0 supported on the
OTM2 client facilities (ports 1 to 4). Cannot provision OTM3 GCC1 on 40G MUX OCI (NTK525CF
variant) if DM is enabled on port 100 OTM3 or TCMCTP, and vice versa.
Note 4: Supported on the OTM3 mapping layer facility (port 100).
Table 1-47
Parameter Options Description Addable/
Editable
Unit OCn/STMn/OTMn
ports
Displays all the provisioned OCn/STMn/OTMn ports
and their DCC/GCC settings
OCn/STMn/OTMn Ports are displayed in the
following format: OCn/STMn/OTMn-shelf- slot-port.
Yes
Carrier Section/RS, line/MS,
GCC0, GCC1
Selects the carrier for the Section/ DCC, line DCC
and GCC circuit, or GCC0 or GCC1
Yes
Operation
Carrier
Section/RS, line/MS,
GCC0, GCC1,
Disconnected
Displays the status of the DCC/GCC circuit. No
Protocol LAPD, NDP, PPP,
Transparent
Only PPP or NDP is supported for OTMn GCC ports
and LAPD and Transparent options are disabled.
For OC192/STM64 on 40G XCIF, select the LAPD
or PPP radio button to set the protocol of the DCC
circuit (PPP or LAPD).
Yes or No
depends
on facility
and carrier
IISIS parameters
Table 1-48 on page 1-230 provides a list of the IISIS Router parameters and
Table 1-49 on page 1-231 provides a list of the IISIS Circuit parameters.
IISIS Router parameters
The IISIS Router option has two tables.
The upper Router table displays information about the IISIS router. Use
the Add button to add an IISIS router (only one allowed). Use the Delete
button to delete the existing IISIS router.
The lower Redistribution table displays information about the redistribution
lists provisioned for the IISIS router. Use the Add button to add IISIS
redistribution list parameters. Use the Delete button to delete a
redistribution list.
Attention: When re-adding an IISIS router, you must perform a cold restart
of the shelf processor (SP) for the changes to be implemented. The cold
restart is not required if adding the IISIS router for the first time.
L2 Frame Size 512 to 1492 (default
1304)
Sets the LAPD frame size (only applicable to LAPD).
CAUTION
Each end of the DCC circuit must be provisioned
with the same LAPD frame size. Defaults on
different equipment types may be different.
Yes
L2 Side Role Automatic Displays the LAPD link mode (only applicable to
LAPD).
No
Operation L2
Side Role
Network, User,
Disconnected
Displays the availability of L2 side role when adding
a DCC/GCC circuit (only applicable to LAPD).
No
FCS Mode 16 bit (default), 32 bit Sets the frame check sequence (FCS) mode. Only
applicable to the PPP protocol when the carrier is
Section/RS or line/MS.
Yes
Network
Domain
MCN (default) Indicates the communications network domain. No
Editable
IISIS Circuit parameters
The IISIS Circuit option has a single table. Use the Add button to provision
new IISIS circuits and the Delete button to delete existing IISIS circuits. You
must create an IISIS circuit on each provisioned interface you want IISIS to
run on.
When provisioning both GCC0 and GCC1 with default IISIS metrics on a shelf,
Comms over GCC1 is preferred as opposed to GCC0.
Table 1-48
Editable
Router table
Router Level Level 1 Sets the IISIS router level. Level 2 not supported in this
release, option is always disabled.
No
L1 Priority 1 to 127
(default 64)
Sets the level 1 router priority. The L1 router assigned
the highest priority becomes the L1 designated router
for that LAN segment.
Yes
(default 64)
Not supported in this release, option is disabled.
No
Route
Summarization
On (default), Off Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On) are
redistributed.
Yes
Redistribution table
Route
Redistribution/
List
OSPF
Distribution,
Static Distribution
(default)
Sets the IISIS router distribution list entries for the
selected IISIS router.
Yes
IP Subnet Standard dot
notation
Sets the IP subnet address of the distribution list entry
for the selected IISIS router.
Yes
Subnet Mask Standard dot
notation
Sets the subnet mask of the distribution list entry for the
Yes
Metric 1 to 63 Sets the metric (cost) of the distribution list entry for the
Yes
Metric Type External (default),
Internal
Sets the metric type of the distribution list entry for the
Yes
Table 1-49
Parameters Options Description Addable/
Editable
Unit OCn/STMn/OTMn
ports
Displays the available ports for an IISIS circuit.
OCn/STMn/OTMn ports are displayed in the
following format: OCn/STMn/OTMn-shelf-slot-port
Only OCn/STMn/OTMn ports with lower layer
DCC/GCC0/GCC1 provisioned are available for
selection.
Yes
GCC0, GCC1
Displays the DCC channel used, section/RS,
line/MS, GCC used, GCC0 or GCC1 (options
available depend on circuit pack type and function).
Yes
Circuit
Default
Metric
1 to 63 Sets the circuit default metric used to calculate the
best route. Default as follows:
OCn/STMn/OTMn ports with line/MS
DCC/GCC0/GCC1 provisioned: 5
OCn/STMn ports with Section/RS DCC
provisioned: 6
Select a higher value for a slower circuit.
Yes
Level 2 Only On, Off (default) Sets the status of level 2 only routing on the IISIS
circuit.
Not supported in this release, On option is always
disabled.
No
3 Way
Handshake
On, Off (default) Sets the status of 3-way handshaking on the IISIS
circuit.
disabled.
No
OSPF parameters
Table 1-50 on page 1-233 provides a list of the OSPF Router parameters and
Table 1-51 on page 1-234 provides a list of the OSPF Circuit parameters.
OSPF Router parameters
The OSPF Router option has two tables.
The upper Router table displays information about the OSPF router. Use
the Add button to add an OSPF router. Use the Delete button to delete an
existing OSPF router.
lists provisioned for the OSPF router. Use the Add button to add OSPF
Neighbour
Protocols
Supported
Override
Off (default), IP, OSI,
IP and OSI
Select the override for the neighbour router protocols
(overrides what the router advertises).
Note 1: OSI is only valid if LAPD is selected.
Note 2: When provisioning an IISIS circuit on an
ILAN port, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
supported override parameter is set to Off.
optical DCC port connected to OSI managed
network elements (for example, Optical Metro 3000
and Optical Metro 4000), you must ensure that
neighbour protocol supported override parameter is
set to OSI.
optical DCC port connected to another 6500 network
element, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
Note 5: The IP and IP and OSI options are not
supported.
Yes
Editable
Table 1-50
Editable
Router
OSPF Router
Id
Standard dot
notation
Sets the router ID for the OSPF.
It is recommended that the SHELF address (if
provisioned) is used as the OSPF Router Id.
Yes
Link State External (default),
Router, Summary
Sets the type of link state announcement used.
This parameter is not used and can be left at the
default value (External).
Yes
Route
Summarization
ON (default), OFF Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On)
are redistributed.
Yes
Autonomous
System Border
Router
ON (default), OFF Sets the autonomous system border router (ASBR).
ASBR identifies whether an OSPF router can accept
input (route redistribution) from another autonomous
system such as IISIS, or static routes.
ATTENTION
It is recommended to keep the ASBR on its default
value (ON). If the ASBR is turned off, it will prevent
route redistribution into OSPF.
Yes
Redistribution
Route
Redistribution/
List
IISIS Distribution,
Static Distribution
(default)
Sets the origin of the route(s) to be redistributed. Yes
notation
Sets the IP subnet address for redistribution. Yes
notation
Sets the subnet mask for redistribution. Yes
Metric 1 to 65535 Sets the metric for redistribution. Yes
Internal
Sets the metric type for redistribution. Yes
OSPF Circuit parameters
The OSPF Circuit option has two tables:
The upper table displays information about the OSPF circuit. Use the Add
button to add an OSPF circuit. Use the Delete button to delete an existing
OSPF circuit.
The lower Area List table displays information about the area lists
provisioned for the OSPF circuit.
Area lists are not supported in this release and the table will always be
empty. The area list fields and the Enter and Delete buttons on the Add
OSPF Circuit Parameters dialog box are disabled.
Table 1-51
Editable
Unit OCn/STMn/OTMn
ports
Displays the OCn/STMn/OTMn ports available for
OSPF.
Yes
GCC0, GCC1
Sets the DCC/GCC on the OCn/STMn/OTMn port
for the OSPF circuit.
Only applicable to OCn/STMn/OTMn ports.
Yes
Network Area Standard dot notation Sets the area (defaults to backbone area of 0.0.0.0). Yes
Cost 1 to 65534
(default 10)
Sets the cost of the route (reflects speed of
interface). Defaults as follows:
GCC0/1: 75
section/RS DCC: 520
line/MS DCC: 174
Yes
Area Default
Cost
1 to 16777215
(default 1)
Sets the cost of the route to the next area.
Note: It is not supported in this release.
No
Dead Interval 1 to 65535
(default 40)
Sets the interval (in seconds) at which hello packets
must not be seen before neighbors declare the
router down.
Yes
Hello Interval 1 to 65535
(default 10)
Sets the interval (in seconds) between the hello
packets that the router sends on the interface.
Yes
Retransmit
Interval
1 to 3600 (default 5) Sets the interval (in seconds) required between
link-state advertisement retransmissions.
No
Transmit
Delay
1 to 3600 (default 1) Sets the estimated time (in seconds) it takes to
transmit a link state update packet over this
interface.
No
Priority 0 to 255 (default 1) Sets the router priority value used in multi-access
networks for the election of the designated router (0
indicates that router is not eligible to become
designated router).
Yes
Area Off (default), NSSA,
Stub
Sets whether the router is in a not so stubby area
(NSSA) or stub area. NSSA and Stub not supported
in this release.
Yes
Area Virtual
Link
Standard dot notation Sets the IP address of the OSPF router id
designated as a virtual interface.
No
Password
Authentication
On, Off (default) Sets whether password authentication is performed
on the OSPF circuit. If On is selected, the password
on the neighbor must match this password to form
an adjacency.
Yes
Circuit
Password
Character string
(1 to 8 characters)
Sets the password if password authentication is
selected. Characters can be any combination of
upper case, lower case, numbers, or special
characters.
Yes
Opaque Link
State
Advertisement
On (default), Off Sets whether opaque link state advertisement
performs on the OSPF circuit.
Yes
Passive OSPF
Circuit
On, Off (default) Determines whether OSPF adjacency loss should
be detected. If set to On, OSPF adjacency loss will
be ignored.
Yes
Area List
IP Subnet Standard dot notation Sets the IP subnet address of the OSPF area.
Not supported in this release, field is disabled.
No
Subnet Mask Standard dot notation Sets the subnet mask of the OSPF area.
No
Result Displays the OPSF areas entered in the area list. Up
to 10 OSPF area ranges can be configured.
No
Editable
Ring APS configuration editor parameters
Table 1-52 on page 1-236 details the parameters associated with the Ring
APS configuration editor application for BLSR/MS-SPRing rings for
OC-192/STM-64 facilities on 40G XCIF circuit packs.
Table 1-52
Ring APS configuration editor parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs
Configuration file
name
A character string Displays the name of the configuration file associated with the
currently displayed ring.
Ring name Up to 40 characters Sets the ring name. The name cannot include the backslash (\)
and double quote () characters.
Ring type 2 Fiber Sets the ring type.
Note: Only 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing is supported on
40G XCIF circuit packs.
View ordered as
provisioned data
on
All the nodes in the
ring
Sets the order in which the nodes of the selected ring appear in
the Nodes area. The connections are shown from the point of
view of the node selected from the drop-down list, with the
selected node at the top of the Nodes area. If a node does not
have a node identifier, only the APS ID appears in the
drop-down list.
The second node is the node connected to the east facility. If
the facility AIDs is not specified for the first node, then the
second node can be any of the two nodes connected to the first
node (a warning message appears at the bottom of the window
indicating that the list of nodes may not correspond to the order
that will be used at provisioning time). Both AIDs must be
specified before the node can be considered for provisioning.
Nodes Displays a selectable graphical representation of the nodes
configured in the ring with their facility interconnections. The
nodes in the Nodes area are organized as set using the View
ordered as provisioned data on drop-down list.
The grey blocks in the center column of the Nodes area
represent the nodes in the ring. Each rectangular block includes
the node type, node name, and automatic protection switch
identifier (APS ID) associated with the protection group on the
node.
The facility identifiers for the facilities used by each node for ring
connectivity are depicted by white blocks on either side of node
and include the port orientation and facility identifier. The first
node in the Nodes area is connected to the last node.
Node type DX
HDX
OM3500
6100
6500
Unknown
Sets the node type.
Node Up to 20
alphanumeric
characters
Sets the node name.
APS ID 0 to 15 for
16-node rings
0 to 23 for
24-node rings
Sets the APS identifier.
24-node 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing configurations are
supported only on the following circuit packs:
1xOC-192/STM-64 DWDM AM1/AM2, (2+8)xOC-n/STM-n
(OC-192/STM-64 line rate only), and 40G XCIF.
24-node 4-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing/HERS configurations are
supported only at the OC-192/STM-64 line rate, and only on the
following circuit packs: 1xOC-192/STM-64 DWDM AM1/AM2
and (2+8)xOC-n/STM-n.
East facility
linked to:
Alphanumeric
string
Sets the East facility (BLSR/MS-SPRing working member of a
2-fiber group) linked to the next node (appears on right side of
node in Node area).
When there is no node in the configuration, the linked to: field
shows Next node.
Note: Applicable when the Ring type selected is 2 Fiber.
West facility
linked to:
Alphanumeric
string
Sets the West facility (BLSR/MS-SPRing protection member of
a 2-fiber group) linked to the previous node (appears on left
side of node in Node area).
When there is no node in the configuration, the linked to: field
shows Previous node.
Note: Applicable when the Ring type selected is 2 Fiber.
Ring APS configuration editor parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs
Transponder connections parameters
The following tables detail the 40G and 40G ULH circuit pack parameters
associated with the Transponder Connections Site Manager application.
Table 1-53
Transponder Connections application parameters for 40G and 40G ULH circuit packs
Parameter Description
Connection ID The connection identifier string is used to identify a provisioned transponder
connection. The transponder connection ID can contain a maximum of 64
characters, with the exception of the \, , and % characters.
This release only supports a connection identifier for:
ODU2 connections on 40G MUX OCI circuit packs
ODU3 connections on 40G OCLD, Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD,
40G UOCLD, 40G OCI, 40G+ CFP OCI, 40/43G OCI, and 40G MUX OCI
circuit packs
Rate Select the rate as ODU3 for all 40G and 40G ULH circuit packs. (This is the
only connection rate supported on 40G and 40G ULH circuit packs when
manually adding connections.)
Type Select the connection type as 2WAY (Bidirectional) for all 40G and 40G ULH
circuit packs. (This is the only connection type supported on 40G and 40G ULH
circuit packs.)
From and To panels Select the Equipment and Facility for the From and To endpoints as
required. Refer to Table 1-54 on page 1-239 for details.
Table 1-54
Equipment and facility parameters for transponder connections for 40G and 40G ULH circuit
packs
Rate Equipment Facility/channel Parameter values
40G OCLD (C-Band and L-Band) and Wavelength-Selective 40G OCLD circuit packs
ODU3 40GOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1 to 2 for 2-slot Optical
Type 2 shelf (40G OCLD C-Band
and L-Band only)
slot# = 1 to 7 for 7-slot shelf
(except in slots 7 and 8 of the
14-slot packet-optical shelf)
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and
31-38 for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
40G UOCLD circuit packs
ODU3 40GUOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5 for 7-slot shelf
(MOTRs and non-mixed regens)
slot# = 2, 3, 5, 9, 10, 11, 13 for
14-slot shelf (MOTRs and
non-mixed regens)
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14, 15,
17, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27, 31, 33, 34,
35, 37 for 32-slot shelf (MOTRs
and non-mixed regens)
port# = 1
40G OCI and 40/43G OCI circuit packs
ODU3 40GOCI-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and
port# = 1
40G+ CFP OCI circuit packs
ODU3 PCFP-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
Type 2 shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and
port# = 1
40G MUX OCI circuit packs
ODU3 40GMUX-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
Type 2 shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and
port# = 100
packs
40G XCIF circuit packs
ODU3 40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OTM3-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
14-slot shelf when mated with
40G OCLD or
slot# = 1, 6, 9, and 14 for 14-slot
shelf when mated with
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
for 32-slot shelf when mated with
40G OCLD or
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33 and
38 for 32-slot shelf when mated
with 40G UOCLD
port# = 100
packs
Path connections parameters
The following tables detail the 40G XCIF circuit pack parameters associated
with the Path Connections Site Manager application.
Table 1-55
Path Connections application parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs
Selectable parameters
Connection ID Enter the connection identifier string used to identify a provisioned path
connection. The path connection ID can contain a maximum of 64 characters,
with the exception of the \, , and % characters.
Note: Support for 64 characters connection IDs is only supported from ONM
Release 6.0 onwards.
Rate Select the rate as defined as follows:
SONET: STS1, STS3c, STS12c, STS24c, STS48c, or STS192c.
SDH: VC3, VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-8c, VC4-16c, or VC4-64c
Type Select the type as defined as follows:
1WAY (Unidirectional)
1WAYPR (Unidirectional Path Ring)
2WAYPR (Bidirectional Path Ring)
2WAYDPR (Dual Bidirectional Path Ring)
Refer to Table 1-56 on page 1-243.
From and To panels Select the Equipment and Facility for the From or To panels as required. Refer
to Table 1-57 on page 1-244.
BLSR/MSSPRing
Endpoints
Select the starting endpoint (End NE A) and finishing endpoint (End NE Z) of the
path for BLSR/MS-SPRing connections.
Note: Only applicable to OC-192/STM-64 ports.
Switch Mate Select the Switch Mate when creating 1WAYPR, 2WAYPR, or 2WAYDPR
connections. Refer to Table 1-56 on page 1-243.
Destination Mate Select the Destination Mate when making 2WAYDPR connections. Refer to
The 2WAYDPR connection type is used for interconnecting UPSR/SNCP traffic.
The From and Switch Mate parameters apply to one UPSR/SNCP endpoint, and
the To and Destination Mate parameters apply to the other UPSR/SNCP
endpoint(s).
AU3 and/or AU4
mapping radio
buttons
For VC3 connection rates on SDH ports, you must select the type of connection
mapping as AU3 or AU4 to determine the High Order container.
Timeslot numbers
(STS/VC)
Each signal type requires that you assign a timeslot number to each parameter in
that signal type. You must enter a time slot number for the STS/VC.
Site Manager automatically populates the available STS/VC parameter fields
when you select the Rate and Type.
Table 1-56
Path connection types for 40G XCIF circuit packssupported From, To, Switch Mate, and
Destination Mate instances
Path connection type From, Switch Mate To, Destination Mate
1WAY OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
1WAYPR OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
2WAY OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
2WAYPR OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
2WAYDPR OC192/STM64 OC192/STM64
Path Connections application parameters for 40G XCIF circuit packs
Table 1-57
Equipment and facility parameters for path connections for 40G XCIF circuit packs
40G XCIF circuit packs (Note)
STS1/VC3 40GXCIF-shelf#
-slot#
OC192-shelf#-slot#-port#-sts#
STM64-shelf#-slot#-port#-J#-K#
shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
40G OCLD or
Wavelength-Selective
40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
and 38 for 32-slot shelf when
mated with 40G UOCLD
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1 to 192
J# (AU4) = 1 to 64
K# (TUG-3) = 1 to 3
STS3c/VC4 40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OC192-shelf#-slot#-port#-sts#
STM64-shelf#-slot#-port#-J#
shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 4, 7, 10, ..., 190
J# (AU4) = 1 to 64
STS12c/
VC4-4c
40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OC192-shelf#-slot#-port#-sts#
shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 13, 25, 37, ... ,181
J# (AU4) = 1, 5, 9, 13, ..., 61
STS24c/
VC4-8c
shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 25, 49, 73, ..., 169
J# (AU4) = 1, 9, 17, 25, ..., 57
STS48c/
VC4-16c
shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
sts# = 1, 49, 97, 145
J# (AU4) = 1, 17, 33, 49
STS192c/
VC4-64c
40GXCIF-shelf#-slot# OC192-shelf#-slot#-port#
STM64-shelf#-slot#-port#
shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, and 14 for
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
40G UOCLD
slot# = 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 14, 16, 18,
22, 24, 26, 28, 32, 34, 36, and 38
40G OCLD or
40G OCLD
slot# = 1, 6, 13, 18, 21, 26, 33
port# = 1 to 4
Note: For 2-Fiber BLSR/MS-SPRing, you can provision channels (STS#/J#) 1 to 96 (SONET) or 1 to 32
(SDH) for OC-192/STM-64 facilities only as working channels. Channels 97 to 192 (SONET) or 33 to 64
(SDH) for OC-192/STM-64 facilities are protection channels or can be used to carry extra traffic.
2-1
100G circuit packs 2-
This chapter provides an overview of the 6500 Packet-Optical Platform (6500)
100G circuit packs and their associated procedures. See Table 2-1 on
page 2-1 for different circuit packs covered in this chapter.
100G OCLD (NTK539TxE5), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Bx),
and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux) circuit packs
Overview
The eDC100G OCLD 1xOTU4 DWDM circuit pack (also referred to as
100G OCLD circuit pack), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD 1xOTU4 DWDM circuit
pack (also referred to as Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack), and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD 1xOTU4 DWDM circuit pack (also referred to as 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack) are used to implement mapping/wrapping
functionality to a G.709 DWDM line.
The 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
include a single 100G C-band tunable OTU4 DWDM line interface. Table 2-2
on page 2-2 shows 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack variants and some of their functions.
Table 2-1
100G circuit packs in this chapter
Topic Page
100G OCLD (NTK539TxE5), Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Bx), and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux) circuit
packs
2-1
100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5 and NTK529AC) 2-61
100G MUX circuit packs (NTK529BAE5 and NTK529BBE5) 2-83
2-2 100G circuit packs
Table 2-2
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
Circuit pack variant PEC Reach PMD Mode of
operation
100G OCLD circuit packs
eDC100G OCLD Enh PMD Extended Reach
C-Band 1xOTU4 DWDM (Note 1)
NTK539TJE5 1600+ Km 20 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
eDC100G OCLD Enh PMD C-Band 1xOTU4
DWDM (Note 1)
NTK539TAE5 1000+ Km 20 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
eDC100G OCLD C-Band 1xOTU4 DWDM NTK539TBE5 1000+ Km 10 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
eDC100G OCLD Regional C-Band 1xOTU4
DWDM
NTK539TCE5 up to 600 Km 8 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
eDC100G OCLD Metro C-Band 1xOTU4
DWDM
NTK539TDE5 up to 300 Km 8 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
eDC100G OCLD Submarine C-Band 1xOTU4
DWDM
NTK539TEE5 Submarine
reach
20 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (Note 2)
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Enh PMD with
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539UA up to 1800 Km 30 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Long Haul with
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539UB application-
specific reach
10 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Regional with
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539UC up to 1000 Km 10 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Metro with EDFA
1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539UD up to 300 Km 10 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539UE Submarine
reach
50 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Premium Long Haul
with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539UH application-
specific reach
50 ps PMD
limit
DP-QPSK
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (Note 3, Note 4, and Note 5)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Long Haul with
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539BB application-
specific reach
10 ps PMD
limit
DP-BPSK
and
DP-QPSK
Figure 2-1 on page 2-4 shows the faceplate of a 100G OCLD circuit pack.
Figure 2-2 on page 2-5 shows the faceplate of a 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
Figure 2-3 on page 2-6 shows the faceplate of a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack.
Figure 2-4 on page 2-7 shows the functional block diagram of a 100G
OCLD circuit pack.
Figure 2-5 on page 2-8 shows the functional block diagram of a 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Submarine with
EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539BE Submarine
reach
50 ps PMD
limit
DP-BPSK
and
DP-QPSK
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD Premium Long Haul
with EDFA 1xOTU4 C-Band
NTK539BH application-
specific reach
50 ps PMD
limit
DP-BPSK
and
DP-QPSK
Note 1: The NTK539TJE5 is a high performance version of the NTK539TAE5 circuit pack providing in
excess of 50% increase in reach. The performance improvement comes from lower Rx OSNR and
enhanced system level control via sub-carrier power imbalance control to equalize performance of the two
sub-carriers. The control loop monitors the Rx for each sub-carrier and tries to achieve equal performance
for both sub-carriers by adjusting the Tx power of each of the sub-carriers.
Note 2: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux) support similar features provided by the
100G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5) and also provide increased reach, PMD robustness, higher shelf
density, lower latency, and colorless networking support.
Note 3: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx) support similar features provided by the
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux) and add the support for provisionable modulation
format allowing DP-QPSK and DP-BPSK modes of operation (versus 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs which only allow DP-QPSK mode of operation). Leveraging the extra coding gain of the Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD DP-BPSK modulation format, a line complex consisting of side-by-side mated Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs running in DP-BPSK modulation format is able to provide a 100G line
(2x50G channels, also referred to as 2C-BPSK) with distance reach beyond
6000 km for submarine and terrestrial applications.
Note 4: Two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with Equipment Profile set to 2xBPSK100G form a
100G 2C-BPSK Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit pack group to provide a 100G BPSK OCLD interface. The left
slot Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack is called the Prime circuit pack, the right slot
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack is called the Member circuit pack. The following pairings are
supported: (NTK539BH + NTK539BH), (NTK539BH + NTK539BB), (NTK539BB + NTK539BB), and
(NTK539BE + NTK539BE).
Note 5: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx) only operate with Release 9.21 or later
software loads.
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
Circuit pack variant PEC Reach PMD Mode of
operation
Figure 2-6 on page 2-9 shows the functional block diagram of a Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (NTK539Bx variants).
Figure 2-1
100G OCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
eDC100G OCLD
Enh PMD C-Band
1xOTU4 DWDM
Figure 2-2
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
Figure 2-3
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack faceplate
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
Figure 2-4
100G OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539TxE5)
Ciena FEC
Transmit Line
Mapper and
Deskew
Receive
Equalizer and
Demapper
100G E/O DP-QPSK
Tx
Subsystem
EOC Laser
Sync
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
Legend
100G O/E
DP-QPSK
Rx
Subsystem
DP-QPSK Dual Polarization Quad Phase Shift Keying
EDFA
VOA
EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
Figure 2-5
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539Ux)
EOC Laser
VOA
Ciena FEC
Transmit Line
Mapper and
Deskew
Receive
Equalizer and
Demapper
100G E/O DP-QPSK Tx
Subsystem
Sync
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
DP-QPSK Dual Polarization Quad Phase Shift Keying
Legend
100G O/E
DP-QPSK
Balanced Pin
Coherent
Rx Subsystem
EDFA
Figure 2-6
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack block diagram (NTK539Bx)
EOC Laser
VOA
Ciena FEC
Transmit Line
Mapper and
Deskew
Receive
Equalizer and
Demapper
E/O Flex Tx
Subsystem
Sync
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
Legend
O/E Flex
Balanced Pin
Coherent
Rx Subsystem
EDFA
Figure 2-7 on page 2-11 to Figure 2-15 on page 2-19 show which
configurations can be formed using 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in conjunction with 10x10G MUX,
10x10GE MUX, 100GE OCI, 100G OCI, or another 100G OCLD, 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack:
unprotected optical muxponders (unprotected 100G MOTRs) for various
service aggregations (Figure 2-7 on page 2-11 to Figure 2-10 on
page 2-14)
optical transponders (100G OTRs) (Figure 2-11 on page 2-15 and
Figure 2-12 on page 2-16) (not supported for Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs when mating with 100GE OCI circuit packs)
regenerators (Figure 2-13 on page 2-17 and Figure 2-14 on page 2-18)
1+1 TPT client-side protected optical muxponders (protected 100G
MOTRs) (Figure 2-15 on page 2-19)
Figure 2-7
100G MOTR configurations using 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs with 10x10GE MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in
QPSK modulation format)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
GbE aggregation
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
Various service aggregation
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
10G service aggregation
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in QPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-8
OCLD circuit packs with 10x10GE MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in
BPSK modulation format)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
GbE aggregation
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in BPSK modulation format.
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
Figure 2-9
OCLD circuit packs with 10x10G MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in
QPSK modulation format)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
GbE aggregation
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10GbE LAN PHY,
OTU2 (10.7G),
or OTU2 (11.09G)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
S
u
p
e
r
M
u
x
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
O
C
3
/
S
T
M
1
,

O
C
1
2
/
S
T
M
4
,
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
,

G
b
E
,
1
0
0
B
T
,

1
0
0
0
B
T
,
F
C
1
0
0
/
2
0
0
/
4
0
0
2.5G or lower rate service aggregation
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
2
.
5
G

M
O
T
R
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
,
1
0
G
b
E

W
A
N

P
H
Y
,
O
C
1
9
2
/
S
T
M
6
4
,
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
,

1
1
.
0
5
G
,

1
1
.
0
9
G
)
,
F
C
8
0
0
/
F
C
1
2
0
0
2.5G/2.7G service aggregation
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
/
O
T
M
1
Figure 2-10
OCLD circuit packs with 10x10G MUX circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in
BPSK modulation format)
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
GbE aggregation
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10GbE LAN PHY,
OTU2 (10.7G),
or OTU2 (11.09G)
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
Up to 10 times
S
u
p
e
r
M
u
x
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
O
C
3
/
S
T
M
1
,

O
C
1
2
/
S
T
M
4
,
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
,

G
b
E
,
1
0
0
B
T
,

1
0
0
0
B
T
,
F
C
1
0
0
/
2
0
0
/
4
0
0
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
Up to 10 times
2
.
5
G

M
O
T
R
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
,
1
0
G
b
E

W
A
N

P
H
Y
,
O
C
1
9
2
/
S
T
M
6
4
,
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
,

1
1
.
0
5
G
,

1
1
.
0
9
G
)
,
F
C
8
0
0
/
F
C
1
2
0
0
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
/
O
T
M
1
Figure 2-11
100G OTR configurations using 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs with 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack in QPSK modulation format)
Optical Transponder
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
0
G
)
100GE OCI/100G OCLD
or
100GE OCI/
O
T
U
4
1
0
0
G
b
E
Optical Transponder
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
0
G
o
r

O
T
U
4
)
100G OCI/100G OCLD
or
100G OCI/
or
100G OCI/
O
T
U
4
1
0
0
G
b
E
O
T
U
4
Note 1: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with
100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form a 100G OTR.
Note 2: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in QPSK
modulation format.
Figure 2-12
100G OTR configurations using 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs with 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack in BPSK modulation format)
Optical Transponder
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
0
G
)
100GE OCI/100G OCLD
or
100GE OCI/
1
0
0
G
b
E
Optical Transponder
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
0
G
o
r

O
T
U
4
)
100G OCI/100G OCLD
or
100G OCI/
or
100G OCI/
1
0
0
G
b
E
O
T
U
4
Note 1: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with
100GE OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5) to form an OTR.
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
Note 2: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in BPSK
modulation format.
Figure 2-13
100G Regen configurations using 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (QPSK mode), and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
Regenerator
O
T
U
4
O
T
U
4

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
Back-to-back 100G Regen with
10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX
O
T
U
4

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4
Some 10G signals
are passed through
using patch cords
Other 10G signals
are added/dropped
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

100G OCLD/100G OCLD
or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
or
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Note 2: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in QPSK modulation format.
Note 1: Both G.709 OTU4 Lines in Back-to-Back 100G Regen configuration can be either
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
Figure 2-14
100G Regen configurations using Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (BPSK mode) circuit packs
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
Regenerator

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
Back-to-back 100G Regen with
10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
Some 10G signals
are passed through
using patch cords
Other 10G signals
are added/dropped
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Note 1: The G.709 OTU4 Lines in Back-to-Back
100G Regen configuration must be
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
Regenerator

Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in BPSK modulation format/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK modulation format
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
O
T
U
4
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
must be in BPSK modulation format.
Note 2: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
must be in BPSK modulation format.
Figure 2-15
1+1 TPT client-side protected optical muxponders (protected 100G MOTRs)
100G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5), 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(NTK539Ux), and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx)
provide the following functionality.
Line support
one fixed OTU4 line interface (port 1)
Coherent Optical Frequency Division Multiplexing (CoFDM) dual
polarization QPSK modulation for 100G OCLD circuit packs
(NTK539TxE5)
WaveLogic 3 dual polarization (QPSK modulation) for 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux)
WaveLogic 3 Flex2 (QPSK and BPSK modulation) for Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx)
high PMD tolerance/compensation
T
P
T
1
0
x
1
0
G

M
U
X
1
0
x
1
0
G

M
U
X
Note 2: For 1+1 TPT support, the working and protection OCLD circuit packs must be
the same (i.e. both must be either 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
1
0
0
G

O
C
L
D
,

1
0
0
G

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
,

o
r
F
l
e
x
2

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
1
0
0
G

O
C
L
D
,

1
0
0
G

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
,

o
r
F
l
e
x
2

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
Note 3: Refer to Part 2 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310
for more information.
1565.50 nm) for NTK539TxE5 variants
1566.72 nm) for NTK539Ux variants
1566.72 nm) for NTK539Bx variants
wide dynamic range receiver with automatic VOA and EDFA control on the
line interface receiver for 100G OCLD circuit packs (NTK539TxE5)
wide dynamic range receiver with automatic VOA control on the line
interface receiver for 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Ux)
and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (NTK539Bx)
GCC0 data communication channels between Broadband interfaces
full monitoring and termination of line G.709 overhead bytes
no external BITS sources required (line timing or on board reference
clocking is used)
Line interworking between different 100G OCLD variants are shown in the
Table 2-3.
Line interworking between different 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants are
shown in the Table 2-4.
Table 2-3
Line interworking with 100G OCLD variant
100G OCLD
NTK539TA NTK539TB NTK539TC NTK539TD NTK539TE NTK539TJ
100G
OCLD
NTK539TA Same Partial Partial Partial No Partial
NTK539TB Same Partial Partial No Partial
NTK539TC Same Partial No Partial
NTK539TD Same No Partial
NTK539TE Same No
NTK539TJ Same
Note: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance specification. For
Example, the NTK539TJ can interwork with the NTK539TD but the link will only support 8 ps mean DGD and the
reach will be limited to 300 Km.
Table 2-4
Line interworking with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux)
UA UB UC UD UE UH
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (NTK539Ux) UA Same Partial Partial Partial No Partial
UB Same Partial Partial No Partial
UC Same Partial No Partial
UD Same No Partial
UE Same No
UH Same
Note: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance
specification. For Example, the NTK539UH can interwork with the NTK539UD but the link will only
support 10 ps mean DGD and the reach will be limited to 300 Km.
Line interworking between different Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants are
shown in the Table 2-5.
For line interworking between 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD variants contact Ciena representative for more
information.
100 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs do not interwork with 100G OCLD
circuit packs.
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs do not interwork with 100G OCLD
circuit packs.
Any variant of the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA circuit packs
(NTK539Ux) can be used in colorless systems.
Any variant of the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD with EDFA circuit packs
(NTK539Bx) can be used in colorless systems.
supports Short Term Optical Recovery Mechanism (STORM) for
NTK539Ux variants of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in colored
323-1851-310.
supports Short Term Optical Recovery Mechanism (STORM) for
NTK539Bx variants of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in colored
323-1851-310.
Table 2-5
Line interworking with Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD variant
NTK539BB NTK539BE NTK539BH
Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD
NTK539BB Same No Partial
NTK539BE Same No
NTK539BH Same
Note: Partial means: Performance will be reduced to the OCLD with the lesser performance specification. For
Example, the NTK539BH can interwork with the NTK539BB but the link will only support 10 ps mean DGD.
88 wavelengths supported with Ciena Common Photonic Layer line
system wavelengths. Refer to Table 2-6 on page 2-24 for a complete list of
supported wavelengths.
Attention: The 100G OCLD can be carried over the following Photonic
systems: Ciena Common Photonic Layer Release 4.0 or higher, Ciena 6500
Photonic Layer Release 7.0 or higher, and foreign Photonic line systems.
The 100G OCLD is not compatible with the Common Photonic Layer Filtered
Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux (SCMD8) module (NTT861AA-AH, AJ). The
100G OCLD over the 565, 5100 and 5200 Advanced Services Platform is not
supported in this release.
Attention: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD can be carried over the following
Photonic systems: Ciena Common Photonic Layer Release 5.0 or higher,
Ciena 6500 Photonic Layer Release 9.0 or higher, and foreign Photonic line
systems. The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD is not compatible with the Common
Photonic Layer Filtered Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux (SCMD8) module
(NTT861AA-AH, AJ). The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD over the 565, 5100 and
5200 Advanced Services Platform is not supported in this release.
Attention: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD can be carried over the following
Photonic systems: Ciena Common Photonic Layer Release 9.2 or higher,
Ciena 6500 Photonic Layer Release 9.2 or higher, and foreign Photonic line
systems. The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD is not compatible with the Common
Photonic Layer Filtered Serial 8 Channel Mux/Demux (SCMD8) module
(NTT861AA-AH, AJ). The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD over the 565, 5100 and
5200 Advanced Services Platform is not supported in this release.
Table 2-6
100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD supported wavelengths (for
the CMD44 50 GHz and Enhanced CMD44 50 GHz)
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
1 196.20 1527.99
(Note 1)
0 33 194.60 1540.56 27 65 193.00 1553.33 59
2 196.15 1528.38
(Note 1)
0 34 194.55 1540.95 28 66 192.95 1553.73 60
3 196.10 1528.77 93 35 194.50 1541.35 29 67 192.90 1554.13 61
4 196.05 1529.16 94 36 194.45 1541.75 30 68 192.85 1554.54 62
5 196.00 1529.55 95 37 194.40 1542.14 31 69 192.80 1554.94 63
6 195.95 1529.94 96 38 194.35 1542.54 32 70 192.75 1555.34 64
7 195.90 1530.33 1 39 194.30 1542.94 33 71 192.70 1555.75 65
8 195.85 1530.72 2 40 194.25 1543.33 34 72 192.65 1556.15 66
9 195.80 1531.12 3 41 194.20 1543.73 35 73 192.60 1556.55 67
10 195.75 1531.51 4 42 194.15 1544.13 36 74 192.55 1556.96 68
11 195.70 1531.90 5 43 194.10 1544.53 37 75 192.50 1557.36 69
12 195.65 1532.29 6 44 194.05 1544.92 38 76 192.45 1557.77 70
13 195.60 1532.68 7 45 194.00 1545.32 39 77 192.40 1558.17 71
14 195.55 1533.07 8 46 193.95 1545.72 40 78 192.35 1558.58 72
15 195.50 1533.47 9 47 193.90 1546.12 41 79 192.30 1558.98 73
16 195.45 1533.86 10 48 193.85 1546.52 42 80 192.25 1559.39 74
17 195.40 1534.25 11 49 193.80 1546.92 43 81 192.20 1559.79 75
18 195.35 1534.64 12 50 193.75 1547.32 44 82 192.15 1560.20 76
19 195.30 1535.04 13 51 193.70 1547.72 45 83 192.10 1560.61 77
20 195.25 1535.43 14 52 193.65 1548.11 46 84 192.05 1561.01 78
21 195.20 1535.82 15 53 193.60 1548.51 47 85 192.00 1561.42 79
22 195.15 1536.22 16 54 193.55 1548.91 48 86 191.95 1561.83 80
23 195.10 1536.61 17 55 193.50 1549.32 49 87 191.90 1562.23 81
24 195.05 1537.00 18 56 193.45 1549.72 50 88 191.85 1562.64 82
25 195.00 1537.40 19 57 193.40 1550.12 51 89 191.80 1563.05 83
26 194.95 1537.79 20 58 193.35 1550.52 52 90 191.75 1563.45 84
27 194.90 1538.19 21 59 193.30 1550.92 53 91 191.70 1563.86 85
28 194.85 1538.58 22 60 193.25 1551.32 54 92 191.65 1564.27 86
29 194.80 1538.98 23 61 193.20 1551.72 55 93 191.60 1564.68 87
for Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack carrier skew management when
in BPSK modulation format, the following recommendations apply:
Wavelength offset between prime and member wavelengths must be
kept within 200 GHz to avoid a reduced reach impact due to the skew
introduced by accumulated relative dispersion of the wavelengths.
The default wavelength offset is 50 GHz between prime and member
wavelengths.
Fiber patch cords between the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
and the line mux/demux equipment, including at any regens, must be
matched in nominal length to minimize skew. The 2xFlex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD BPSK carrier skew is eliminated at the offramp client circuit
pack. With <200 GHz wavelength offset between carriers and
nominally matched optical patch cords, the +/-2usec deskew range of
the client circuit pack can support >15,000 km fiber length of the line
fiber carrying both BPSK carriers. An alarm is provided on the Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in BPSK modulation format to indicate
when the client deskew range has been exceeded by the two BPSK
carriers. Also the deskew value is reported for providing feedback
regarding actions that improve the skew.
30 194.75 1539.37 24 62 193.15 1552.12 56 94 191.55 1565.09 88
31 194.70 1539.77 25 63 193.10 1552.52 57 95 191.50 1565.50 89
32 194.65 1540.16 26 64 193.05 1552.93 58 96 191.45 1565.90
(Note 2)
90
97 191.40 1566.31
(Note 2)
91
98 191.35 1566.72
(Note 2)
92
Note 1: This wavelength is only applicable to 100G OCLD circuit packs (not applicable to
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
Note 2: This wavelength is only applicable to 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs (not applicable to 100G OCLD circuit packs).
100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD supported wavelengths (for
the CMD44 50 GHz and Enhanced CMD44 50 GHz)
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
Wave-
length
#
Freq.
(THz)
Wave-
length
(nm)
Chan.
ID.
Client support
There are no client ports on the 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
circuit packs only support the 2WAY (Bidirectional) transponder
cross-connection type.
circuit packs only support the ODU4 transponder cross-connection rate.
circuit packs support the following monitored entities:
OTM4 line interface
Note: PMs are not supported on the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack when it is used as member card in BPSK mode.
323-1851-520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
OTM facility alarms
Loss Of Signal
Circuit Pack Unknown
Loss of Channel
Loss Of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Loss Of Multiframe
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Rx Channel Power Out Of Range
TR Control Echo trace Mismatch
OCH Link Data Retrieval In Progress
OCH Link Data Save In Progress
OTU Skew Out Of Range
OTU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU BDI
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
GCC0 Link Failure
Photonic alarms
Adjacency Mismatch
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
and 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs:
100G OCLD: occupies two slots (identified by the left-hand slot number of
the two occupied slots) and offers one 100G line port.
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (in QPSK mode): occupies one slot and offers
one 100G line port.
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs (in BPSK mode): occupy two slots and offer
one 100G line port.
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD: occupies one slot and offers one 100G line
port.
can be equipped in the 14-slot converged optical, 14-slot packet-optical,
converged optical/front electrical, or 14-slot converged optical/rear
electrical shelf as shown in Table 2-7.
Attention: Any mix of configurations is supported as long as there is no
overlap in equipped slots.
Table 2-7
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD allowable slots (14-slot
shelf)
Configuration 10x10GE MUX
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, Note 3, and Note 4)
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
muxponder with 10x10GE
MUX or 10x10G MUX to the
left of 100G OCLD
1 N/A 2/3 N/A N/A
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
9 N/A 10/11 N/A N/A
12 N/A 13/14 N/A N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
left of 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
3 N/A N/A 4 N/A
9 N/A N/A 10 N/A
13 N/A N/A 14 N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
3 N/A N/A N/A 4
9 N/A N/A N/A 10
13 N/A N/A N/A 14
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
left of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode
4 N/A N/A N/A 5 and 6
12 N/A N/A N/A 13 and 14
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
right of 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
2 N/A N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
12 N/A N/A 11 N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
2 N/A N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
12 N/A N/A N/A 11
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
right of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode
11 N/A N/A N/A 9 and 10
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
transponder with 100GE OCI
to the left of 100G OCLD
N/A 3/4 5/6 N/A N/A
N/A 9/10 11/12 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
transponder with 100G OCI to
the left of 100G OCLD
N/A 1 2/3 N/A N/A
N/A 4 5/6 N/A N/A
N/A 9 10/11 N/A N/A
N/A 12 13/14 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the left of
N/A 4/5 N/A 6 N/A
N/A 12/13 N/A 14 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the right of
N/A 2/3
(not
supported
if using
version 1 of
14-slot
converged
shelves)
N/A 1
(not
supported if
using version
1 of 14-slot
converged
shelves)
N/A
N/A 10/11 N/A 9 N/A
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
the left of
N/A 3 N/A 4 N/A
N/A 9 N/A 10 N/A
N/A 13 N/A 14 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
muxponder with 100G OCI to
the right of
N/A 2 N/A 1 N/A
N/A 6 N/A 5 N/A
N/A 12 N/A 11 N/A
100G OTR (see Note 5):
Unprotected optical
the left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
N/A 3 N/A N/A 4
N/A 9 N/A N/A 10
N/A 13 N/A N/A 14
Unprotected optical
muxponder with 100G OCI to
the right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
N/A 2 N/A N/A 1
N/A 6 N/A N/A 5
N/A 12 N/A N/A 11
Unprotected optical
the left of two Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLDs in BPSK mode
N/A 4 N/A N/A 5 and 6
N/A 12 N/A N/A 13 and 14
Unprotected optical
the right of two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK
mode
N/A 11 N/A N/A 9 and 10
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OCLD Regen:
Optical regen with two100G
OCLDs
N/A N/A 3/4 and 5/6 N/A N/A
N/A N/A 9/10 and
11/12
N/A N/A
Regen:
Optical regen with two
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
N/A N/A N/A 1 and 2 N/A
Regen:
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
QPSK mode
N/A N/A N/A N/A 1 and 2
100G OCLD/WaveLogic 3
OCLD Regen:
Optical regen with a 100G
OCLD to the left of 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
N/A N/A 4/5 6 6
N/A N/A 12/13 14 14
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD/OCLD Regen:
OCLD to the right of 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
N/A N/A 2/3
(not
supported if
using
version 1 of
14-slot
converged
shelves)
1
(not
supported if
using version
1 of 14-slot
converged
shelves)
N/A
N/A N/A 10/11 9 N/A
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Regen:
Optical regen with four
BPSK mode
&
5 and 6
&
11 and 12
Regen:
Optical regen with one
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode to the left of two
BPSK mode
N/A N/A N/A N/A 4
&
5 and 6
N/A N/A N/A N/A 12
&
13 and 14
Regen:
QPSK mode to the right of two
BPSK mode
&
3
&
11
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX, or 100GE OCI/100G OCI are not interchangeable.
Note 2: Supported 100G configurations are:
MOTR consists of:
one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and one 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must be in QPSK
mode),
or
one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs
(Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs must be in BPSK mode).
OTR consists of:
one 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack and one 100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
pack,
or
one 100G OCI circuit pack and one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit pack must be in QPSK mode),
or
one 100G OCI circuit pack and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs (Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs must be in BPSK mode).
Regen consists of:
two 100G OCLD circuit packs,
or
two 100G WaveLogic 3 circuit packs,
or
two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs when in QPSK mode,
or
four Flex2 WaveLogic 3 circuit packs when in BPSK mode,
or
one 100G OCLD circuit pack and one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack
one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in QPSK mode and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs when the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs are in BPSK mode.
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in Table 2-8
on page 2-36.
Note 3: Mixing of different 100G groups (100G MOTR, 100G OTR, and 100G Regen) is allowed and all
100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 100G groups if the shelf is adequately powered.
However, for specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be possible and
some or all of the remaining slots may need to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the
shelf power capacity. Prior to equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider
power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10CF (Chapter 8).
Note 4: Slots 7 and 8 are excluded as there is no mate-to-mate tracking available to support the required
5.5 Gbps rate.
Note 5: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can only be mated with 100G OCI circuit packs
(NTK529AC) to form a 100G OTR. The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs cannot be mated with
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Table 2-8
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, and Note 3)
100G MOTR: Unprotected
optical muxponder with
10x10GE MUX or 10x10G
MUX to the left of 100G
OCLD:
Option 1 (see Note 4) 2 N/A 3/4 N/A N/A
6 N/A 7/8 N/A N/A
12 N/A 13/14 N/A N/A
16 N/A 17/18 N/A N/A
22 N/A 23/24 N/A N/A
26 N/A 27/28 N/A N/A
32 N/A 33/34 N/A N/A
36 N/A 37/38 N/A N/A
Option 2 (see Note 5) 1 N/A 2/3 N/A N/A
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
13 N/A 14/15 N/A N/A
16 N/A 17/18 N/A N/A
21 N/A 22/23 N/A N/A
24 N/A 25/26 N/A N/A
33 N/A 34/35 N/A N/A
36 N/A 37/38 N/A N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
left of 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
3 N/A N/A 4 N/A
7 N/A N/A 8 N/A
13 N/A N/A 14 N/A
17 N/A N/A 18 N/A
23 N/A N/A 24 N/A
27 N/A N/A 28 N/A
33 N/A N/A 34 N/A
37 N/A N/A 38 N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
right of 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD
2 N/A N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
12 N/A N/A 11 N/A
16 N/A N/A 15 N/A
22 N/A N/A 21 N/A
26 N/A N/A 25 N/A
32 N/A N/A 31 N/A
36 N/A N/A 35 N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD in QPSK mode
3 N/A N/A N/A 4
7 N/A N/A N/A 8
13 N/A N/A N/A 14
17 N/A N/A N/A 18
23 N/A N/A N/A 24
27 N/A N/A N/A 28
33 N/A N/A N/A 34
37 N/A N/A N/A 38
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
right of Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode
2 N/A N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
12 N/A N/A N/A 11
16 N/A N/A N/A 15
22 N/A N/A N/A 21
26 N/A N/A N/A 25
32 N/A N/A N/A 31
36 N/A N/A N/A 35
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
left of two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
BPSK mode
14 N/A N/A N/A 15 and 16
26 N/A N/A N/A 27 and 28
34 N/A N/A N/A 35 and 36
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
right of two Flex2
BPSK mode
13 N/A N/A N/A 11 and 12
25 N/A N/A N/A 23 and 24
33 N/A N/A N/A 31 and 32
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
transponder with 100GE
OCI to the left of 100G
OCLD
N/A 1/2 3/4 N/A N/A
N/A 5/6 7/8 N/A N/A
N/A 11/12 13/14 N/A N/A
N/A 15/16 17/18 N/A N/A
N/A 21/22 23/24 N/A N/A
N/A 25/26 27/28 N/A N/A
N/A 31/32 33/34 N/A N/A
N/A 35/36 37/38 N/A N/A
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
transponder with 100G OCI
to the left of 100G OCLD
N/A 1 2/3 N/A N/A
N/A 4 5/6 N/A N/A
N/A 13 14/15 N/A N/A
N/A 16 17/18 N/A N/A
N/A 21 22/23 N/A N/A
N/A 24 25/26 N/A N/A
N/A 33 34/35 N/A N/A
N/A 36 37/38 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
OCI to the left of
N/A 6/7 N/A 8 N/A
N/A 14/15 N/A 16 N/A
N/A 26/27 N/A 28 N/A
N/A 34/35 N/A 36 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
OCI to the right of
N/A 4/5 N/A 3 N/A
N/A 12/13 N/A 11 N/A
N/A 24/25 N/A 23 N/A
N/A 32/33 N/A 31 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the left of
N/A 3 N/A 4 N/A
N/A 7 N/A 8 N/A
N/A 13 N/A 14 N/A
N/A 17 N/A 18 N/A
N/A 23 N/A 24 N/A
N/A 27 N/A 28 N/A
N/A 33 N/A 34 N/A
N/A 37 N/A 38 N/A
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the right of
N/A 2 N/A 1 N/A
N/A 6 N/A 5 N/A
N/A 12 N/A 11 N/A
N/A 16 N/A 15 N/A
N/A 22 N/A 21 N/A
N/A 26 N/A 25 N/A
N/A 32 N/A 31 N/A
N/A 36 N/A 35 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the left of
QPSK mode (see Note 6)
N/A 3 N/A N/A 4
N/A 7 N/A N/A 8
N/A 13 N/A N/A 14
N/A 17 N/A N/A 18
N/A 23 N/A N/A 24
N/A 27 N/A N/A 28
N/A 33 N/A N/A 34
N/A 37 N/A N/A 38
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the right of
N/A 2 N/A N/A 1
N/A 6 N/A N/A 5
N/A 12 N/A N/A 11
N/A 16 N/A N/A 15
N/A 22 N/A N/A 21
N/A 26 N/A N/A 25
N/A 32 N/A N/A 31
N/A 36 N/A N/A 35
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the left of two Flex2
BPSK mode (see Note 6)
N/A 14 N/A N/A 15 and 16
N/A 26 N/A N/A 27 and 28
N/A 34 N/A N/A 35 and 36
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
to the right of two Flex2
N/A 13 N/A N/A 11 and 12
N/A 25 N/A N/A 23 and 24
N/A 33 N/A N/A 31 and 32
100G OCLD Regen:
Optical regen with two 100G
OCLDs
N/A N/A 11/12 and
13/14
N/A N/A
N/A N/A 15/16 and
17/18
N/A N/A
N/A N/A 21/22 and
23/24
N/A N/A
N/A N/A 25/26 and
27/28
N/A N/A
N/A N/A 31/32 and
33/34
N/A N/A
N/A N/A 35/36 and
37/38
N/A N/A
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Regen:
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Regen:
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
in QPSK mode
OCLD Regen:
OCLD to the left of 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
N/A N/A 6/7 8 N/A
N/A N/A 14/15 16 N/A
N/A N/A 26/27 28 N/A
N/A N/A 34/35 36 N/A
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD/OCLD Regen:
OCLD to the right of 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
N/A N/A 4/5 3 N/A
N/A N/A 12/13 11 N/A
N/A N/A 24/25 23 N/A
N/A N/A 32/33 31 N/A
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Regen:
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
in BPSK mode
&
3 and 4
&
7 and 8
&
13 and 14
&
17 and 18
&
23 and 24
&
27 and 28
&
33 and 34
&
37 and 38
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Regen:
QPSK mode to the left of
two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode
N/A N/A N/A N/A 6
&
7 and 8
N/A N/A N/A N/A 14
&
15 and 16
N/A N/A N/A N/A 26
&
27 and 28
N/A N/A N/A N/A 34
&
35 and 36
Regen:
QPSK mode to the right of
OCLDs in BPSK mode
&
5
&
13
&
25
&
33
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
MOTR consists of:
one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and one 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must be
in QPSK mode),
or
OTR consists of:
one 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack and one 100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack,
or
or
Regen consists of:
or
or
or
or
one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in QPSK mode and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs when the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs are in BPSK mode.
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
can be equipped in the 7-slot optical shelf as shown in Table 2-9 on
page 2-48.
Note 3: Mixing of different 100G groups (100G MOTR, 100G OTR, and 100G Regen) is allowed and
all 100G-capable slots in a 6500 shelf can be equipped with 100G groups if the shelf is adequately
powered. However, for specific feeder ratings and combinations of circuit packs, full-fill may not be
possible and some or all of the remaining slots may need to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid
exceeding the shelf power capacity. Prior to equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must
always consider power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part
3 of 6500 Planning, NTRN10CF (Chapter 8).
Note 4: This configuration partitions the shelf into 4-slot ranges each of which can support a 100G
MOTR, 100G regen, or a 100G OTR. The 100G circuit pack group in each of these 4-slot ranges can
be changed (for example from a MOTR to a regen) without affecting any of the other 4-slot ranges in the
shelf. This slot usage allows the 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX to be the swapped out for a 100GE
OCI or 100G OCI without needing to move the existing 100G OCLD circuit packs. This slot usage also
allows the 100GE OCI or 100G OCI to be swapped out for a 100G OCLD without needing to move the
existing 100G OCLD if reconfiguring from 100G MOTR/100G OTR to 100G Regen.
Note 5: This configuration provides the maximum number of contiguous slots in the shelf (that is, slots
7-8, 11-12, 27-28, 31-32), available for other 6500 circuit pack groups (for example, a
100G MOTR/100G OTR group).
shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Table 2-9
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD allowable slots (7-slot shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100GE
OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
MUX or 10x10G MUX below
100G OCLD
1 N/A 2/3 N/A N/A
4 N/A 5/6 N/A N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
3 N/A N/A 4 N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
MUX or 10x10G MUX above
2 N/A N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A N/A 5 N/A
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
QPSK mode
3 N/A N/A N/A 4
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
QPSK mode
2 N/A N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A N/A 5
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
OCLDs in BPSK mode
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical
OCLDs in BPSK mode
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
below 100G OCLD
N/A 1/2 3/4 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
below 100G OCLD
N/A 1 2/3 N/A N/A
N/A 4 5/6 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
below
N/A 4/5 N/A 6 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
above
N/A 2/3 N/A 1 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
below
N/A 3 N/A 4 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
above
N/A 2 N/A 1 N/A
N/A 6 N/A 5 N/A
or
10x10G MUX
100GE
OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
below
N/A 3 N/A N/A 4
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
above
N/A 2 N/A N/A 1
N/A 6 N/A N/A 5
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
below two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode (see
Note 4)
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical
above two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode (see
Note 4)
100G OCLD Regen:
Optical regen with two 100G
OCLDs
Regen:
Regen:
QPSK mode
or
10x10G MUX
100GE
OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
OCLD Regen:
OCLD below 100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD
N/A N/A 4/5 6 N/A
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD/OCLD Regen:
OCLD above 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
N/A N/A 2/3 1 N/A
Regen:
BPSK mode
&
3 and 4
Regen:
QPSK mode below two Flex2
mode
N/A N/A N/A N/A 4
&
5 and 6
Regen:
QPSK mode above two Flex2
mode
&
3
or
10x10G MUX
100GE
OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
MOTR consists of:
one 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack and one 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must be in QPSK
mode),
or
OTR consists of:
pack,
or
OCLD circuit pack must be in QPSK mode).
or
OCLD circuit packs must be in BPSK mode),
Regen consists of:
or
or
or
or
one Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in QPSK mode and two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs when the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs are in BPSK mode.
or
10x10G MUX
100GE
OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
two 100G MOTR groups (10x10G MUX/100G OCLD or
10x10G MUX/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
10x10G MUX/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD) provisioned in consecutive slots
can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT:
For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G OCLD circuit pack, the
mate 100G OCLD circuit pack must be provisioned in the adjacent slot
to the right. The valid protection group slots are {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}, or
{9, 10/11} and {12, 13/14} in a 14-slot shelf; {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}, {13,
14/15} and {16, 17/18}, {21, 22/23} and {24, 25/26}, or
{33, 34/35} and {36, 37/38} in a 32-slot shelf; {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6} in a
7-slot shelf.
For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack when in QPSK
mode, the 10x10G MUX circuit packs must be in between the 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The
valid protection group slots are {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}, or {11o, 12m}
and {13m, 14o} in a 14-slot shelf; {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}, {5o, 6m} and
{7m, 8o}, {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o}, {15o, 16m} and {17m, 18o}, {21o,
22m} and {23m, 24o}, {25o, 26m} and {27m, 28o}, {31o, 32m} and
{33m, 34o}, or {35o, 36m} and {37m, 38o} in a 32-slot shelf; {1o, 2m}
and {3m, 4o} in a 7-slot shelf, where o stands for 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack and m stands for
10x10G MUX circuit pack.
the maximum number of back-to-back 100G OCLD/100G OCLD
regenerator sites is eight.
some or all of the remaining slots may need to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding the
shelf power capacity. Prior to equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always consider
power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10CF (Chapter 8).
or
10x10G MUX
100GE
OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
the maximum number of back-to-back 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator sites is 16.
the maximum number of back-to-back Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator sites is 16.
the maximum number of back-to-back 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD regenerator sites is 1.
(NTK505YA).
specifications for the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD optical interface circuit packs.
Table 2-10
Technical specifications for 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
optical interface circuit packs (100G line interface)
Parameter 100G OCLD
(NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5)
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH)
Weight (estimated) 2.9 kg (6.4 lb) 1.9 kg (4.1 lb) 1.9 kg (4.1 lb)
(see Note 1)
Typical (W): 170
(see Note 1)
(see Note 2)
Typical (W): 185
(see Note 1)
(see Note 2)
Transmitter
Laser modulation eDC100 CoFDM
dual-polarization QPSK
modulation
WaveLogic 3 dual
polarization QPSK
modulation
WaveLogic 3 dual
polarization QPSK
modulation
WaveLogic 3 dual
polarization BPSK
modulation
Laser spectral width < 1 MHz < 1 MHz < 1 MHz
Line rate 116.4 Gbit/s (carried as
14.55 Gbaud CoFDM
dual-polarization QPSK)
137.85 Gbit/s (carried
as 34.46 Gbaud dual
polarized QPSK)
as 34.46 Gbaud dual
polarized QPSK)
as 34.61 Gbaud dual
polarized BPSK)
Tunable wavelength range 1527.99 nm to
1565.50 nm
(see Table 2-6 on
page 2-24 for a list of
supported wavelengths)
1528.77 nm to
1566.72 nm
(see Table 2-6 on
supported
wavelengths)
1528.77 nm to
1566.72 nm
(see Table 2-6 on
supported
wavelengths)
Tunable wavelength
spacing
50 GHz 50 GHz 50 GHz
Central wavelength
accuracy
+/- 2.5 GHz +/- 2.5 GHz +/- 2.5 GHz
Transmit output power -11 to -1 dBm for
NTK539TAE5,
NTK539TBE5,
NTK539TCE5,
NTK539TDE5,
NTK539TEE5 variants
-11 to -2 dBm for
NTK539TJE5 variant
-11 to +4 dBm for
NTK539UA,
NTK539UB,
NTK539UC,
NTK539UD,
NTK539UE,
NTK539UH variants
-11 to +4 dBm for
NTK539BB,
NTK539BE,
NTK539BH variants
Tx power monitor
accuracy
+/- 0.8 dB +/- 0.8 dB +/- 0.8 dB
Receiver
Receiver type Pin Coherent Balanced Pin Coherent Balanced Pin Coherent
Receiver sensitivity
(minimum EOL)
-26 dBm (see Note 4) -20 dBm (per channel)
(see Note 5 and
Note 6)
-20 dBm (per channel)
(see Note 5 and
Note 6)
Receiver overload +7 dBm (see Note 7) +5 dBm (per channel)
(see Note 6 and
Note 8)
+5 dBm (total power)
(see Note 6 and
Note 9)
+5 dBm (per channel)
(see Note 6 and
Note 8)
(see Note 6 and
Note 9)
Receiver damage level +16 dBm +17 dBm (total power)
(see Note 6)
(see Note 6)
Rx power monitor
accuracy
+/- 0.5 dB at power levels
>= -10 dBm
+/- 0.5 dB (total power)
at power levels >= -10
dBm (see Note 6)
+/- 0.5 dB (total power)
at power levels >= -10
dBm (see Note 6)
Parameter 100G OCLD
(NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5)
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH)
Rx optical signal to noise
ratio (OSNR)
14.5 dB for
NTK539TAE5,
NTK539TBE5,
NTK539TCE5,
NTK539TDE5,
NTK539TEE5 variants
14.1 dB for
NTK539TJE5 variant
12 dB for NTK539UA,
NTK539UB,
NTK539UE,
NTK539UH
14 dB for NTK539UC,
NTK539UD
12 dB for QPSK mode
9 dB for BPSK mode
FEC coding gain at 1E-15 9.2 dB (using Ciena
proprietary FEC)
11.7 dB (using Ciena
proprietary FEC) (see
Note 10)
11.7 dB (using Ciena
proprietary FEC) (see
Note 10)
Polarization Mode
Dispersion (PMD)
tolerance
20 ps [mean DGD] for
NTK539TAE5
NTK539TJE5
NTK539TBE5
8 ps [mean DGD] for
NTK539TCE5
8 ps [mean DGD] for
NTK539TDE5
NTK539TEE5
NTK539UE,
NTK539UH
NTK539UA
NTK539UB,
NTK539UC,
NTK539UD
NTK539BE,
NTK539BH
NTK539BB
Polarization dependent
loss (PDL)
2 dB 2 dB 2 dB
ROADM support Up to 10 (estimate) Up to 16 (estimate) Up to 16 (estimate)
Parameter 100G OCLD
(NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5)
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH)
tolerance
+/- 32000 ps/nm +/- 80000 ps/nm for
NTK539UB,
NTK539UE,
NTK539UH
+/- 40000 ps/nm for
NTK539UA,
NTK539UC,
NTK539UD
+/- 80000 ps/nm
Parameter 100G OCLD
(NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5)
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH)
Reach (see Note 11) 1000+ km for
NTK539TAE5
1600+ km for
NTK539TJE5
1000+ km for
NTK539TBE5
Up to 600 km for
NTK539TCE5
Up to 300 km for
NTK539TDE5
Submarine reach for
NTK539TEE5
Up to 1800 km for
NTK539UA
Application-specific
for NTK539UB,
NTK539UH
Submarine reach for
NTK539UE
Up to 1000 km for
NTK539UC
Up to 300 km for
NTK539UD
Application-specific
(+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Note 3: This circuit pack occupies two slots in the shelf and half the power is drawn from each slot. In a
32-slot shelf, the software assumes that the power budget applies to the zone associated with the
left-most slot even if the circuit pack occupies two slots which are in different power zones.
Note 4: The minimum received power level is -28 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Note 5: The minimum per channel received power level is -20 dBm which does not take into account any
Rx power monitor inaccuracy. For stretched single span applications, -21dBm Receiver sensitivity is also
supported.
Parameter 100G OCLD
(NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5)
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH)
Latency
Refer to Latency specifications for 100G and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs on page 2-112 for 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD latency values.
Note 6: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD has two optical power detectors on its Rx interface. One for total
input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when, connected to the CCMD12 circuit
pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]) and one for channel input power (the channel corresponds to the
wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). When the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD is used in colored Photonic
systems, the two 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Rx interface detectors see similar power levels. In colored
line systems, the total input power monitor is the preferred monitor for channel power since it is more
accurate.
Note 7: The maximum received power level is +7.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Note 8: The maximum per channel received power level is +5 dBm, which does not take into account
Note 9: The maximum received power level is +5.5 dBm, which does not take into account any Rx power
monitor inaccuracy.
Note 10: FEC coding gain is 11.7 dB when the OTM4 facility Performance Optimized Mode parameter
is set to OptimizationMode1 (for best reach performance). FEC coding gain is 11.1 dB when the OTM4
facility Performance Optimized Mode parameter is set to OptimizationMode2 (for best latency).
Note 11: Maximum allowed reach is subject to appropriate link engineering analysis. You must follow the
normal link engineering rules.
Parameter 100G OCLD
(NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5)
100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH)
Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH)
100G OCI circuit packs (NTK529AAE5 and NTK529AC)
Overview
This release of 6500 supports two variants of the 100G OCI circuit packs:
100G OCI 100GE 1xCFP (NTK529AAE5) circuit pack (also referred to as
100GE OCI)
This type of circuit pack is used to transparently map a 100GE client onto
an adjacent 100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD line interface circuit
pack (OPU4/ODU4 frame interface) at 104.8 Gbit/s via the backplane.
The 100GE OCI must be equipped with a 100G CFP based client interface
that support ETH100G (100GBASE-R). The CFP module has a larger
form factor than a SFP, SFP+, or XFP module and supports much higher
data rates. Figure 2-16 shows the faceplate of a 100GE OCI circuit pack,
and Figure 2-17 shows the functional block diagram of a 100GE OCI
circuit pack.
Figure 2-16
100GE OCI circuit pack faceplate
Type A
100G OCI
100GE
1xCFP
Fail
Ready
In Use
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
1
1
T
R
Figure 2-17
100GE OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529AAE5)
As shown in Figure 2-18 on page 2-63, 100GE OCI and 100G OCLD or
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can form an optical transponder (100G
OTR).
100G CFP
OTU4
Mapper
Power
Supply
Sync
Processor
Module
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
1
PHY
PHY Physical layer adapter
Legend
Figure 2-18
100GE OCI circuit packs functions
100G OCI Multi-Protocol 1xCFP (NTK529AC) circuit pack (also referred to
as 100G OCI)
This type of circuit pack is used to transparently map a 100GE client onto
an adjacent 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD line interface circuit pack (OPU4/ODU4 frame interface) at 104.8
Gbit/s via the backplane. Unlike 100GE OCI circuit pack, the 100G OCI
circuit pack can also support OTU4 client rate.
The 100G OCI must be equipped with a 100G CFP based client interface
that support ETH100G or OTU4 (100GBASE-R or OTU4). The CFP
module has a larger form factor than a SFP, SFP+, or XFP module and
supports much higher data rates. Figure 2-19 on page 2-64 shows the
faceplate of a 100G OCI circuit pack, and Figure 2-20 on page 2-65 shows
the functional block diagram of a 100G OCI circuit pack.
Optical Transponder
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
0
G
)
100GE OCI/100G OCLD
or
100GE OCI/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
O
T
U
4
1
0
0
G
b
E
Figure 2-19
100G OCI circuit pack faceplate
Fail
Ready
In Use
Red triangle (Fail)
Yellow circle (LOS)
1
1
T
R
100G OCI
Multi-Protocol
1xCFP
Type A
S/N
N
T030M
EE9999E
N
TU
D
99EE
EEEEE99999
R
99
Hazard
level:
Figure 2-20
100G OCI circuit pack block diagram (NTK529AC)
As shown in Figure 2-21 on page 2-66 and Figure 2-22 on page 2-66,
100G OCI and 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can form an optical transponder (100G
OTR).
100G CFP
OTU4
Mapper
Power
Supply
Sync
Processor
Module
Backplane
Interface
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
Left
Mate
Right
Mate
1
Figure 2-21
100G OCI circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in QPSK modulation
format)
Figure 2-22
100G OCI circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in BPSK modulation
format)
Optical Transponder
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
100G OCI/100G OCLD
or
100G OCI/
100G WaveLogic3 OCLD
or
100G OCI/
Flex2 WaveLogic3 OCLD
O
T
U
4
1
0
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
0
G

o
r

O
T
U
4
)
1
0
0
G
b
E
O
T
U
4
Note: The Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must be in QPSK modulation format.
Optical Transponder
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
100G OCI/
Flex2 WaveLogic3 OCLD/
Flex2 WaveLogic3 OCLD
1
0
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

(
E
T
H
1
0
0
G

o
r

O
T
U
4
)
1
0
0
G
b
E
O
T
U
4
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
The 100GE OCI circuit pack (NTK529AAE5) and 100G OCI (NTK529AC)
circuit pack provide the following functionality.
Line support
There are no line ports on the 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack. A virtual
aggregate OTM4 facility (port 1) is automatically provisioned on the circuit
pack when the client is ETH100G.
Client support
one 100GE (ETH100G) CFP client interface (port 1) on 100GE OCI circuit
pack supporting ETH100G client rate.
one 100GE (ETH100G/OTM4) CFP client interface (port 1) on 100G
OCI circuit pack supporting the following client rates:
100GBASE-R (103.125 Gbit/s)
OTU4 (111.8 Gbit/s)
a virtual OTM4 mapping facility is auto-created (virtual port 1) when
ETH100G client is provisioned
same form and fit as 100G OCLD, all physical attributes (including LEDs)
are at parity with 100G OCLD
facilitates client-side interworking at ETH100G/OTM4 signal rates
full transparency for ETH100G clients
ODU4 transparency on the OTU4 client of the 100G OCI circuit pack
variant
100GE OCI circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its
ETH100G client facility. Terminal loopback on the 100GE OCI turns off the
transmit laser.
100G OCI circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its client
facility (ETH100G or OTM4). Terminal loopback on the 100G OCI turns off
the transmit laser.
GCC1/GCC0 data communications channels between 100GE OCI and/or
100G OCI OTM4 mapping facilities
supports client side GCC0 data communications channels on the
100G OCI circuit pack variant when it is provisioned for ETH100G
client
interworking between 100GE OCI circuit pack variant and 100G OCI
circuit pack variant is supported if the client port in 100G OCI circuit
pack variant is also provisioned as ETH100G
clocking is used)
clients protocols and mappings on 100GE OCI circuit pack are shown in
Table 2-11:
clients protocols and mappings on 100G OCI circuit pack are shown in
Table 2-12:
The 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit pack only supports the 2WAY
(Bidirectional) transponder cross-connection type.
The 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit pack only supports the ODU4
transponder cross-connection rate.
Supported CFPs
Table 2-13 on page 2-69 provides a list of the CFPs that are supported on the
100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit packs.
Table 2-11
Client protocols and mapping for 100GE OCI circuit pack (NTK529AAE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
100GBASE-R
(103.125G100ppm)
OPU4
(104.356G20ppm)
Proprietary Asynchronous
Mapping Procedure,
PT= 0x8B
100GBASE-R
(103.125G100ppm)
OPU4
(104.356G20ppm)
Generic Mapping
Procedure (GMP),
PT= 0x07
Note: OTU4 rate is OPU4 rate x 255/238 = 111.810G 20 ppm.
Table 2-12
Client protocols and mapping for 100G OCI circuit pack (NTK529AC)
Client protocol
(rate)
100GBASE-R
(103.125G100ppm)
OPU4
(104.356G20ppm)
Generic Mapping
Procedure (GMP),
PT= 0x07
OTU4
(111.810G20ppm)
timing transparent
Note: OTU4 rate is OPU4 rate x 255/238 = 111.810G 20 ppm.
Table 2-13
Supported CFP modules for the 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit pack
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in a CFP may be supported by the 100GE OCI or 100G OCI circuit pack.
Refer to Table 2-27 on page 2-145 to find out which facility types can be supported by 100GE OCI or
100G OCI circuit packs.
100G OCI 100GE 1xCFP
(NTK529AAE5)
PCFP
100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA01BJE6)
100GBASE-LR4,4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km SC CFP
(NTTA01FJE6)
103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA03BJE6)
103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP
(NTTA03AA)
(NTTA03GJ)
103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G WDM, SMF, 1550 nm, 2km CFP
(NTTA03HE)
100G OCI Multi-Protocol
1xCFP (NTK529AC)
PCFP
100GBASE-LR4, 4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km CFP
(NTTA01BJE6)
100GBASE-LR4,4x25G WDM, SMF, 1310nm, 10km SC CFP
(NTTA01FJE6)
(NTTA03BJE6)
103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G, MMF, 850 nm, 100m, MPO CFP
(NTTA03AA)
(NTTA03GJ)
103.1G-111.8G, 10x10G WDM, SMF, 1550 nm, 2km CFP
(NTTA03HE)
103.1G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP (160-9113-900)
103.1G-111.8G, 4x25G, WDM, SMF, 1310 nm, 10km CFP
(160-9114-900)
The 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit pack supports the following monitored
entities:
Client interfaces
PM collection for OTU4 layer (100G OCI circuit pack only)
PM collection for ODU4 layer (100G OCI circuit pack only)
PM collection for TCMTTP and TCMCTP facilities (100G OCI circuit
pack only)
PM collection for ETH100G facilities
PM collection of Physical layer for OTM4 (100G OCI circuit pack only)
PM collection of Physical layer for ETH100G facilities
operational measurements for ETH100G facilities
323-1851-520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Note 1: On the 100GE OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the client interface (ETH100G). There are no line
ports on 100GE OCI circuit packs. A virtual OTM4 port 100 is also provisioned by software internally
on the circuit pack. This is a mapping port used to demarcate the ODU4 layer but does not have a
physical connection.
Note 2: On the 100G OCI circuit packs, port 1 is the client interface (ETH100G or OTM4). There are
no line ports on 100G OCI circuit packs. A virtual OTM4 port 1 is provisioned by software internally on
the circuit pack when the client interface is set to ETH100G. This is a mapping port used to demarcate
the ODU4 layer but does not have a physical connection.
Note 3: The CFP module has a larger form factor than a SFP, SFP+, or XFP module and supports
much higher data rates.
Table 2-13
Supported CFP modules for the 100GE OCI/100G OCI circuit pack
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
Pluggable alarms
Client Circuit Pack Missing - Pluggable
Client Circuit Pack Failed - Pluggable
Client Circuit Pack Unknown - Pluggable
provisioning Incompatible - Pluggable
OTM facility alarms
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU BDI
OPU AIS
GCC1 Link Fail
Laser Off Far End failure triggered
Event Log Full
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Data Synch
Loss Of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Local Fault
Remote Fault
Laser Off Far End failure triggered
Event Log Full
TCM Facility alarms (100G OCI)
ODU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU Signal Degrade
WAN alarms
CMF UPI Mismatch
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit
packs:
100GE OCI (NTK529AAE5) occupies two slots, and offers one 100GE
client port.
100G OCI (NTK529AC) occupies one slot, and offers one 100G client
port.
100GE OCI (NTK529AAE5) is identified by the left-hand slot number of
the two occupied slots.
100G OCI (NTK529AC) is identified by the slot number of the occupied
slot.
Table 2-14
100GE OCI and 100G OCI allowable slots (14-slot shelf)
Configuration 100GE OCI
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Slots (see Note 1, Note 2, Note 3, Note 4)
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical transponder with 100GE
OCI to the left of 100G OCLD
3/4 5/6 N/A N/A
9/10 11/12 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical transponder with 100G
1 2/3 N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A
9 10/11 N/A N/A
12 13/14 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the left of
4/5 N/A 6 N/A
12/13 N/A 14 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the right of
2/3
(not
supported
if using
version 1 of
14-slot
converged
shelves)
N/A 1
(not
supported if
using version
1 of 14-slot
converged
shelves)
N/A
10/11 N/A 9 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the left of
3 N/A 4 N/A
9 N/A 10 N/A
13 N/A 14 N/A
100G OTR:
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G
OCI to the right of
2 N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A 5 N/A
12 N/A 11 N/A
OCI to the left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode
3 N/A N/A 4
9 N/A N/A 10
13 N/A N/A 14
Unprotected optical muxponder with 100G
OCI to the right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
in QPSK mode
2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
12 N/A N/A 11
OCI to the left of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode
4 N/A N/A 5 and 6
12 N/A N/A 13 and 14
OCI to the right of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode
3 N/A N/A 1 and 2
11 N/A N/A 9 and 10
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in Table 2-15
on page 2-76.
or 100GE OCI/100G OCI are not interchangeable.
Note 2: Supported 100G OTR consists of:
pack,
or
or
Note 4: Slots 7 and 8 are excluded as there is no mate-to-mate tracking available to support the
required 5.5 Gbps rate.
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Table 2-15
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
1/2 3/4 N/A N/A
5/6 7/8 N/A N/A
11/12 13/14 N/A N/A
15/16 17/18 N/A N/A
21/22 23/24 N/A N/A
25/26 27/28 N/A N/A
31/32 33/34 N/A N/A
35/36 37/38 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
1 2/3 N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A
13 14/15 N/A N/A
16 17/18 N/A N/A
21 22/23 N/A N/A
24 25/26 N/A N/A
33 34/35 N/A N/A
36 37/38 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the left of
6/7 N/A 8 N/A
14/15 N/A 16 N/A
26/27 N/A 28 N/A
34/35 N/A 36 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the right of
4/5 N/A 3 N/A
12/13 N/A 11 N/A
24/25 N/A 23 N/A
32/33 N/A 31 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the left of
3 N/A 4 N/A
7 N/A 8 N/A
13 N/A 14 N/A
17 N/A 18 N/A
23 N/A 24 N/A
27 N/A 28 N/A
33 N/A 34 N/A
37 N/A 38 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the right of
2 N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A 5 N/A
12 N/A 11 N/A
16 N/A 15 N/A
22 N/A 21 N/A
26 N/A 25 N/A
32 N/A 31 N/A
36 N/A 35 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI to the left of
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK mode
(see Note 4)
3 N/A N/A 4
7 N/A N/A 8
13 N/A N/A 14
17 N/A N/A 18
23 N/A N/A 24
27 N/A N/A 28
33 N/A N/A 34
37 N/A N/A 38
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
OCI to the right of
(see Note 4)
2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
12 N/A N/A 11
16 N/A N/A 15
22 N/A N/A 21
26 N/A N/A 25
32 N/A N/A 31
36 N/A N/A 35
100G OTR:
OCI to the left of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode (see Note 4)
6 N/A N/A 7 and 8
14 N/A N/A 15 and 16
26 N/A N/A 27 and 28
34 N/A N/A 35 and 36
100G OTR:
OCI to the right of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLDs in BPSK mode (see Note 4)
5 N/A N/A 3 and 4
13 N/A N/A 11 and 12
25 N/A N/A 23 and 24
33 N/A N/A 31 and 32
or 100GE OCI/100G OCI are not interchangeable.
OTR consists of:
circuit pack,
or
or
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
can be equipped in the 7-slot optical shelf as shown in Table 2-16.
Table 2-16
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
OCI below 100G OCLD
1/2 3/4 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
OCI below 100G OCLD
1 2/3 N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A
100G OTR:
OCI below
4/5 N/A 6 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI above
2/3 N/A 1 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI below
3 N/A 4 N/A
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G OTR:
OCI above
2 N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A 5 N/A
100G OTR:
OCI below
(see Note 4)
3 N/A N/A 4
100G OTR:
OCI above
(see Note 4)
2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
100G OTR:
OCI below two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
4 N/A N/A 5 and 6
100G OTR:
OCI above two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
3 N/A N/A 1 and 2
Note 1: The slot positions of the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
100GE OCI/100G OCI are not interchangeable.
OTR consists of:
circuit pack,
or
or
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
(NTK505YA).
some or all of the remaining slots may need to be equipped with filler circuit packs to avoid exceeding
the shelf power capacity. Prior to equipping the shelf with high power circuit packs, you must always
consider power budgeting and power feeds by referring to "Power specifications" section in Part 3 of 6500
Planning, NTRN10CF (Chapter 8).
or
100G OCI
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Table 2-17 lists the weight, power consumption, and CFP specifications for
the 100GE OCI and 100G OCI optical interface circuit pack.
Latency
packs on page 2-112 for 100GE OCI and 100G OCI latency values.
Table 2-17
Technical specifications for 100GE OCI and 100G OCI optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 100GE OCI (NTK529AAE5) 100G OCI (NTK529AC)
Power consumption Typical (W): 78 (see Note 1 and
Note 3)
Power Budget (W): 94 (see
Note 2 and Note 3)
Typical (W): 85 (see Note 1,
Note 3, and Note 4)
Power Budget (W): 95 (see
Note 2 and Note 3)
CFP specifications (see Note 5)
25 (+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Note 3: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with CFP, the power values published in this table
do not include CFP power values. You must add CFP power value to typical or power budget values
per CFP.
Note 4: The power values for this circuit pack are based on operation with an OTU4 client protocol.
When operating at 100GE (ETH100G) rates, the typical power is 9W less than stated.
Note 5: For optical CFP client specifications, see the following section in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
NTRN10CF (Chapter 8): CFP optical specifications.
100G MUX circuit packs (NTK529BAE5 and NTK529BBE5)
Overview
This release of 6500 supports two variants of the 100G MUX circuit packs:
10x10G MUX 10GE 10xSFP+ (NTK529BAE5) circuit pack (also referred
to as 10x10GE MUX)
This type of circuit pack is used for transparent aggregation of up to ten
10GE client channels for handoff across the backplane to the adjacent
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack. Each 10GE client is asynchronously multiplexed, and then
transmitted (as OTU4) to the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD via the backplane.
The 10x10GE MUX can be equipped with ten 10G SFP+ based client
interfaces that support ETH10G (10GBASE-LR). Each 10GE client is
independently configurable and independently operated. The SFP+
module has the same form factor as a conventional SFP module but
supports higher data rates.
Figure 2-23 on page 2-84 shows the faceplate of a 10x10GE MUX circuit
pack, and Figure 2-24 on page 2-85 shows the functional block diagram of
a 10x10GE MUX circuit pack.
Figure 2-23
10x10GE MUX circuit pack faceplate
Card OK = LED on;
Red triangle (Fail)
Transmit/receive
SFP+ dual LC
connector
of Signal/optical module (SFP+) fail
10x10G MUX
10GE
10xSFP+
Figure 2-24
10x10GE MUX circuit pack block diagram (NTK529BAE5)
Left
Mate
10
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
SFP+
10G
Client Monitor
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
SFP+
10G
OTN Mapper
PHY
OTU4
Mapper/
Demapper
Backplane
Interface
Right
Mate
Sync
PHY Physical layer adapter
Legend
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
9
10x10GE MUX circuit packs can form unprotected optical muxponders
(100G MOTRs) for 10G service aggregation (when used in conjunction
with a 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD) and various service aggregations (when used in conjunction with
a 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
and another type of circuit pack such as L2 MOTR or FLEX MOTR circuit
pack). Back-to-back regenerator is also supported.
Figure 2-25
10x10GE MUX circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in QPSK modulation
format)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
GbE aggregation
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10x10GE MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10GE MUX/
or
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
Figure 2-26
10x10GE MUX circuit packs functions (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in BPSK modulation
format)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10GE MUX/
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
GbE aggregation
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10x10GE MUX/
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
10x10G MUX Multi-Protocol 10xXFP (NTK529BBE5) circuit pack (also
referred to as 10x10G MUX)
This type of circuit pack is used for transparent aggregation of up to ten
10G client channels for handoff across the backplane to the adjacent
100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack. Each 10G client is asynchronously multiplexed, and then
transmitted (as OTU4) to the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD via the backplane.
The 10x10G MUX can be equipped with ten 10G XFP-based client
interfaces that support 10G client rates. Each 10G client is independently
configurable and independently operated. Non-OTU2 clients are first
mapped into an ODU2 prior to multiplexing. OTU2 clients have the OTU2
layer terminated on ingress, resulting in an ODU2 as well. The ten
resulting ODU2 signals are then multiplexed into an OTU4 frame structure
and this OTU4 is then transmitted to the 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD via the backplane.
Figure 2-27 on page 2-90 shows the faceplate of a 10x10G MUX circuit
pack, and Figure 2-28 on page 2-91 shows the functional block diagram of
a 10x10G MUX circuit pack.
Figure 2-27
10x10G MUX circuit pack faceplate
Card OK = LED on;
Red triangle (Fail)
Transmit/receive
XPF dual LC
connector
of Signal/optical module (XFP) fail
Figure 2-28
10x10G MUX circuit pack block diagram (NTK529BBE5)
Left
Mate
10
B
a
c
k
p
l
a
n
e
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
XFP
10G
OTN Mapper
OTU4
Mapper/
Demapper
Backplane
Interface
Right
Mate
Sync
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
9
10x10G MUX circuit packs can form unprotected optical muxponders
(100G MOTRs) for 10G service aggregation (when used in conjunction
with a 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD) and various service aggregations (when used in conjunction with
a 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
and another type of circuit pack such as L2 MOTR, FLEX MOTR,
SuperMux, or 2.5G MOTR circuit pack). Back-to-back regenerator is also
supported. 10x10G MUX circuit packs can also form 10x10G TPT
protected MOTR groups as shown in Figure 2-31 on page 2-95.
Figure 2-29
10x10G MUX circuit packs functions (example) (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in QPSK
modulation format)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
GbE aggregation
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10GbE LAN PHY,
OTU2 (10.7G),
or OTU2 (11.09G)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
S
u
p
e
r
M
u
x
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
O
C
3
/
S
T
M
1
,

O
C
1
2
/
S
T
M
4
,
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
,

G
b
E
,
1
0
0
B
T
,

1
0
0
0
B
T
,
F
C
1
0
0
/
2
0
0
/
4
0
0
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
O
T
U
4
Up to 10 times
2
.
5
G

M
O
T
R
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
,
1
0
G
b
E

W
A
N

P
H
Y
,
O
C
1
9
2
/
S
T
M
6
4
,
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
,

1
1
.
0
5
G
,

1
1
.
0
9
G
)
,
F
C
8
0
0
/
F
C
1
2
0
0
10x10G MUX/
100G OCLD
or
10x10G MUX/
or
10x10G MUX/
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
/
O
T
M
1
Figure 2-30
10x10G MUX circuit packs functions (example) (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack in BPSK
modulation format)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
GbE aggregation
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
Up to 10 times
L
2

M
O
T
R
1
0
G
b
E
L
A
N

P
H
Y G
b
E
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t

Up to 10 times
F
L
E
X

M
O
T
R
V
a
r
i
o
u
s
10GbE LAN PHY,
OTU2 (10.7G),
or OTU2 (11.09G)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
10x10G MUX/
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
Up to 10 times
S
u
p
e
r
M
u
x
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
O
C
3
/
S
T
M
1
,

O
C
1
2
/
S
T
M
4
,
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
,

G
b
E
,
1
0
0
B
T
,

1
0
0
0
B
T
,
F
C
1
0
0
/
2
0
0
/
4
0
0
10x10G MUX/
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
1
0
G

C
l
i
e
n
t
Up to 10 times
2
.
5
G

M
O
T
R
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
)
1
0
G
b
E

L
A
N

P
H
Y
,
1
0
G
b
E

W
A
N

P
H
Y
,
O
C
1
9
2
/
S
T
M
6
4
,
O
T
U
2

(
1
0
.
7
G
,

1
1
.
0
5
G
,

1
1
.
0
9
G
)
,
F
C
8
0
0
/
F
C
1
2
0
0
10x10G MUX/
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
G
.
7
0
9

O
T
U
4

L
i
n
e
O
T
U
4

(
m
e
m
b
e
r
)
O
T
U
4

(
p
r
i
m
e
)
O
C
4
8
/
S
T
M
1
6
/
O
T
M
1
Figure 2-31
1+1 TPT client-side protected optical muxponders (protected 100G MOTRs)
The 10x10GE MUX circuit pack (NTK529BAE5) and 10x10G MUX circuit
pack (NTK529BBE5) provide the following functionality.
Line support
There are no line ports on the 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit pack. A
virtual aggregate OTM4 facility (port 100) is automatically provisioned on the
circuit pack.
Client support
up to ten 10GE (ETH10G) SFP+ client interfaces (ports 1 to 10) on
10x10GE MUX circuit pack supporting ETH10G client rate. The OTN
digital wrappers enable full PCS transparency for 10GBASE-R (10.3125
Gbit/s) clients.
up to ten 10G XFP client interfaces (ports 1 to 10) on 10x10G MUX circuit
pack supporting the following client rates:
OC-192/STM-64/10G-BASE-W (9.95328 Gbit/s)
10G-BASE-R (10.3125 Gbit/s)
T
P
T
1
0
x
1
0
G

M
U
X
1
0
x
1
0
G

M
U
X
Note 2: For 1+1 TPT support, the working and protection OCLD circuit packs must be
the same (i.e. both must be either 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs).
1
0
0
G

O
C
L
D
,

1
0
0
G

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
,

o
r
F
l
e
x
2

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
1
0
0
G

O
C
L
D
,

1
0
0
G

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
,

o
r
F
l
e
x
2

W
a
v
e
L
o
g
i
c

3

O
C
L
D
Note 3: Refer to Part 2 of Configuration - Provisioning and Operating, 323-1851-310
for more information.
OTU2 (10.709 Gbit/s)
OTU1e (11.05 Gbit/s)
OTU2e (11.09 Gbit/s)
FC800 (8.5 Gbit/s)
FC1200 (10.51875 Gbit/s)
an OTM2 layer facility corresponding to each ETH10G client facility is
auto-created
an OTM4 layer facility corresponding to all client facilities is auto-created
(virtual port 100)
each client port supports optical power monitoring with 2 dB accuracy and
threshold crossings alerts (TCA) based on Rx Power High and Rx Power
Low
10x10GE MUX circuit pack supports facility loopbacks and terminal
loopbacks on its ETH10G client facilities. Terminal loopback on the
10x10GE MUX is bridged, that is, provisioned traffic will be sent on the
client egress.
10x10G MUX circuit pack supports facility and terminal loopbacks on its
ETH10G, OTM2, and OC192/STM64 client facilities. Terminal loopback on
the 10x10G MUX turns off the transmit laser.
GCC1 data communications channels between 10x10GE MUX OTM4 or
10x10G MUX OTM4 facilities (port 100)
supports G.7041 compliant Client Management Frames (CMF) and
Ordered Set Transparency on 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BBE5).
This feature provides compliance to G.7041 Sub-clause 7.9.2.2, which
provides a mapping mode that preserves the Ordered Set information of
the 10GBase-R client signal by mapping Ordered Sets into their own
GFP-F frames (Client Data Frame). Consequently, this mapping mode
does not require the GFP Client Management Frames (CMF) to
communicate local faults, remote faults, all clears, and other PCS layer
ordered set information. Therefore, this feature allows 6500 systems to
better interop with other vendors products when using 10GE GFP
mapping.
clients protocols and mappings on 10x10GE MUX circuit pack are shown
in Table 2-18.
clients protocols and mappings on 10x10G MUX circuit pack are shown in
Table 2-19.
Table 2-18
Client protocols and mapping for 10x10GE MUX circuit pack (NTK529BAE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
10GBASE-R
(10.313G100ppm)
OPU2e
(10.356G100ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
Note: OTU2e rate is OPU2e rate x 255/238 = 11.096G 100 ppm.
Table 2-19
Client protocols and mapping for 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BBE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
OC-192/STM-64
(9.953G20ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G20ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
10GBASE-W
(9.953G20ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G20ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
OTU2
(10.709G20ppm)
timing transparent
OTU2e
(11.096G20ppm)
timing transparent
OTU1e
(11.049G20ppm)
timing transparent
The 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit pack supports only the 2WAY
(Bidirectional) transponder cross-connection type.
The 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit pack supports only the ODU4
transponder cross-connection rate.
10GBASE-R
(10.313G 100
ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G 20 ppm)
GFP-F, PT= 0x05 Ethernet MAC and LF/RF
transparent
Extended OPU2
(10.000G 20 ppm)
GFP-F with Ordered Sets
transparency,
PT= 0x09
Ethernet MAC and
preamble and ordered sets
transparent
Extended OPU2
(10.000G 20 ppm)
GFP-F, PT= 0x08F (default) Ethernet MAC and
preamble transparent
OPU2e
(10.356G 100 ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
OPU1e
(10.313G 100 ppm)
Procedure (BMP),
PT= 0x03
FC800
(8.500G 100 ppm)
OPU2
(9.995G 20 ppm)
Proprietary enhanced CBR
mapping,
PT= 0x81 (default)
FC1200
(10.519G 100
ppm)
OPU2e
(10.356G 100 ppm)
GFP-T, PT= 0x08
MAC transparent
Client protocols and mapping for 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BBE5)
Client protocol
(rate)
Supported SFP+s/XFPs
Table 2-20 provides a list of the SFP+s that are supported on the 10x10GE
MUX circuit pack and also a list of the XFPs that are supported on the
Table 2-20
Supported SFP+/XFP modules for the 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported SFP+/XFP module
ATTENTION
Not all of the available facilities in an SFP+/XFP may be supported by the 10x10GE MUX or
10x10G MUX circuit pack. Refer to Table 2-27 on page 2-145 to find out which facility types can be
supported by 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX circuit packs.
10x10G MUX 10GE
10xSFP+ (NTK529BAE5)
PSFP
10GBASE-LR/FC1200-SM-L,1310nm, SFP+ (NTTP30CFE6)
FC800/10GE/FC1200, 850nm SFP+ (160-9111-900)
10x10G MUX Multi-Protocol
10xXFP (NTK529BBE5)
P10GEL
10GBASE-SR/SW, 850 nm, 30-300 m, MMF (NTTP81AA) (see
Note 4)
P10GSEL
OC192/STM64 IR-2 / S-64.2 / 10GBase-ER,EW (NTTP80DA)
P10GSOEL
OC192/STM64 SR-1/ I-64.1 / 10GBase-LR,LW / OTU2 / 10G
FC1200 (NTTP84BA)
8.5G-10.52G multi-rate, 850nm MMF (NTTP86AA)
5G-11.09G multirate 1310 nm (NTTP86BAE6)
Multirate 15xx.yy nm EML DWDM 1600 ps/nm XFP (NTK587Ax to
NTK587Dx where x= see Note 5)
9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP84AAE6)
9.95G-11.1G multirate 1550 nm (NTTP81KAE6)
PXFP
Multirate 1528.38 to 1568.77 (1-88) 50GHz DWDM XFP
(NTK583AAE6)
Multirate 1528.38 to 1568.77 (1-88) 50GHz Type 2 DWDM XFP
(NTK583AB)
Multirate 15xx.yy 15xx.yy Tunable Dispersion Tolerant
DWDM 3200 ps/nm XFP (NTK589xxE6 where xx= see Note 5)
The 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit pack supports the following
monitored entities:
OTM4 mapping layer interface (10x10GE MUX circuit pack)
OTM2 mapping layer interface (10x10G MUX circuit pack)
10x10GE MUX client interfaces
PM collection for ETH10G facilities
PM collection of Physical layer for ETH10G facilities
operational measurements for ETH10G facilities
10x10G MUX client interfaces
Note 1: On the 10x10GE MUX circuit packs, port 1 to 10 are the client interfaces (ETH10G). There are
no line ports on 10x10GE MUX circuit packs. A virtual OTM4 port 100 is also provisioned by software
internally on the circuit pack. This is a mux/mapping port used to demarcate the ODU4 layer but does
not have a physical connection.
Note 2: On the 10x10G MUX circuit packs, port 1 to 10 are the client interfaces (FC800, FC1200,
ETH10G, 10.7G, 11.05G, 11.09G, or OTM4). There are no line ports on 10x10G MUX circuit packs. A
virtual OTM4 port 100 is also provisioned by software internally on the circuit pack. This is a
mux/mapping port used to demarcate the ODU4 layer but does not have a physical connection.
Note 3: SFP+ modules have the same form factor as conventional SFP modules, but support higher
data rates. Follow the listed recommendations below if you use the shelf front cover. These rules apply
to all circuit packs that have 90 degree SFP+/SFPs:
use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm flexible strain relief boots (NTTC50++V6 Ciena supplied
patchcords, Corning, or equivalent)
do not use in-line plug attenuators on the circuit pack faceplate (recommend installing at the patch
panel or far-end termination).
use standard MSA compliant SFP+s (with standard body length) (NTTP30CFE6)
Note 4: MMF stands for multi-mode fiber.
Note 5: Refer to Planning - Ordering Information, 323-1851-151, Chapter 3: Table Multirate
DWDM/CWDM pluggable optics modules (XFP), for the complete list of ordering codes.
Supported SFP+/XFP modules for the 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX circuit pack
Interface circuit pack Supported SFP+/XFP module
facilities
PM collection for TCMTTP, TCMCTP, ETH10G, FLEX (FC800 and
FC1200), and WAN facilities
PM collection of Physical layer for ETH10G and facilities
operational measurements for ETH10G, FLEX (FC800 and FC1200),
and WAN facilities
323-1851-520.
Alarms
Equipment alarms
Circuit Pack Failed
Intercard Suspected
Pluggable alarms
Client Circuit Pack Missing - Pluggable
Client Circuit Pack Failed - Pluggable
Client Circuit Pack Unknown - Pluggable
provisioning Incompatible - Pluggable
OTM facility alarms
OTU Trace Identifier Mismatch (OTM2 only)
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU BDI
OPU AIS
GCC1 Link Fail (OTM3 only)
Multiplex Rate Mismatch
Event Log Full
OCn/STMn facility alarms (applicable to 10x10G MUX)
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
AIS
Signal Fail
RFI
Event Log Full
Loss Of Signal
Loss of Clock
Loss Of Frame
Local Fault
Remote Fault
Integrated Test Set Configured (for Ethernet facilities only)
Integrated Test Set Data Save In Progress (for Ethernet facilities only)
Event Log Full (for Ethernet facilities only)
TCM Facility alarms (10x10G MUX)
ODU BDI
ODU AIS
ODU LCK
ODU OCI
ODU Signal Degrade
WAN alarms
Link Down
Loss of Frame delineation
CMF UPI Mismatch
Equipping rules
The following equipping rules apply to 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX
circuit packs:
occupies a single slot, and offers 10 client ports.
Table 2-21
10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX allowable slots (14-slot shelf)
or
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G MOTR:
Unprotected optical muxponder with
10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX to the
left of 100G OCLD
1 2/3 N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A
9 10/11 N/A N/A
12 13/14 N/A N/A
100G MOTR:
left of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
3 N/A 4 N/A
9 N/A 10 N/A
13 N/A 14 N/A
100G MOTR:
left of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK
mode
3 N/A N/A 4
9 N/A N/A 10
13 N/A N/A 14
100G MOTR:
right of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
2 N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A 5 N/A
12 N/A 11 N/A
100G MOTR:
right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode
2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
12 N/A N/A 11
100G MOTR:
left of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
BPSK mode
4 N/A N/A 5 and 6
12 N/A N/A 13 and 14
100G MOTR:
right of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
BPSK mode
3 N/A N/A 1 and 2
11 N/A N/A 9 and 10
or 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX are not interchangeable.
MOTR consists of:
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must
be in QPSK mode),
or
Note 4: Slots 7 and 8 are excluded as there is no mate-to-mate tracking available to support the
required 5.5 Gbps rate.
or
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
can be equipped in the 32-slot packet-optical shelf as shown in
Table 2-22.
Table 2-22
or
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G MOTR: Unprotected optical
muxponder with 10x10GE MUX or
10x10G MUX to the left of 100G OCLD:
Option 1 (see Note 4) 2 3/4 N/A N/A
6 7/8 N/A N/A
12 13/14 N/A N/A
16 17/18 N/A N/A
22 23/24 N/A N/A
26 27/28 N/A N/A
32 33/34 N/A N/A
36 37/38 N/A N/A
Option 2 (see Note 5) 1 2/3 N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A
13 14/15 N/A N/A
16 17/18 N/A N/A
21 22/23 N/A N/A
24 25/26 N/A N/A
33 34/35 N/A N/A
36 37/38 N/A N/A
100G MOTR:
10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX to the left
of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
3 N/A 4 N/A
7 N/A 8 N/A
13 N/A 14 N/A
17 N/A 18 N/A
23 N/A 24 N/A
27 N/A 28 N/A
33 N/A 34 N/A
37 N/A 38 N/A
100G MOTR:
right of 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
2 N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A 5 N/A
12 N/A 11 N/A
16 N/A 15 N/A
22 N/A 21 N/A
26 N/A 25 N/A
32 N/A 31 N/A
36 N/A 35 N/A
100G MOTR:
of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK
mode
3 N/A N/A 4
7 N/A N/A 8
13 N/A N/A 14
17 N/A N/A 18
23 N/A N/A 24
27 N/A N/A 28
33 N/A N/A 34
37 N/A N/A 38
100G MOTR:
right of Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode
2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
12 N/A N/A 11
16 N/A N/A 15
22 N/A N/A 21
26 N/A N/A 25
32 N/A N/A 31
36 N/A N/A 35
100G MOTR:
of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
BPSK mode
6 N/A N/A 7 and 8
14 N/A N/A 15 and 16
26 N/A N/A 27 and 28
34 N/A N/A 35 and 36
or
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G MOTR:
right of two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in
BPSK mode
5 N/A N/A 3 and 4
13 N/A N/A 11 and 12
25 N/A N/A 23 and 24
33 N/A N/A 31 and 32
MOTR consists of:
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must be
in QPSK mode),
or
Note 4: This configuration partitions the shelf into 4-slot ranges each of which can support a 100G
MOTR, 100G regen, or a 100G OTR. The 100G circuit pack group in each of these 4-slot ranges can
be changed (for example from a MOTR to a regen) without affecting any of the other 4-slot ranges in
the shelf. This slot usage allows the 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX to be the swapped out for a 100GE
OCI or 100G OCI without needing to move the existing 100G OCLD circuit packs. This slot usage also
allows the 100GE OCI or 100G OCI to be swapped out for a 100G OCLD without needing to move the
existing 100G OCLD if reconfiguring from 100G MOTR/100G OTR to 100G Regen.
Note 5: This configuration provides the maximum number of contiguous slots in the shelf (that is, slots
7-8, 11-12, 27-28, 31-32), available for other 6500 circuit pack groups (for example, a
100G MOTR/100G OTR group).
or
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
can be equipped in the 7-slot optical shelf as shown in Table 2-23.
Table 2-23
or
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
100G MOTR:
10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX below
100G OCLD
1 2/3 N/A N/A
4 5/6 N/A N/A
100G MOTR:
3 N/A 4 N/A
100G MOTR:
10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX above
2 N/A 1 N/A
6 N/A 5 N/A
100G MOTR:
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK
mode
3 N/A N/A 4
100G MOTR:
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in QPSK
mode
2 N/A N/A 1
6 N/A N/A 5
100G MOTR:
two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK
mode
4 N/A N/A 5 and 6
100G MOTR:
two Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs in BPSK
mode
3 N/A N/A 1 and 2
two 100G MOTR groups (10x10G MUX/100G OCLD or
10x10G MUX/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or
10x10G MUX/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD) provisioned in consecutive slots
can be configured as 1+1 protection using TPT:
For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G OCLD circuit pack, the
mate 100G OCLD circuit pack must be provisioned in the adjacent slot
to the right. The valid protection group slots are {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}, or
{9, 10/11} and {12, 13/14} in a 14-slot shelf; {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6}, {13,
14/15} and {16, 17/18}, {21, 22/23} and {24, 25/26}, or
{33, 34/35} and {36, 37/38} in a 32-slot shelf; {1, 2/3} and {4, 5/6} in a
7-slot shelf.
For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack when in QPSK
mode, the 10x10G MUX circuit packs must be in between the 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The
valid protection group slots are {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}, or {11o, 12m}
and {13m, 14o} in a 14-slot shelf; {1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}, {5o, 6m} and
{7m, 8o}, {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o}, {15o, 16m} and {17m, 18o}, {21o,
22m} and {23m, 24o}, {25o, 26m} and {27m, 28o}, {31o, 32m} and
MOTR consists of:
OCLD, or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack (Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack must
be in QPSK mode),
or
or
10x10G MUX
100G OCLD 100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
{33m, 34o}, or {35o, 36m} and {37m, 38o} in a 32-slot shelf; {1o, 2m}
and {3m, 4o} in a 7-slot shelf, where o stands for 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD or Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack and m stands for
the maximum number of back-to-back 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G MUX
regenerator sites is eight.
Attention: The regen limits do not apply to "daisy chain/ loopback" systems
acceptance test set soaks. It is expected that the number of
"daisy chain/ loopback" XFP connections can exceed these limits for idle test
set soaks (no fiber pulls, card re-seats, protection switching, etc.) at ambient
temperature with nominal clock frequencies.
(NTK505YA).
Table 2-24 lists the weight, power consumption, and SFP+/XFP specifications
for the 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX optical interface circuit pack.
Table 2-24
Technical specifications for 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 10x10GE MUX (NTK529BAE5) 10x10G MUX (NTK529BBE5)
Typical (W): 103
SFP+ specifications (see Note 5)
XFP specifications (see Note 6)
Latency
packs on page 2-112 for 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX latency values.
Latency specifications for 100G and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs
Table 2-25 on page 2-113 provides end-to-end, unidirectional latency for a
single component of the traffic path through 100G or Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs.
(+/-3
o
o
C to 40
o
Note 3: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with SFP+s, the power values published in this table
do not include SFP+s power values. You must add 1 W to typical or power budget values per SFP+.
Note 4: For this circuit pack that must be equipped with XFPs, the power values published in this table
do not include XFPs power values. You must
2 W to typical power value and 3 W to power budget for each XFP module with reach less than
IR-2/S-64.2b.
3 W to typical power value and 4 W to power budget for each XFP module with IR-2/S-64.2b reach or
greater.
Note 5: For optical SFP+ client specifications, see the following sections in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
SFP+ optical specifications
Note 6: For optical XFP client specifications, see the following sections in Part 3 of 6500 Planning,
Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for SONET/SDH applications
Optical specifications for 10G XFPs used for 10G Ethernet application
XFP transmitter, receiver, and link specifications for OTU2 applications
Multirate DWDM/CWDM XFP optical specifications
Multirate Tunable DWDM XFP optical specifications
Technical specifications for 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX optical interface circuit pack
Parameter 10x10GE MUX (NTK529BAE5) 10x10G MUX (NTK529BBE5)
Table 2-25
Latency specifications for 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
100GE OCI, 100G OCI, 10x10G MUX, and 10x10GE MUX circuit packs
DWDM circuit pack Client circuit pack Typical
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
Description PEC Description PEC Client mapping
100G OCLD NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OC-192/STM-64
with synchronous
CBR10G
71
ETH10G with
10.7G -
GFP/OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
71
ETH10G with
11.05G -
OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
70
OTU2 10.7G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2
transparent regen
77
OTU2 10.7G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2
transparent regen
72
100G OCLD
(Continued)
NTK539TAE5/
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OTU1e 11.05G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
76
OTU1e 11.05G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
70
FC800
10.7G OPU2
(Enhanced CBR)
72
FC1200
11.09G OPU2e
(GFP-T
Transcoded)
72
Add for all
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
1518 byte
packets
2
Add for all
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
9600 byte
packets
15
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
10x10GE
MUX
NTK529BAE5 ETH10G with
11.09G - OPU2e
(PCS transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
65
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
100GE OCI NTK529AAE5 100GE with bit
and clock
transparent
mapping into
ODU4
65
100GE with
G.709 GMP
mapped into
OPU4
65
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
100G OCI NTK529AC 100GE with
G.709 GMP
mapped into
OPU4
65
OTU4 with ODU4
transparent regen
(with FEC OFF)
63
OTU4 with ODU4
transparent regen
(with RS8 FEC)
65
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
or
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
or
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
with synchronous
CBR10G
Performance
optimized mode: 53
Latency optimized
mode: 24
ETH10G with
10.7G -
GFP/OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
Performance
optimized mode: 53
Latency optimized
mode: 24
ETH10G with
11.05G -
OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Performance
optimized mode: 52
Latency optimized
mode: 23
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
or
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
(Continued)
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
or
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OTU2 10.7G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2
transparent regen
Performance
optimized mode: 59
Latency optimized
mode: 30
OTU2 10.7G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2
transparent regen
Performance
optimized mode: 54
Latency optimized
mode: 24
OTU1e 11.05G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
Performance
optimized mode: 58
Latency optimized
mode: 29
OTU1e 11.05G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
Performance
optimized mode: 53
Latency optimized
mode: 23
FC800
10.7G OPU2
(Enhanced CBR)
Performance
optimized mode: 54
Latency optimized
mode: 25
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
or
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
(Continued)
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
or
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 FC1200
11.09G OPU2e
(GFP-T
Transcoded)
Performance
optimized mode: 54
Latency optimized
mode: 25
Add for all
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
1518 byte
packets
2
Add for all
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
9600 byte
packets
15
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
or
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
or
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
10x10GE
MUX
11.09G - OPU2e
(PCS transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Performance
optimized mode: 47
Latency optimized
mode: 18
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
100GE OCI NTK529AAE5 100GE with bit
and clock
transparent
mapping into
ODU4
Performance
optimized mode: 49
Latency optimized
mode: 19
100GE with
G.709 GMP
mapped into
OPU4
Performance
optimized mode: 49
Latency optimized
mode: 19
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
or
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
or
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
G.709 GMP
mapped into
OPU4
Performance
optimized mode: 47
Latency optimized
mode: 18
OTU4 with ODU4
transparent regen
(with FEC OFF)
Performance
optimized mode: 45
Latency optimized
mode: 16
OTU4 with ODU4
transparent regen
(with RS8 FEC)
Performance
optimized mode: 48
Latency optimized
mode: 18
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
with synchronous
CBR10G
Performance
optimized mode: 47
Latency optimized
mode: 29
ETH10G with
10.7G -
GFP/OPU2
(standard/MAC
transparent), or
10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7
(preamble/MAC
transparent)
packet mapping
(with 64 byte
packets)
Performance
optimized mode: 47
Latency optimized
mode: 29
ETH10G with
11.05G -
OPU1e (PCS
transparent), or
11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS
transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Performance
optimized mode: 46
Latency optimized
mode: 28
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
(Continued)
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 OTU2 10.7G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2
transparent regen
Performance
optimized mode: 53
Latency optimized
mode: 35
OTU2 10.7G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2
transparent regen
Performance
optimized mode: 48
Latency optimized
mode: 29
OTU1e 11.05G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
OTU2e 11.09G
(with RS8 FEC)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
Performance
optimized mode: 52
Latency optimized
mode: 34
OTU1e 11.05G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU1e
transparent
regen, or
OTU2e 11.09G
(with FEC OFF)
ODU2e
transparent
regen
Performance
optimized mode: 47
Latency optimized
mode: 28
FC800
10.7G OPU2
(Enhanced CBR)
Performance
optimized mode: 48
Latency optimized
mode: 30
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
(Continued)
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
10x10G MUX NTK529BBE5 FC1200
11.09G OPU2e
(GFP-T
Transcoded)
Performance
optimized mode: 48
Latency optimized
mode: 30
Add for all
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
1518 byte
packets
For Performance
optimized mode,
add: 5
For Latency
optimized mode,
add: 2
Add for all
ETH10G GFP-F
mappings with
9600 byte
packets
For Performance
optimized mode,
add: 18
For Latency
optimized mode,
add: 15
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
10x10GE
MUX
11.09G - OPU2e
(PCS transparent)
packet mapping
(any packet size)
Performance
optimized mode: 41
Latency optimized
mode: 23
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
G.709 GMP
mapped into
OPU4
Performance
optimized mode: 41
Latency optimized
mode: 23
OTU4 with ODU4
transparent regen
(with FEC OFF)
Performance
optimized mode: 39
Latency optimized
mode: 21
OTU4 with ODU4
transparent regen
(with RS8 FEC)
Performance
optimized mode: 42
Latency optimized
mode: 23
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
100G OCLD
regen, ODU4
transparent (see
Note 2)
56
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
100G OCLD/
100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD
regen, ODU4
transparent (see
Note 2)
See Note 3
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD
regen, ODU4
transparent (see
Note 2)
Performance
optimized mode: 39
Latency optimized
mode: 9
100G
WaveLogic 3
OCLD
NTK539UA/
NTK539UB/
NTK539UC/
NTK539UD/
NTK539UE/
NTK539UH
NTK539TBE5/
NTK539TCE5/
NTK539TDE5/
NTK539TEE5/
NTK539TJE5
100G WaveLogic
3 OCLD/
100G OCLD
regen, ODU4
transparent (see
Note 2)
See Note 3
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD
regen, ODU4
transparent (see
Note 2)
Performance
optimized mode: 39
Latency optimized
mode: 9
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
QPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD
regen, ODU4
transparent (see
Note 2)
Performance
optimized mode: 39
Latency optimized
mode: 14
(see Note 4)
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
Flex2
WaveLogic 3
OCLD when in
BPSK
modulation
format
NTK539BB/
NTK539BE/
NTK539BH
Flex2 WaveLogic
3 OCLD
regen, ODU4
transparent (see
Note 2)
Performance
optimized mode: 32
Latency optimized
mode: 14
Note 1: The uni-directional, end-to-end latency is measured one way from (input to output) with FEC
enabled (FEC cannot be turned off on 100G OCLD or WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs). For example, for
a path from a client 10x10GE MUX input to a far-end client 10x10GE MUX output through two 100G
OCLDs when client mapping is ETH10G with 11.09G, the total latency is 65 s (not 2 x 65 = 130 s).
Note 2: Regen mode is two 100G OCLD, one 100G OCLD and one 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, two Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, or two 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with a transponder connection
between the line-side ports. The latency value is measured from the line-side Rx port of one 100G OCLD,
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, and/or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack forming the regen pair to the
line-side Tx port of the other 100G OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD and/or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack forming the regen pair.
Note 3: The latency of the 100G OCLD/ 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD Regen by itself is not measurable
because the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 100G OCLD lines must always be bookended. For
100G OCI/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD to 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/100G OCLD Regen to 100G OCLD
/100G OCI, total unidirectional latency excluding 100G OCIs is 94 s without Latency optimized mode and
64 s with Latency optimized mode.
Note 4: The latencies in the two directions through this hybrid regen type are not equal. The larger of the
two latencies is listed for performance optimized and latency optimized.
uni-directional
end-to-end latency
(s) (Note 1)
100G circuit packs provisioning procedures
The following flowcharts provide the various steps/procedures that must be
performed in order to have the 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD and 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100GE OCI/100G OCI
circuit packs ready to carry traffic. In the flowcharts, 100G OCLD refers to both
the 100G OCLD and WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX / 100GE OCI and 100G OCLD/100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Install 100G OCLD and
10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/
100GE OCI circuit packs,
and install client pluggable(s)
End
Procedure
side ports
Edit 100G OCLD
(Tx Wavelength and Tx Power)
Procedure 2-6
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
NTRN15DA
Edit client facility paramters
Procedure 2-6
Provision GCC0/GCC1
Procedure 2-8
Is GCC0 or GCC1
required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Add client facility if applicable
Procedure 2-5
Change protection
scheme to
1+1 Port TPT
Procedure 2-7
Is client side
No
Yes
Note 2: 1+1 Port TPT is supported on 10x10G MUX
(NTK529BB) only.
Provision ODU4 transponder
cross-connection between the
10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX/100GE OCI
and the 100G OCLD
Procedure 2-9
100G OCI and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Change the 100G OCI
equipment profile if required
Procedures 2-10
Install 100G OCLD and
100G OCI circuit packs
Procedure 2-1
End
Procedure
side ports
Edit 100G OCLD
Procedure 2-6
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
NTRN15DA
Procedure 2-6
Provision GCC0/GCC1
Procedure 2-8
Is GCC0 or GCC1
required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Add client facility if applicable
Procedure 2-5
Install client pluggable(s)
Procedure 2-2
100G OCI and the 100G OCLD
Procedure 2-9
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator
Install 100G OCLD
circuit packs
Procedure 2-1
End
Procedure
Fiber line
side ports
Edit 100G OCLD
Procedure 2-6
See "Photonic
Network SLAT"
in the Photonic
Layer Guide
NTRN15DA
Provision GCC0
Procedure 2-8
Is GCC0
Required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
Yes
Yes
cross-connection
between the 100G OCLDs
Procedure 2-9
10x10GE MUX / 10x10G MUX and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Change the 100GOCLD
equipment profile
Procedures 2-10
Install Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD and
10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX
circuit packs, and install client
pluggable(s)
End
Procedure
side ports
Edit 100GOCLD
Procedure 2-6
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
NTRN15DA
Procedure 2-6
Provision GCC0/GCC1
Procedure 2-8
Is GCC0 or GCC1
required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Add OTM4 facility on 100GOCLD(s)
and add client facilities
Procedure 2-5
Change protection
scheme to
1+1 Port TPT
Procedure 2-7
Is client side
No
Yes
Note 2: 1+1 Port TPT is supported on 10x10G MUX
(NTK529BB) only.
10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX
and the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD(s)
Procedure 2-9
100G OCI and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
Change the 100GOCLD
equipment profile
Procedures 2-10
Change the 100GOCI
equipment profile if required
Procedures 2-10
Install Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
and100G OCI circuit packs
Procedure 2-1
End
Procedure
side ports
Edit 100GOCLD
Procedure 2-6
Refer to "Photonic
network SLAT" in
NTRN15DA
Procedure 2-6
Provision GCC0/GCC1
Procedure 2-8
Is GCC0 or GCC1
required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Add OTM4 facility on
100GOCLD(s)
Procedure 2-5
Install client pluggable(s)
Procedure 2-2
100G OCI and the Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD(s)
Procedure 2-9
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD regenerator
Install Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs
Procedure 2-1
End
Procedure
Fiber line
side ports
Edit 100GOCLD
Procedure 2-6
See "Photonic
Network SLAT"
in the Photonic
Layer Guide
NTRN15DA
Provision GCC0
Procedure 2-8
Is GCC0
Required?
over a
Photonic Layer?
No
No
Yes
Yes
cross-connection between
the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLDs
Procedure 2-9
Change the 100GOCLD
equipment profile
Procedures 2-10
Add OTM4 facility on
100GOCLD(s)
Procedure 2-5
Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs
General rules:
Auto-provisioning a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack sets the
equipment profile to None. The OTM4 facility is not created.
Rules for editing the equipment profile:
The equipment profile can be edited only if no facility exists.
The equipment profile can be edited from None to QPSK100G or
2xBPSK100G, or from QPSK100G or 2xBPSK100G to None.
Editing the equipment profile directly from QPSK100G to 2xBPSK100G,
or vice versa, is not supported.
You can also set the equipment profile to QPSK100G or 2xBPSK100G
when you manually provision a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
Successful editing of the equipment profile to QPSK100G or
2xBPSK100G auto-creates the OTM4 facility (or facilities).
QPSK mode:
In QPSK mode (equipment profile set to QPSK100G), one Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack provides a 100G QPSK OCLD interface.
Provisioning a Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack manually with the
equipment profile set to QPSK100G auto-creates the OTM4 facility.
BPSK mode:
In BPSK mode (equipment profile set to 2xBPSK100G), two adjacent
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs form a 100G BPSK circuit pack
group to provide a 100G BPSK OCLD interface. The left slot OCLD is
called the prime circuit pack. The right slot OCLD is called the member
circuit pack. The following pairings are supported:
NTK539BH + NTK539BH
NTK539BH + NTK539BB
NTK539BB + NTK539BB
NTK539BE + NTK539BE
Before you can provision the BPSK mode, the two adjacent slots to be part
of the 100G BPSK circuit pack group must be either unprovisioned or
provisioned with compatible Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs with
the equipment profile set to None.
Manually editing the equipment profile from None to 2xBPSK100G is
supported on the prime circuit pack only. Successful editing
auto-creates the member equipment (if not already existing) in the
right slot with the same PEC as the prime
sets the equipment profile to 2xBPSK100G on both the prime and
member equipment
auto-creates the OTM4 facility on both the prime and member
equipment
Manually editing the equipment profile on the member circuit pack is not
supported.
The member OTM4 facility, which is auto-created/deleted with the prime
OTM4 facility, cannot be manually added/deleted.
The member circuit pack cannot be manually deleted until the equipment
profile is changed to None on the prime circuit pack.
In 7-slot shelves and 14-slot converged shelves (NTK503ADE5,
NTK503BDE5, NTK503CDE5), the prime circuit pack must be in an odd
slot.
Table 2-26 provides references to different procedures covered in this chapter.
Table 2-26
Procedures in this chapter
Topic Page
Procedure 2-1 Provisioning a circuit pack automatically 2-134
Procedure 2-2 Provisioning a pluggable automatically 2-136
Procedure 2-3 Routing fiber-optic cables onto the 6500 shelf 2-137
Procedure 2-4 Connecting fiber-optic cables to circuit packs 2-140
Procedure 2-5 Adding a facility to an equipment 2-143
Procedure 2-6 Editing facility parameters 2-147
Procedure 2-7 Changing the protection scheme for a pair of facilities 2-148
Procedure 2-8 Adding a new entry in the communications settings 2-152
Procedure 2-9 Adding a transponder connection 2-154
Procedure 2-10 Changing the equipment profile 2-156
Procedure 2-11 Changing the primary state of a facility 2-158
Procedure 2-12 Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable
2-160
Procedure 2-13 Deleting a facility from an equipment 2-162
Procedure 2-14 Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable 2-164
Procedure 2-1
If automatic equipping is enabled, a 100G circuit pack and any pluggables
present auto-provision when inserted in the shelf. The circuit pack and
pluggables default to in-service.
Facilities may or may not auto-provision, depending on the circuit pack or
pluggable type. See Table 2-27 on page 2-145 for details. The primary state
of an auto-created facility defaults to the primary state of its parent equipment.
323-1851-301.
See the Equipping rules sections for supported slots for 100G OCLD,
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 100GE OCI, 100G OCI,
and 10x10GE MUX/10x10G MUX circuit packs. If a circuit pack is inserted in
an unsupported slot, an Autoprovisioning Mismatch alarm is raised.
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Risk of circuit pack damage
Do not force a circuit pack all the way to the back of its slot if it
resists insertion. Before installing a circuit pack, make sure
you know the detailed procedure for inserting the circuit packs.
CAUTION
Risk of incorrect installation
Make sure that the circuit pack lock/eject latches are locked in
position. If the lock covers are not locked, the latch sensors on
the circuit pack do not allow the shelf to identify the circuit
pack, and do not allow the circuit pack to autoprovision.
If a 100G OCLD, 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD,
10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, 100GE OCI, or 100G OCI circuit pack is
inserted in a 14-slot shelf, high flow fan requirement must be met before the
card can be provisioned. For more information on shelf high flow fan, see node
information in Administration and Security, 323-1851-301.
Prerequisites
To provision equipment for an empty equipment slot, ensure the last
equipment that occupied the slot and its related facilities and
Ensure the plastic pin protector on the circuit pack has been removed.
Step Action
1 Insert the circuit pack in the correct slot in the shelf.
If you are logged in to Site Manager when you automatically provision a circuit
pack, the Equipment & Facility Provisioning application will auto-refresh to
display the circuit pack in the list of available equipment. You can also click
the Refresh button to do the manual refresh.
end
Procedure 2-2
Provisioning a pluggable automatically
Pluggables are supported on the 10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, 100GE OCI,
and 100G OCI circuit packs only. This procedure is not applicable to
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs.
If automatic equipping is enabled, when inserted in the circuit pack, a
pluggable is automatically provisioned. Facilities may or may not
auto-provision, depending on the pluggable type. See Table 2-27 on
page 2-145 for details. The primary state of an auto-created facility defaults to
the primary state of its parent equipment.
323-1851-301.
Prerequisites
To provision a pluggable for an empty circuit pack port, ensure the last
pluggable that occupied the circuit pack port and its related facilities and
Ensure the plastic pluggable port protector has been removed.
Step Action
1 Insert the pluggable in the correct circuit pack port in the shelf.
end
CAUTION
packs.
Procedure 2-3
Use this procedure to route fiber-optic cables onto the 7-slot, 14-slot or 32-slot
6500 shelf, as applicable.
In order to prevent congestion in the shelf fiber manager and minimize
interference between fiber patch cords and a shelf front cover, you must
consider the recommendations detailed in Some operational considerations
in 323-1851-151, Planning - Ordering Information, if any of the following apply:
using fiber patch cords with a boot length greater than 42.5 mm (not
recommended, but using an extended depth cover solution will provide
additional space in front of the circuit packs)
using in-line optical attenuators (fixed pads) (not recommended, but using
an extended depth cover solution will provide additional space in front of
the circuit packs)
using fiber patch cords with a 2.0 mm diameter when more than 192 fibers
are required per side in a 14-slot shelf or per quadrant in a 32-slot shelf
(using bend insensitive optical patch cords with 1.6 mm diameter is
recommended when fiber manager congestion is a concern)
See Figure 2-32 on page 2-139 for an overview of fiber routing on the shelf.
CAUTION
Risk of fiber-optic cable damage
The minimum bend radius for fiber-optic cable is 1.5 in.
(3.8 cm). Observe this limit at all times to avoid low fiber-optic
cable performance or damage.
Step Action
1 Wear an antistatic wrist strap to protect the shelf from static damage. Connect
wrist strap to an available ground point.
2 Select your next step:
3 Flip down the fiber channel door (if applicable).
4 Route the optical fibers or cables through the fiber channel.
Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 1 to 7 of 14-slot shelf or
slot 1 to 8 and 21 to 28 of 32-slot shelf to the left side of the rack through the
appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
Route optical fibers or cables that terminate on slots 8 to 14 of 14-slot shelf
or slot 11 to 18 and 31 to 38 of 32-slot shelf to the right side of the rack
through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
For 7-slot shelf, route optical fibers that terminate on slots1 to 4 toward the
bottom of the rack through the appropriate channel of the fiber routing guide.
Route optical fibers of slots 5 to 7 toward the top of the rack.
Use external fiber management drawers to store excess fiber cable. Fiber
slack storage is not provided for fibers leaving the 6500 shelf.
5 Close the fiber channel door (if applicable).
6 If you have removed the shelf cover to route optical fibers and cables,
re-install the shelf cover (refer to the appropriate procedure in Part 2 of
end
CAUTION
packs.
If the shelf cover is Then
installed on the card cage Remove the shelf cover (refer to the
appropriate procedure in Part 2 of
not installed on the card cage Go to step 3.
Figure 2-32
Example of fiber routing on the 14-slot 6500 optical shelf
Procedure 2-4
Use this procedure to connect fiber-optic cables to circuit packs.
Prerequisites
Make sure you have the appropriate patch cords before connecting
fiber-optic cables.
Make sure you have the correct tool to disconnect the connector. See
Figure 2-33 on page 2-141.
If you are using fixed attenuators for the optical interfaces and the shelf is
equipped with a front cover, do not add the attenuators on the optical
interface. Instead, add the required attenuators to the patch panel or
inside a fiber storage tray.
For 6500 circuit packs such as SMUX that the fiber connection is coming
out from faceplate at 90 degrees, use fibers with standard short 42.5 mm
flexible strain relief boots, NTTC50xxV6 Ciena-supplied patchcords or
equivalent with Telcordia GR-326 compliant, short flexible LC strain relief
boot (Corning or equivalent).
Do not install in-line plug attenuators at the 6500 circuit pack faceplate on
ports that are perpendicular to the faceplate (also not recommended on
angled ports). See Figure 2-34 on page 2-142.
CAUTION
packs.
CAUTION
Risk of personal injury
When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack
emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on
the optical interface circuit packs capped when they are not
connected to optical fiber cables. Never look directly into the
end of an optical fiber.
Step Action
1 Inspect and clean connectors and adaptors on patch cords. See Cleaning
Connectors chapter in Part 2 of Installation, 323-1851-201.
Make sure the two connectors to be mated are clean.
2 Connect the fiber-optic patch cord to the circuit pack port.
3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 for all ports on the circuit pack.
4 Making sure not to violate the fiber-optic cable minimum bend radius, place
any slack fiber-optic cable in external fiber management drawers.
end
Figure 2-33
LC connector assembly and connector tool
1
Figure 2-34
6500 optical fiber boot length
1
Example of
incorrect boot length
Procedure 2-5
Use this procedure to:
add a facility that was manually deleted
add a facility which is not auto-created
add child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facilities to an OTM facility
See Table 2-27 on page 2-145 for facility support on 100G circuit packs and
pluggable equipment.
The member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group is auto-created
when the prime OTM4 facility is added.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action
4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment or pluggable that will support the
facility.
5 Click Add in the Facility area to open the Add facility dialog box.
6 If applicable, select the facility type from the Facility Type drop-down list.
Selecting the OC192 or STM64 facility type automatically sets the port mode
to the appropriate mode.
7 If adding a child TCMTTP or TCMCTP facility, click the Add Child button in
the parent OTM facility area.
Table 2-33 on page 2-168 for OC192 /STM64 facility parameters
Table 2-38 on page 2-191 for FLEX facility parameters
Step Action
9 If the circuit pack or pluggable is in-service, the primary state of the new
facility defaults to in-service. You have the option to change the primary state
from IS to OOS. If the circuit pack or pluggable is out-of-service, the primary
state of the new facility can only be out-of-service.
10 Click OK to add the facility and close the Add facility dialog box.
end
Table 2-27
Facilities supported on 100G circuit packs (Note 1)
Circuit pack
(Equipment)
Facilities on the
circuit pack
Pluggable
equipment
10x10GE MUX
(100GMUX)
(Note 3)
NTK529BAE5
OTM4 (auto) PSFP ETH10G (OTM2) (auto)
10x10G MUX
(100GMUX)
(Note 3 and Note 4)
NTK529BBE5
OTM4 (auto),
TCMCTP
P10GEL ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2)
(auto), TCMCTP
P10GSEL ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2),
TCM CTP
OC192/STM64 (OTM2), TCMCTP
P10GSOEL ETH10G (WAN Note 5, OTM2),
TCM CTP
OC192/STM64 (OTM2), TCMCTP
OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP
FLEX (OTM2, ADJ, WAN Note 6)
(Note 7), TCM CTP
PXFP OTM2 (ADJ), TCMTTP, TCMCTP
100GE OCI
(100GOCI)
NTK529AAE5
N/A PCFP ETH100G (OTM4) (auto)
100G OCI
(100GOCI)
NTK529AC
N/A PCFP ETH100G (OTM4) (auto), TCM CTP
or
OTM4 (auto), TCM TTP, TCM CTP
depending on the Equipment Profile
100G OCLD/100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD
(100GOCLD)
(Note 8)
NTK539Tx/Ux
OTM4 (ADJ) (auto)
(Note 10)
N/A N/A
Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD (100GOCLD)
(Note 8) NTK539Bx
OTM4 (ADJ) (Note 9
and Note 10)
N/A N/A
Note 1: Refer to Table 2-13 on page 2-69 and Table 2-20 on page 2-99 for the supported pluggable
modules in this release.
Note 2: The (auto) means the facility is auto-provisioned upon equipment/pluggable equipment
creation. The facilities in brackets are facilities auto-created on the same port as the main facility. These
facilities inherit the primary state of the main facility and are auto-deleted when the main facility is
deleted.
Note 3: On the 100GMUX, ports 1 to 10 are the client interfaces. There is no line port. A virtual
aggregate OTM4 facility (port 100) is auto-provisioned on the 100GMUX.
Note 4: All Broadband circuit packs that support transparent OC192/STM64 transport can similarly
support transparent 10GE WAN transport through the use of the OC192/STM64 facility type. Make sure
the selected XFP supports OC192/STM64 facility type. XFPs that do not support OC192/STM64 facility
type (such as NTTP81xx) cannot be used to support the 10GE WAN protocol on these circuit packs.
Note 5: The WAN facility is auto-created only when the ETH10G packet mapping is 10.7G GFP.
Note 6: The WAN facility is auto-created only with the FC1200 FLEX facility.
Note 7: The FLEX facility is only supported on the NTTP84BA, NTTP86AA, or NTTP86BA XFP. FC800
is supported on NTTP86AA and NTTP86BA only while FC1200 is supported on NTTP84BA,
NTTP86AA, and NTTP86BA.
Note 8: On the 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs, port 1
is the OTM4 line interface (100G). There are no client ports.
Note 9: See Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs on page 2-131
for more information on the rules related to this circuit pack.
Facilities supported on 100G circuit packs (Note 1)
Circuit pack
(Equipment)
Facilities on the
circuit pack
Pluggable
equipment
Procedure 2-6
Use this procedure to edit the facility parameters for a facility.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action
select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to edit.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to edit.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit Facility dialog box.
Table 2-33 on page 2-168 for OC192 /STM64 facility parameters
Table 2-35 on page 2-175 for WAN facility parameters
Table 2-38 on page 2-191 for FLEX facility parameters
Table 2-40 on page 2-194 for ADJ facility parameters
9 Click OK.
end
Procedure 2-7
Use this procedure to change the protection scheme for a pair of facilities:
from 1+1 Port TPT to unprotected (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 10x10G MUX)
from unprotected to 1+1 Port TPT (applicable to OTM2 client or mapping
facilities on 10x10G MUX)
The following apply when changing the protection scheme:
In both the working and protection 100G MOTR group, the 10x10G MUX
and 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD must be mated (ODU4
transponder connection).
The working and protection 100G OCLDs can be different variants. For
example, the working 100G OCLD can be NTK539TA and the protection
100G OCLD can be NTK539TB.
The working and protection 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can be
different variants, for example, NTK539UC being working and NTK539UD
being protection.
The working and protection Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs can be
different variants, both in QPSK mode. For example, NTK539BB being
working and NTK539BH being protection.
If the 10x10G MUX does not have the FPGA load which supports 1+1 Port
TPT protection, you must perform a cold restart of the circuit pack to
upgrade the FPGA load before provisioning the 1+1 Port TPT protection.
The OTM2 facility can be the OTM2 client or the OTM2 mapping facility of
a non-OTM2 client. Protection can be provisioned between working and
protection OTM2 mapping facilities or between OTM2 client facilities.
When the working and protection OTM2 facilities are OTM2 layer facilities,
their parent client facilities must be the same type. For example, both are
OC192 client facilities.
CAUTION
Changing the protection scheme is a service impacting
procedure.
The XFPs equipped on the 10x10G MUX circuit pack that is connected to
the TPT must be NTTP84BA or NTTP86BA. For 1550 nm applications, the
NTTP84AA XFP can be used, but only with the 10-channel TPT
(NT0H59ACE5), which is the only qualified variant for 1550 nm
applications. Performance is not guaranteed for other XFP types.
For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G OCLD, the mate 100G
OCLD must be provisioned in the adjacent slot to the right. The valid
protection group slots are:
{1, 2-3} and {4, 5-6}, or {9, 10-11} and {12, 13-14} in a 14-slot shelf
{1, 2-3} and {4, 5-6}, {13, 14-15} and {16, 17-18}, {21, 22-23} and
{24, 25-26}, or {33, 34-35} and {36, 37-38} in a 32-slot shelf
{1, 2-3} and {4, 5-6} in a 7-slot shelf
For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD, the
10x10G MUX circuit packs must be in between the 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection group slots are:
{1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}, or {11o, 12m} and {13m, 14o} in a 14-slot shelf
{1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o}, {5o, 6m} and {7m, 8o}, {11o, 12m} and
{13m, 14o}, {15o, 16m} and {17m, 18o}, {21o, 22m} and {23m, 24o},
{25o, 26m} and {27m, 28o}, {31o, 32m} and {33m, 34o}, or {35o, 36m}
and {37m, 38o} in a 32-slot shelf
{1o, 2m} and {3m, 4o} in a 7-slot shelf
where o stands for 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and m stands for 10x10G
MUX.
For 10x10G MUX circuit pack mated with Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD in
QPSK mode, the 10x10G MUX circuit packs must be in between the Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs. The valid protection group slots are the
same as those for the 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD.
The port on which working and protection facilities are provisioned must
be the same. For example, if the working client facility is provisioned on
port 1 of the working 10x10G MUX, the protection client facility must be
provisioned on port 1 of the protection 10x10G MUX.
The LOFEF client port parameter must be set to Disabled.
Prerequisites
ensure you have all the documentation relating to deleting transponder
connections and changing a facility state. Refer to the Deleting
transponder connections procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320, and Procedure 2-11,
Changing the primary state of a facility on page 2-158 for details.
Step Action
2
3 Change the protection facility to the out-of-service state. See Procedure 2-11,
4
Ensure that the protection Tx fiber is not connected to the TPT tray.
Go to step 6.
5 Ensure to disconnect the protection card fibers from the TPT tray. Change the
protection facility to the out-of-service state. See Procedure 2-11, Changing
the primary state of a facility on page 2-158.
6 Select Protection Provisioning from the Protection drop-down menu to
open the Protection Provisioning application.
7 Select the appropriate equipment or facility type and shelf from the Type and
Shelf drop-down lists.
The provisioning data table opens.
8 Select an entry from the table.
When changing the protection scheme, provisioning the protection scheme
for one of the facilities/circuit packs in a pair automatically provisions the
protection scheme for the other facility/circuit packs in the pair.
CAUTION
You must provision the TPT protection group before
connecting the Tx fiber of the protection circuit pack to
the TPT tray. Otherwise, traffic can be impacted.
Step Action
9 Click Edit to open the Edit protection provisioning dialog box.
10 Select the radio button of the new protection scheme (Unprotected, 1+1
Port TPT).
11
12 Select the OTN G.873.1 remote standard if applicable.
You can change the Revertive mode (Yes or No) and Wait to restore time (if
Revertive mode is Yes). See the Changing the protection parameters for a
pair of facilities or equipment procedure in Part 2 of Configuration -
13 Click OK.
14 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
15 Connect the protection Tx fiber to the TPT tray if 1+1 Port TPT is provisioned.
16 Change the working and protection slot facilities back to the in-service state
if applicable.
17 Repeat this procedure to provision the same protection scheme on the node
at the other end in the protection configuration if it has not been done.
18 Run the protection exerciser to detect potential protection misconfigurations.
Refer to the Running/inhibiting the exerciser procedure in Part 2 of
end
Procedure 2-8
Use this procedure to add a new entry (interface, circuit, router) in the
communications settings. For more information on these parameters and how
they apply to the DCN, refer to Part 4 of Planning, NTRN10CF.
Prerequisites
To perform this procedure, you must use an account with a level 3 UPC or
higher.
Step Action
2 Select Comms Setting Management from the Configuration drop-down
menu to open the Comms Setting Management application.
3 Select the required tab.
5 Select the appropriate comms type from the Router type or Interface type
drop-down list.
6 Click Add to open the appropriate add dialog box.
7 Add the parameters as required (if appropriate). See the following for
parameters that can be added:
Interfaces
Lower Layer DCC/GCC parameters on page 2-196
Routers
IISIS Router parameters on page 2-197
IISIS Circuit parameters on page 2-198
OSPF Router parameters on page 2-200
OSPF Circuit parameters on page 2-201
For the Add IISIS Router Parameters and the Add OSPF Router Parameters
dialogs, you have the option of adding distribution lists. To add a distribution
list, use the Add button in Redistribution section (lower section). A maximum
of 80 distribution lists can be added for each type of list. To delete a
distribution list, select the distribution list in the Redistribution section (lower
section) and select Delete.
Step Action
8
9 Click OK.
end
If Then
the dialog allows more than one entry to be
added and you want to add another entry
click Apply, go
to step 7
otherwise go to step 9
Procedure 2-9
Adding a transponder connection
Use this procedure to add 2WAY transponder connections to a network
element for 100G circuit packs.
For the 10x10G MUX circuit pack (NTK529BA), the OPU Payload Type
Mismatch alarm is raised if a new ODU4 transponder connection is added in
Release 9.0 and above, and the 10x10G MUX circuit pack at the remote end
of the connection has an ODU4 transponder connection that was created
pre-Release 9.0. To clear the alarm, delete and re-add the ODU4 transponder
connection associated with the remote 10x10G MUX circuit pack. Refer to the
OPU Payload Type Mismatch alarm clearing procedure in Part 2 of Fault
Management - Alarm Clearing, 323-1851-543, for further details.
Refer to Transponder connections parameters on page 2-204 for more
information on transponder connection parameters.
Prerequisites
have provisioned the equipment and facilities you need for the planned
transponder connections
review and follow the engineering rules outlined in the Engineering rules
and considerations for transponder connections section in Part 1 of
Step Action
2 Select Cross Connections: Transponder Connections from the
Configuration menu.
If this is the initial launch of the Transponder Connections application, no
transponder connections appear until you perform a Retrieve. Subsequent
launches of the Transponder Connections application display transponder
connections based on the last filter criteria.
4 Select a signal rate from the Rate drop-down list. Refer to Table 2-47 on
page 2-204 for supported rates.
5 Select a connection type from the Type drop-down list. Refer to Table 2-47 on
page 2-204 for supported types.
Adding a transponder connection
Step Action
6 Select the required equipment and facility from the drop-down lists for each
of the following panels:
From
To
Refer to Table 2-48 on page 2-205 for the supported equipment and facility
parameters for transponder connections.
Attention: For Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs in BPSK mode, the
connection must be provisioned between the prime OTM4 facilities. You
cannot use member OTM4 facilities to create an ODU4 transponder
connection.
9
end
If you Then click
want to provision another transponder
connection for this network element
Apply and go to step 4
have completed the transponder connection
provisioning for this network element
OK (Apply & Close)
Procedure 2-10
Changing the equipment profile
Use this procedure to change the 100G OCI equipment profile from
ETH100G_GMP (default) to OTU4 (NTK529AC variant) or
ETH100G_PROPRIETARY (NTK529AA variant), or vice versa, which
determines the client facility auto-provisioned when the client pluggable is
provisioned.
Attention: To change the 100G OCI equipment profile, the 100GOCI
equipment must be OOS and there must be no facility provisioned on the
client pluggable or no pluggable provisioned.
Use this procedure to change the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment profile
from None to QPSK100G or 2xBPSK100G, or vice versa. See Provisioning
rules summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs on page 2-131
for more information on the rules related to this circuit pack.
Attention: Changing the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment profile will
result in a cold restart of the OCLD circuit pack(s).
Prerequisites
ensure the associated equipment or pluggable is out-of-service. See
Procedure 2-12, Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable on page 2-160.
ensure there are no facility provisioned on the client pluggable or no
pluggable provisioned on the 100G OCI circuit pack.
ensure there is no facility provisioned on the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit pack and other conditions as outlined in Provisioning rules
summary for the Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs on page 2-131
are met.
use an account with a level 3 or higher UPC.
Step Action
Changing the equipment profile
Step Action
4
5 In the Equipment area, select the 100GOCI equipment that you want to
change the equipment profile.
6 Ensure the 100GOCI equipment is OOS.
7 Ensure there are no facility provisioned on the client pluggable or no
pluggable provisioned on the 100G OCI circuit pack.
9 Select the required equipment profile from the Equipment Profile drop-down
list.
10 Click OK.
11 If required, put the 100GOCI equipment in-service. See Procedure 2-12,
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable on page 2-160.
You have completed this procedure.
12 In the Equipment area, select the 100GOCLD equipment (for Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD) for which you want to change the equipment profile. For
the 2xBPSK100G equipment profile, you can only change the equipment
profile on the prime circuit pack.
13 Ensure no facility is provisioned on the 100GOCLD equipment and other
conditions as outlined in Provisioning rules summary for the Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs on page 2-131 are met.
15 Select the required equipment profile from the Equipment Profile drop-down
list.
16 Click OK.
17 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog.
end
If you are changing the Then go to
100G OCI equipment profile step 5
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD equipment profile step 12
Procedure 2-11
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a facility.
Note that the facilities in brackets in Table 2-27 on page 2-145 are facilities
auto-created on the same port as the main facility. These facilities inherit the
primary state of the main facility. To change the primary state of these
facilities, you must change the primary state of the main facility.
The primary state of the ADJ facility is not editable.
The primary state of the member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack
group follows the primary state of the prime OTM4 facility. You can only
change the primary state of the prime OTM4 facility.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action
select the circuit pack/port whose facility state you want to change.
5 Select the appropriate facility from the Facility Type drop-down list.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility whose state you want to change.
7 Click Edit in the Facility area to open the Edit facility dialog box.
CAUTION
If you place a facility out-of-service, you can cause a loss of
traffic.
Step Action
8 Select OOS or IS from the Primary state drop-down list.
9 Click OK.
10 If changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog box.
end
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
Procedure 2-12
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable
Use this procedure to change the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
to in-service or out-of-service. You must change the primary state of any
related facilities to out-of-service before changing the primary state of a circuit
pack or pluggable to out-of-service. See Procedure 2-11, Changing the
primary state of a facility on page 2-158.
You cannot change the primary state of a pluggable to IS if the associated
circuit pack is OOS.
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack automatically changes the
primary state of any provisioned pluggables on that circuit pack to the same
state.
The primary state of the member equipment in a 100G BPSK circuit pack
group follows the primary state of the prime equipment. You can only change
the primary state of the prime equipment.
Prerequisites
UPC.
Step Action
4 If you are changing the primary state to Then go to
OOS step 5
IS step 6
Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or pluggable
Step Action
5 Ensure any related facilities are out-of-service. See Procedure 2-11,
6 Select the circuit pack or pluggable in the Equipment area.
8 Select IS or OOS from the Primary state drop-down list.
9 Click OK.
10 If you are changing the primary state to OOS, click Yes in the warning dialog
box.
end
CAUTION
loss of traffic.
Procedure 2-13
Use this procedure to delete a facility.
Facilities that are auto-created (facilities in brackets in Table 2-27 on
page 2-145) when the main facility is created will be auto-deleted when the
main facility is deleted.
You cannot manually delete an OTM4 facility in a 10x10GE MUX or 10x10G
MUX circuit pack.
The member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group is auto-deleted
when the prime OTM4 facility is deleted.
Prerequisites
ensure the end-to-end service to be deleted is not carrying traffic
ensure the facility to be deleted is out-of-service and is not in maintenance
state
delete the connections of the entire path. Refer to the Deleting
transponder connections procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320.
delete the IISIS circuit or OSPF circuit and then the GCC link if provisioned
on the OTM4 facility to be deleted. See the Deleting an entry in the
communications settings procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
ensure that no loopback exists on the facility. See the Operating/releasing
a loopback procedure in Part 1 of Configuration - Provisioning and
Operating, 323-1851-310 to release a loopback if it exists.
CAUTION
If you delete a facility, you can cause a loss of traffic.
Step Action
select the circuit pack or pluggable whose facilities you want to delete.
6 In the Facility area, select the facility you want to delete.
7 Click Delete in the Facility area.
end
Procedure 2-14
Deleting a circuit pack or pluggable
Use this procedure to delete a circuit pack or pluggable equipment from the
list of provisioned equipment in the Equipment and Facility Provisioning
application. Deleting a circuit pack automatically deletes any provisioned
pluggables on that circuit pack.
The member equipment in a 100G BPSK circuit pack group cannot be deleted
until the equipment profile is changed from 2xBPSK100G to None on the
prime equipment.
Prerequisites
delete all connections provisioned through the equipment. Refer to the
Deleting transponder connections procedure in Part 1 of Configuration -
Bandwidth and Data Services, 323-1851-320, for details.
delete all facilities on the circuit pack and its associate pluggable, see
Procedure 2-13, Deleting a facility from an equipment on page 2-162.
put the circuit pack or pluggable to be deleted out-of-service, see
Procedure 2-12, Changing the primary state of a circuit pack or
pluggable on page 2-160.
Step Action
4 In the Equipment area, select the equipment (circuit pack or XFP) you want
to delete.
5 Click Delete in the Equipment area.
end
Equipment and facility provisioning parameters
Equipment and facility primary and secondary states
Table 2-28 to Table 2-31 on page 2-166 provide information on equipment and
facility primary and secondary states.
Table 2-28
Equipment and facility primary states
Primary State Description
IS In-service; no failure detected
IS-ANR In-service - abnormal; failure exists but entity is still capable of performing
some of its provisioned functions (that is partial failure)
OOS-AU Out-of-service - autonomous; failure detected
OOS-MA Out-of-service - maintenance; no failure detected (OOS for maintenance
for provisioning memory administration)
OOS-AUMA Out-of-service autonomous maintenance; failure detected
OOS-MAANR Out-of-service - maintenance - abnormal; partial failure detected
Table 2-29
Equipment secondary states
Active Equipment has connections established to the facilities it supports and the
connected facilities are in-service
Fault detected Equipment failure detected
Idle No connections established to facilities supported on this equipment, all
connected facilities are out-of-service, or in-service connected facilities are
not on the active traffic path in a protected connection
Mismatched eqp. attribute Mismatched or unknown equipment detected in a provisioned slot
Supporting entity outage Supporting equipment has a failure (applicable to pluggables when
associated circuit pack is missing or has failed or is mismatched)
Unequipped Equipment is missing
Unknown Equipment cannot be identified
Table 2-30
Facility secondary states
<null> Active, working state for a facility
Disconnected Facility has no connections established
Fault detected Facility failure detected
Supporting entity
outage
Supporting equipment (pluggable or circuit pack):
has a failure, or
is missing, or
is mismatched, or
has an associated connection which is failed.
Loopback active Loopback active on facility
Maintenance State Maintenance State is enabled. When in Maintenance State, a facility continues to
carry traffic if it can, but does not raise alarms, SNMP traps or Performance
Monitoring Threshold Crossing Alerts (PM TCAs).
Applies to facilities that support maintenance state. See Table 2-32 on page 2-167.
Maintenance state is applicable to these facilities only if they are in out-of-service
state.
Auto in-service AINS is enabled. Applies to facilities that support AINS. See Table 2-31.
Table 2-31
Automatic INService (AINS) support on 100G circuit packs
Equipment Facility type Default value Note
100GOCLD OTM4 Disabled
100GMUX OTM4 Disabled Port 100
ETH10G Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2 or WAN/OTM2
OTM2 Disable
OC192/STM64 Enabled child facility (Note): OTM2
FLEX Enabled
FC800 child facility (Note): OTM2
FC1200 child facility (Note): OTM2, STSn
100GOCI OTM4 client Enabled
Note: The child facility follows the AINS state of its parent facility. The AINS state of the TCM facility is
independent of the parent OTMn facility.
Table 2-32
Facilities that support maintenance state
Equipment Facility type Note
100GOCLD OTM4
100GMUX OTM4 Port 100
ETH10G child facility (Note): OTM2 or WAN/OTM2
OTM2
OC192/STM64 child facility (Note): OTM2
FLEX
FC800 child facility (Note): OTM2
FC1200 child facility (Note): OTM2, STSn
100GOCI ETH100G child facility (Note): OTM4
OTM4 client
Note: The child facility follows the Maintenance state of its parent facility. The maintenance state of the
TCM facility is independent of the parent OTMn facility.
OC192/STM64 facility parameters for 100G circuit packs
Table 2-33 provides a list of the OC192/STM64 facility parameters. Applicable
to 10x10G MUX circuit packs only.
Table 2-33
OC192/STM64 facility parameters
number for the selected facility. Read-only.
Primary state See Equipment and
facility primary states
on page 2-165
Secondary State See Facility
secondary states on
page 2-166
The Maintenance state is editable. For more
information, see Table 2-32 on page 2-167.
Signal degrade
threshold
1x10^-5
1x10^-6 (default)
1x10^-7
1x10^-8
1x10^-9
Sets the signal degrade threshold. Applicable to
10x10G MUX (NTK529BB) only.
Excessive bit error
threshold
1x10^-3 (default)
1x10^-4
1x10^-5
Sets the client receive BER threshold that triggers a
signal fail (SF) condition. Editable for 10x10G MUX
(NTK529BB) only. Read-only for all other 100G circuit
packs.
Laser Off Far End Fail Disabled
Enabled
Disabled, line/multiplex section AIS is sent to
TX Actual Power
(dBm)
TX optical power
Unknown (if circuit
pack not present)
Displays the actual client/line transmit optical power.
Read-only.
Rx Actual Power
(dBm)
Rx optical power
Unknown (if circuit
pack not present)
Displays the actual client/line receive optical power.
Read-only.
SONET mode)
SDH (default for
SDH mode)
Displays the port mode of the facility (SONET or SDH).
Read-only.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
the SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
OC192/STM64 facility parameters
Table 2-34 provides a list of the ETH10G and ETH100G facility parameters.
Applicable to 10x10GE MUX, 10x10G MUX, 100G OCI, and 100GE OCI
circuit packs only.
Table 2-34
100GMUX ETH10G
page 2-165
states. Read-only.
The Maintenance state is editable. For more information,
see Table 2-32 on page 2-167.
Laser Off Far
End Fail
Disabled
Enabled
application.
Advertised flow
control
None Displays the advertised Ethernet flow control capabilities.
Read only. None indicates advertise flow control is not
supported.
Tx Actual Power
(dBm)
Tx optical power value
not present)
Displays the measured line transmitter optical power.
Read-only.
Rx Actual Power
(dBm)
Rx optical power value
not present)
Displays the measured line receiver optical power.
Read-only.
Maximum
Ethernet Frame
Size
9600 (default)
1600
Sets the Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) for 10x10G MUX.
Not applicable to 10x10GE MUX.
Packet Mapping See description Displays the mapping layer OTM2 OTURATE and client
mapping. 10x10GE MUX only supports the 11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS transparent) mapping.
10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)
GFP-F, asynchronous, standard WAN.
10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)
(default)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble and MAC transparent
WAN.
10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ Ordered Set/ MAC
transparent)
GFP-F, asynchronous, Preamble, Ordered Set
transparent, and MAC transparent WAN.
To change the Packet Mapping, you must delete the
ETH10G facility and re-create the ETH10G facility with
the new Packet Mapping.
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
100GOCI ETH100G
page 2-165
states. The Maintenance state is editable. For more
Laser Off Far
End Fail
Disabled
Enabled
application.
Tx Power Actual
High (dBm)
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Tx Power Actual
Low (dBm)
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Rx Power Actual
High (dBm)
Rx optical power high
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Displays the highest measured received optical power of
Rx Power Actual
Low (dBm)
value
Unknown (if CFP not
present)
Packet mapping GMP
Proprietary
Sets the mapping protocol.
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
Table 2-35 provides a list of the WAN facility parameters. Applicable to
10x10G MUX circuit packs only.
Table 2-35
10x10G MUX OCI WAN
Read-only.
primary states on
page 2-165
Indicates the primary state of the WAN facility,
which follows the ETH10G or FC1200 primary
state. Read-only.
secondary state can be a combination of one or
more states. Read-only.
Frame Checksum 0 (default)
32
Displays whether the GFP-F or GFP-T frame
checksum (4 Byte CRC-32) is appended to each
GFP-F or GFP-T frame.
"32" adds the frame checksum while "0" does not.
Note: To prevent packet loss, the Frame
Checksum must be kept at the default value of "0"
when using the "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7
(Preamble/MAC transparent)" packet mapping.
Packet Mapping GFP-F for ETH10G WAN
GFP-T for FC1200 WAN
Displays the WAN to OPU2 mapping format.
Read-only.
Ethernet Preamble Keep
Discard
Sets whether the 8 byte Ethernet MAC preamble is
kept or discarded during GFP-F mapping.
Applicable to ETH10G WAN only. This parameter
is determined by the ETH10G packet mapping as
follows:
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC
transparent)" = Keep
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2 (Standard MAC transparent)"
= Discard
"10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered
Set/MAC transparent)" = Keep
Read-only.
FCS Errored
Frames
Keep (default for ETH10G
WAN)
Discard (default for
FC1200 WAN)
Sets whether the LAN FCS errored frames are kept
or discarded at the client ingress. (Note 3)
GFP RFI Enabled Controls the GFP remote failure indication (RFI)
client management frame (CMF) transmission.
When enabled, it allows GFP RFI CMF
transmission upon WAN link down. Applicable to
ETH10G WAN only. Read-only.
Round trip delay
Status
Disable Controls the support (sending of CMFs) of round
trip delay calculation. Applicable to ETH10G WAN
only. Read-only.
Conditioning type GFP CMF Controls the type of conditioning on the WAN port.
WAN conditioning is triggered by local client
failures on the Ethernet port. Applicable to
ETH10G WAN only. Read-only.
User Payload
Indicator
Transmitted (In
HEX)
00 to FF (Note 2) Sets the GFP-F or GFP-T User Payload Identifier
used for Client Data Frames created in the WAN
layer during the GFP-F or GFP-T mapping. This
value is not monitored or alarmed and editing of
this parameter is only provided to potentially
improve interoperability with other equipment.
Transparent
Ordered Sets
G7041CMF (default)
LEGACYCMF
G7041CDF
Sets whether legacy client management frame
(LEGACYCMF) or G7041CMF is used.
For "10.7G - GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/Ordered
Set/MAC transparent)" mapping, the only option is
G7041CDF.
Note 1: Where applicable, the Mapping, Frame checksum, and LAN frame checksum parameters must
always be edited as a group, invalid combinations are rejected.
Note 2: This value can only be provisioned (via the WAN facility) for the proprietary "10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/MAC transparent)" ETH10G packet mapping.
Note 3: When the "FCS Errored Frames" WAN facility parameter is set to "Discard", FCS errored
frames (either GFP or MAC FCS errors) are not discarded at the client egress of the 10x10G MUX circuit
packs. The only location FCS errored frames are discarded is at the ETH10G client Rx of the 10x10G
MUX circuit packs. Additionally, the discarded frames are added to the DFR-E PM count and the
Ethernet In Frames Discarded: Total OM count, which do not normally include FCS errored frames.
Table 2-36 provides a list of the OTM2 facility parameters. Applicable to
10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit packs only.
Table 2-36
page 2-165
Rate 10.7G
11.05G
11.09G
Displays the facility rate.
Optical System
Identifier
The identifier can
include any combination
of upper and lower case
letters, numbers, and
special characters.
Setting the optical system identifier in this dialog
overrides the default setting provisioned in the Node
Information application which is used when OTM2
facilities are auto-provisioned.
Note: You can use & in optical system identifier field
as a special character but if you use only a single &
in optical system identifier field, the system dismisses
the single & and the field appears blank.
Applicable to the OTM2 client facility on PXFP only.
Tx Path Identifier 1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier which allows two
different transmitters with identical wavelengths in the
same network element to be identified uniquely in an
optical system.
Setting the transmit path identifier in this dialog
overrides the default setting provisioned in the Node
Information application which is used when OTM2
facilities are auto-provisioned.
Applicable to the OTM2 client facility on PXFP only.
Tx Actual Power
(dBm)
Tx optical power
Unknown (if circuit
pack not present)
Displays the measured line transmit optical power.
Read-only.
Applicable to the OTM2 client facility only.
Tx Wavelength (nm) 1528.77 (93) to
1565.09 (88), at 50 GHz
spacing (default 0 for
tunable Tx)
Displays the line transmit wavelength. Wavelength is
editable only for tunable transmitters.
OOS.
The number in brackets is the channel ID. Tx
wavelength may auto-provision.
Tx FEC Format Off
RS8 (ITU-T G.709
RS-8) (default)
Sets the transmit Tx FEC format setting.
The OTM2 Tx FEC Format parameter cannot be
Laser Off Far End
Fail
Disabled
Enabled
equipment. When Enabled, client transmitter laser is
shutoff when line faults or head-end client faults are
detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is sent to
Rx Actual Power
(dBm)
Rx optical power
Unknown (if circuit
pack not present)
Displays the measured line receive optical power.
Read-only.
Rx FEC Format Off
RS8 (ITU-T G.709
RS-8) (default)
Select the receive Rx FEC format setting.
The OTM2 Rx FEC Format parameter cannot be
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (dBQ)
-1.00 to +1.00 dBQ
(default 0)
provisioned in 0.01 increments. 0 dBQ equates to
1x10^-15 post FEC errors.
OOS.
Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (BER)
Read-only.
OTU Signal Degrade
Threshold
1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold (applicable only
when Rx FEC Format is Off). Read-only.
ODU TTI
Termination
Yes (default)
No
Displays whether the trail trace identifier (TTI)
message is transmitted at the line transmitter. Editable
through TL1 only.
Applicable to the OTM2 layer facility of an ETH10G
client in 10x10GE MUX only.
OPU2 + 7 Reserved
Bytes
Yes
No
Displays whether the 7 unused bytes of the OPU2
overhead are used for payload. Read-only.
Applicable to the OTM2 layer facility of a non-OTM2
client only.
Payload Type
Expected (In HEX)
00 to FF
(Note)
OPU Payload Type byte expected in the off-ramp
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility in
10x10G MUX only.
Payload Type
00 to FF
(Note)
OPU Payload Type byte transmitted in the on-ramp
OC192/STM64 or ETH10G client facility in
10x10G MUX only.
SONET NE mode)
NE mode)
Displays the mode of the port. Determines if SONET
or SDH terminology is used and whether bit (SONET)
or block (SDH) errors are used for performance
monitoring.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Note: You can provision this value only for ETH10G client facilities with packet mappings of "10.7G -
GFP/OPU2+7 (Preamble/ MAC transparent)", "11.05G - OPU1e (PCS transparent)", or "11.09G -
OPU2e (PCS transparent)".
Table 2-37 provides a list of the OTM4 facility parameters.
Table 2-37
100GOCLD OTM4 for 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit
packs (Note 1)
Unit facility-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility AID.
Secondary State See Facility secondary states
on page 2-166
The AINS state is editable. For more information,
see Table 2-31 on page 2-166.
Optical System
Identifier
The identifier can include any
combination of upper and lower
case letters, numbers, and
special characters.
Tx Path
Identifier
1 to 254 Sets the transmit path identifier which allows two
Tx Power (dBm) -11.0 (default) to -1.0 for
NTK539Tx
-11.0 (default) to +4.0 for
NTK539Ux/Bx
Sets the required line transmit optical power
(provision power with 0.1 incremental range).
Tx Actual Power
(dBm)
Tx optical power
present) (Note 2)
Displays the actual client transmit optical output
power. Read-only.
lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
Rx Actual Power
(dBm) (Note 4)
Rx optical power
present) (Note 2)
Displays the actual client receive optical input
power. Read-only.
lowest reading is -45 dBm. Refer to Fault
Rx Channel
Actual Power
(dBm) (Note 4)
Rx channel optical power
present) (Note 2)
Displays the actual receive channel optical input
power. Read-only.
Applicable only to 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs deployed in a
colorless line system.
Tx
Compensation
Mode
Auto
Manual
Off
Default value depends on PEC
as follows:
For NTK539UA/UC/UD: only
Off is supported
For NKT539UB/UH/BB/BH:
Auto (default) and Manual are
supported
For NTK539UE/BE: Auto and
Manual (default) are supported
Sets the Tx pre-compensation mode.
Off: In this mode, pre-compensation is disabled.
Auto: In this mode, the Tx dispersion provisioned
parameter cannot be user-provisioned and defaults
to 30000. The link acquires at a pre-compensation
value (-30,000) and an appropriate
post-compensation value. Firmware then attempts
to move the pre-compensation/post-compensation
ratio for the link to 50%.
Manual: In this mode, the pre-compensation is
user-controlled using the Tx dispersion provisioned
parameter in the range from -40000 to 40000.
Default value is 30000 for NTK539UB/UH/BB/BH
and
0 for NTK539UE/BE.
The Tx Dispersion Provisioned is the dispersion of
the fiber being compensated. The compensating
dispersion has an opposite sign.
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
Tx Dispersion
Provisioned
numeric value Displays the provisioned Tx dispersion.
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
Rx FEC Format PFEC for NTK539Tx
QFEC for NTK539Ux/Bx
Displays the Rx FEC format setting. Read-only.
Tx FEC Format PFEC for NTK539Tx
QFEC for NTK539Ux/Bx
Displays the Tx FEC format setting. Read-only.
Tx Wavelength
(nm)
1527.99 (0) to 1565.50 (89) at
50GHz spacing for NTK539Tx
1528.77 (93) to 1566.72 (92)
at 50GHz spacing for
NTK539Ux/Bx
Displays the OTM4 transmit wavelength in nm. The
number in brackets is the channel ID.
OOS.
Tx Wavelength can be re-provisioned to zero when
the OTM4 facility is OOS, without deleting the
facility.
The wavelength offset between prime and member
OTM4 facilities on a 100G BPSK circuit pack group
should be kept within 200 GHz to reduce the skew
effect introduced by accumulated relative dispersion
of the wavelengths.
Tuning Mode Performance Optimized
Tuning (default)
Accelerated Tuning
Sets the wavelength tuning mode.
Performance Optimized Tuning mode includes a
self-calibration test, which optimizes the
performance, whereas the Accelerated tuning mode
does not.
Performance Optimized Tuning (formerly called
Normal) mode is the tuning mode that is supported
in all releases.
In this release, Site Manager allows setting this
parameter to Accelerated. However, the circuit pack
behaves the same as in Performance Optimized
Tuning mode.
Applicable to 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD/circuit packs only.
Performance
Optimization
mode
OptimizationMode1 (default)
OptimizationMode2
Sets the performance optimization mode. Facility
must be OOS to edit this parameter.
OptimizationMode1 provides the best reach
performance and OptimizationMode2 provides the
best latency performance.
Only applicable to the 100G WaveLogic 3
OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs.
Pre-FEC Signal
Fail Threshold
(dBQ)
-1.00 to +1.00 dBQ
(default 0.0)
provisioned in 0.01 increments. The 0 dBQ
reference point represents an operating point where
the system may see significant post FEC errors and
become unstable.
OOS.
Note: For QFEC, when the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
Threshold (dBQ) is set to -1.00 dBQ, the Pre-FEC
Signal Fail alarm is disabled and will not be raised.
Pre-FEC Signal
Fail Threshold
(BER)
1.71E-2 to 3.78E-4 BER
(default 3.80E-3) for PFEC
6.62E-2 to 9.01E-3 BER
(default 3.00 E-2) for QFEC in
OptimizationMode1
5.71E-2 to 6.41E-3 BER
(default 2.40E-2) for QFEC in
OptimizationMode2
Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade
Threshold (dBQ)
-1.00 to +3.50 dBQ
(default 0.5)
Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal
Can be provisioned in 0.01 increments.
Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade
Threshold
(BER)
3.8E-3 to 9.06E-10 BER
(default 1.36E-3) for PFEC
6.62E-2 to 1.18E-5 BER
OptimizationMode1
5.71E-2 to 4.30E-6 BER
OptimizationMode2
Displays the threshold level in BER for the Pre-FEC
Signal Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is
On).
Line Rate 112G Displays the rate. Read-only.
Port Mode SONET (default for SONET
NE mode)
SDH (default for SDH NE
mode)
SDH). Read-only.
Supported Mean
DGD (ps)
8 for NTK539TC/TD
10 for
NTK539TB/UB/UC/UD/BB
20 for NTK539TA/TE/TJ
30 for NTK539UA
50 for NTK539UE/UH/BE/BH
Displays the maximum value of the mean DGD of
any link for which modem performance can be
guaranteed in ps. Read-only.
Estimated
Unidirectional
Latency (s)
numeric value Displays the estimated unidirectional latency in s.
Estimated unidirectional latency includes fiber
latency and circuit pack latency. Circuit pack latency
is from the backplane to the line interface port.
Estimated Fiber
Length (km)
Estimated fiber length
Unknown (if no fiber is
connected to the port)
(Note 2)
Displays an estimate of the fiber length calculated
based on the round trip delay. Read-only.
Estimated
Instance of DGD
(ps) (Note 3)
Estimated instantaneous of
DGD measurement
Unknown (Note 2)
Displays an estimate of the present value of the
differential group delay (DGD) that results from
polarization mode dispersion (PMD) present in the
link at the signal wavelength in ps. The maximum
instance of DGD observed over life is 3 times the
mean DGD of the link.
Total Rx Link
Dispersion
(ps/nm)
-50,000 to +50,000 ps/nm for
NTK539Tx
-40,000 to +40,000 ps/nm for
NTK539UA/UC/UD
-80,000 to +80,000 ps/nm for
NTK539UB/UE/UH/Bx
Unknown
Display the total link dispersion in the receive
direction. Read-only.
Reach
Specification
(km)
numeric value, PEC
dependent
APP-SPECIFIC for
NTK539UB/UH/BB/BH
SUBMARINE for
NTK539UE/BE
Displays the reach specification retrieved from a
100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack. Read-only.
Trace Tx TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the transmitted trace used to determine if
the Tx/Rx fiber pairs are connected correctly.
Read-only.
Associated Far
End Rx ID
TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the associated far end Rx ID. Read-only.
Echoed Trace
Rx
TID: shelf-slot-port Displays the echoed trace received from the far-end
transmitter.
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
report if the SP2 or SPAP-2 w/2xOSC is equipped.
Auto In-Service
Time Left
(hh-mm)
Read-only.
Fast Receiver
Recovery
Disabled (default)
Enabled
Indicates whether STORM is enabled or disabled.
Editable in the STORM application. Only applicable
to 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3
OCLD circuit packs.
Network
Configuration
Matched Chromatic
Dispersion (default)
Diverse Chromatic Dispersion
Indicates the network configuration type. Editable in
the STORM application. Only applicable to 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
circuit packs.
Link Dispersion
Path 1
circuit packs.
Link Dispersion
Path 2
circuit packs.
100GOCI OTM4 client
on page 2-166
The Auto in-service state is editable. The
Maintenance state is editable.
Laser Off Far
End Fail
Disabled
Enabled
the type of signal conditioning towards subtending
equipment. When Enabled, the client transmitter
laser is shutoff when line faults or head-end client
faults are detected. When Disabled, ODU AIS is
sent to subtending equipment when line faults or
head-end client faults are detected.
Tx Actual High
Power (dBm)
Tx optical power high value
Displays the highest measured transmit optical
Read-only.
Tx Actual Low
Power (dBm)
Tx optical power low value
Displays the lowest measured transmit optical
Read-only.
Rx Actual High
Power (dBm)
Rx optical power high value
Displays the highest measured received optical
Read-only.
Rx Actual Low
Power (dBm)
Rx optical power low value
Displays the lowest measured received optical
Read-only.
Rx FEC Format RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8)
(default)
Off
Displays the receive Rx FEC format setting.
Tx FEC Format RS8 (ITU-T G.709 RS-8)
(default)
Off
Displays the transmit Tx FEC format setting.
Pre-FEC Signal
Fail Threshold
(dBQ)
-1.00 to +1.00 dBQ (default 0) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal Fail
provisioned in 0.01 increments.
Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade
Threshold (dBQ)
-1.00 to +2.00 dBQ (default 0.5) Sets the threshold level for the Pre-FEC Signal
Can be provisioned in 0.01 increments.
Pre-FEC Signal
Fail Threshold
(BER)
Read-only.
Pre-FEC Signal
Degrade
Threshold
(BER)
Signal Degrade alarm (applicable only when FEC is
On). Read-only.
Rate 112 Displays the rate. Read-only.
NE mode)
mode)
SDH). Read-only.
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
Auto In-Service
Time Left
(hh-mm)
Read-only.
100GMUX and 100GOCI OTM4 mapping layer
Port number is 100 for 100GMUX and 1 for
100GOCI.
on page 2-166
Displays the facility operational state. The AINS
state is editable for supported circuit packs. For
more information, see Automatic INService (AINS)
support on 100G circuit packs on page 2-166.
Rate 112G Displays the rate. Read-only.
NE mode)
mode)
SDH). Read-only.
Payload Type
Expected (In
HEX)
07 OPU Payload Type byte expected in the off-ramp
ETH100G client facility.
Applicable to the 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit
packs only.
Payload Type
Transmitted (In
HEX)
07 OPU Payload Type byte transmitted in the on-ramp
ETH100G client facility.
Applicable to the 100GE OCI and 100G OCI circuit
packs only.
Delay
Measurement
Enabled (default)
Disabled
Supported on the 100G OCI only.
One Way
Latency (s)
numeric value
Unknown
measurement in microseconds. Supported on the
100G OCI only.
Auto In-Service
Time Left
(hh-mm)
Read-only.
Note 1: The only independently editable parameters on the member OTM4 facility in a 100G BPSK
circuit pack group are: Optical system identifier, Tx path identifier, Provisioned Tx Power, Tx wavelength,
SAPI/DAPI TTI, and Customer defined facility identifier. All other parameters are auto-synchronized with
the prime OTM4 facility.
Note 2: The value Unknown is also displayed when the Circuit Pack Operational Capacity Exceeded
alarm is present. If this alarm is present, the provisioning of the OTM4 facility, except for the primary
state, is not sent to the 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit pack.
Note 3: For the Mean DGD specification for the 100G OCLD/100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex 2
WaveLogic 3 OCLD circuit packs, see Table 2-10 on page 2-55.
Note 4: The 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex 2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD has two optical power detectors on
its Rx interface. One for total input power (that is, the sum total of all the wavelengths, up to 12 when
connected to the CCMD12 circuit pack, and amplifier noise [ASE]). And one for channel input power (the
channel corresponds to the wavelength the transmitter is tuned to). Rx Channel Actual Power is used to
report the channel power in dBm and Rx Actual Power is used to report total input power. When the
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD/Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD is used in colored Photonic systems, Rx Actual
Power is used to report the total input power and a dash - is displayed for the Rx Channel Actual Power.
FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX (NTK529BB)
Table 2-38 provides a list of the FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX
circuit packs.
Table 2-38
FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX
Unit FLEX-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and
primary states on
page 2-165
Displays the facility operational state. The Auto
in-service state is editable.
Protocol FC800
FC1200
Sets the FLEX facility protocol.
Conditioning Type FC800: NOS (default) or
LOFEF
FC1200: LF (default) or
LOFEF
Determines type of signal conditioning towards
client faults are detected. When set to LOFEF,
client transmitter laser is shut off. When set to NOS
for FC800, NOS is sent to subtending equipment.
When set to LF for FC1200, LF is sent to subtending
equipment.
Holdoff Timer 0, 100 (default), 200, ...
1000 in 100 increments
Sets the length of time (in ms) before Tx
conditioning is applied to the client.
Before the holdoff timer expires, FC800/FC1200
idles are injected.
Packet Mapping FC800: ENHCBR: 10.7G -
OPU2 (Enhanced CBR)
FC1200: TCODEGFPT:
11.09G - OPU2e (GFP-T
Transcoded)
Displays the mapping type. Read-only.
Tx Actual Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Tx actual power in dBm. Read-only.
Tx Minimum Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Tx minimum power in dBm. Read-only.
Tx Maximum
Power (dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Tx maximum power in dBm.
Read-only.
Rx Actual Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Rx actual power in dBm. Read-only.
Rx Minimum Power
(dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Rx minimum power in dBm.
Read-only.
Rx Maximum
Power (dBm)
Numeric value Displays the Rx maximum power in dBm.
Read-only.
Protocol Rate 8500 for FC800
10518.75 for FC1200
Displays the protocol rate. Read-only.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
FLEX facility parameters for 10x10G MUX
Table 2-39 provides a list of the TCMTTP and TCMCTP facility parameters.
Table 2-39
Unit TCMTTP-shelf-slot-port-
TCMCTP-shelf-slot-port-
Displays the AID for the selected facility, where
TCM level = 1 to 6
ODUk= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
trib =1 for an ODUk within an ODUk, 1 to 2 for an ODU0
within an ODU1, 1 to 4 for an ODU1 within an ODU2, 1 to
8 for an ODU0 within an ODU2
states.
The Auto in-service state and the Maintenance state are
editable and independent of the parent or sibling AINS
and MT state.
Supporting TP OTMn-shelf-slot-port Displays the supporting TP. Read-only.
TCM mode Monitor
Terminated
Sets the mode of the TCM. TCMTTP is always
Terminated. TCMCTP can be Monitor or Terminated.
Owner USER Displays the entity which created the facility. Read-only.
Delay
Measurement
Enabled
Disabled (default)
Applicable to TTP or terminated-CTP only. Supported on
the 100G OCI only.
One Way
Latency (s)
numeric value
Unknown
measurement in microseconds. Applicable to TTP or
terminated-CTP only. Supported on the 100G OCI only.
Customer
Defined Facility
Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Common Language Facility Identifier (CLFI).
Auto In-Service
Time Left
(hh-mm)
Read-only.
Signal Degrade
Threshold
1x10^-9 Displays the signal degrade threshold. Read-only.
Table 2-40 provides a list of the ADJ facility parameters.
Table 2-40
ADJ
Unit ADJ-shelf-slot-port Displays the facility, shelf number, slot number, and port
number for the selected facility.
page 2-165
Displays the primary state of the facility. Read-only.
Adjacency Type TXRX Sets the type of the adjacency.
Status Unverified
Derived
Reliable
Unreliable
Displays current status of the adjacency facility.
Unverified - The far end address is user- provisioned
but not discovered or verified.
Derived - the system has derived the value of the
provisioned far end address based on provisioning of
other parameters in the system.
Note: Adjacencies with the Derived status cannot be
altered by the user.
Reliable - The actual far end address is detected and it
matches the provisioned far end address.
Unreliable - The actual far end address is detected and
it does not match the provisioned far end address or the
discovery validation has detected a mis-fibering.
Actual Far End
Address
string format Displays the actual far end address which is the detected
TID, shelf, slot, and port of the far end of the fiber.
Read-only.
Actual Far End
Address Format
See Note 2 Displays the option that each field of the far end address
represents. Read-only.
Expected Far End
Address (Note 1)
TID-shelf-slot-port Sets the provisioned far end address of the fiber
connection.
Expected Far End
Address Format
See Note 2 Sets the expected far end line receive and client receive
addresses format reported by the adjacency.
Customer Defined
Facility Identifier
string of up to 64
characters
Note 1: The Expected Far End Address is controlled by the Expected Far End Address Format
selection. If the Expected Far End Address Format is set to NULL, then the Expected Far End
Address is disabled; Otherwise, it is enabled.
Note 2: The Far End Address Format options are:
NULL
TID-SH-SL-PRT
TID-SH-SL-SBSL-PRT
Comms setting parameters
GCC support and parameters
Table 2-41 provides information on GCC support on 100G circuit packs, and
Table 2-42 on page 2-197 provides a list of the Lower Layer DCC/GCC
parameters.
The Lower Layer DCC/GCC option has a single table which displays all the
provisioned OTM4 ports and their GCC settings.
Use the Add button to provision new GCC circuits and the Delete button to
delete existing GCC circuits. The Edit button is only enabled for editing the
LAPD parameters. When adding a GCC circuit, consider the following:
Each end of the GCC circuit must be provisioned with the same options.
Once a new GCC circuit has been added, an IISIS or OSPF circuit must
be added for this port. See IISIS Circuit parameters on page 2-198 and
OSPF Circuit parameters on page 2-201.
You must delete the IISIS or OSPF circuit for the GCC circuit before
deleting the GCC circuit.
Adding or deleting a GCC entry, automatically adds or deletes an
associated PPP circuit with IP address of 0.0.0.0.
For more information on GCC support on the circuit packs, refer to GCC
support on circuit packs on page 2-196.
Table 2-41
GCC support on circuit packs
Circuit Packs GCC0 GCC1
100G OCLD or 100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD (Note 1) X
Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD (Note 2) X
10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX (Note 3) X X
100GE OCI (Note 4) X
100G OCI (Note 5) X X
Note 1: Supported on the line OTM4 facility (port 1).
Note 2: Supported on the line OTM4 facility (port 1). When in BPSK mode, GCC0 is provisioned on the
prime OTM4 facility only.
Note 3: GCC1 supported on the virtual aggregate OTM4 facility (port 100). GCC0 supported on the
OTM2 client facility on the 10x10G MUX OCI.
Note 4: Supported on the OTM4 mapping facility.
Note 5: GCC0 supported on the OTM4 client facility. GCC1 supported on the OTM4 mapping facility.
IISIS parameters
Table 2-43 on page 2-198 provides a list of the IISIS Router parameters and
Table 2-44 on page 2-199 provides a list of the IISIS Circuit parameters.
The IISIS Router option has two tables.
The upper Router table displays information about the IISIS router. Use
the Add button to add an IISIS router (only one allowed). Use the Delete
button to delete the existing IISIS router.
lists provisioned for the IISIS router. Use the Add button to add IISIS
Attention: When re-adding an IISIS router, you must perform a cold restart
of the shelf processor (SP) for the changes to be implemented. The cold
restart is not required when adding the IISIS router for the first time.
Table 2-42
Editable
Unit OTM4 ports Displays all the provisioned ports and their GCC
settings
Yes
Carrier GCC0, GCC1 Selects the carrier. Yes
Operation
Carrier
GCC0, GCC1,
Disconnected
Displays the status of the GCC circuit. No
Protocol NDP, PPP Only PPP or NDP is supported for OTM4 GCC ports. Yes
The IISIS Circuit option has a single table. Use the Add button to provision
new IISIS circuits and the Delete button to delete existing IISIS circuits. You
must create an IISIS circuit on each provisioned interface you want IISIS to
run on.
When provisioning both GCC0 and GCC1 with default IISIS metrics on a shelf,
Comms over GCC1 is preferred as opposed to GCC0.
Table 2-43
Editable
Router table
Router Level Level 1 Sets the IISIS router level. Level 2 not supported in this
release, option is always disabled.
No
(default 64)
Yes
(default 64)
Not supported in this release, option is disabled.
No
Route
Summarization
On (default), Off Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On) are
redistributed.
Yes
Redistribution table
Route
Redistribution/
List
OSPF
Distribution,
Static Distribution
(default)
Sets the IISIS router distribution list entries for the
Yes
notation
Sets the IP subnet address of the distribution list entry
for the selected IISIS router.
Yes
notation
Sets the subnet mask of the distribution list entry for the
Yes
Metric 1 to 63 Sets the metric (cost) of the distribution list entry for the
Yes
Internal
Sets the metric type of the distribution list entry for the
Yes
Table 2-44
Editable
Unit OTM4 ports Displays the available ports for an IISIS circuit.
OTM4 ports are displayed in the following format:
OTM4-shelf-slot-port
Only OTM4 ports with lower layer DCC/GCC0/GCC1
provisioned are available for selection.
Yes
Carrier GCC0, GCC1 Displays the GCC channel used (options available
depend on circuit pack type and function).
Yes
Circuit
Default
Metric
1 to 63 Sets the circuit default metric used to calculate the
best route. Default as follows:
OTM4 ports with GCC0/GCC1 provisioned: 5
Select a higher value for a slower circuit.
Yes
Level 2 Only On, Off (default) Sets the status of level 2 only routing on the IISIS
circuit.
disabled.
No
3 Way
Handshake
On, Off (default) Sets the status of 3-way handshaking on the IISIS
circuit.
disabled.
No
Neighbour
Protocols
Supported
Override
Off (default), IP, OSI,
IP and OSI
Select the override for the neighbour router protocols
(overrides what the router advertises).
Note 1: OSI is only valid if LAPD is selected.
Note 2: When provisioning an IISIS circuit on an ILAN
port, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
optical DCC port connected to OSI managed network
elements (for example, Optical Metro 3000 and
Optical Metro 4000), you must ensure that neighbour
protocol supported override parameter is set to OSI.
optical DCC port connected to another 6500 network
element, you must ensure that neighbour protocol
Note 5: The IP and IP and OSI options are not
supported.
Yes
OSPF parameters
Table 2-45 provides a list of the OSPF Router parameters and Table 2-46 on
page 2-201 provides a list of the OSPF Circuit parameters
The OSPF Router option has two tables.
The upper Router table displays information about the OSPF router. Use
the Add button to add an OSPF router. Use the Delete button to delete an
existing OSPF router.
lists provisioned for the OSPF router. Use the Add button to add OSPF
Table 2-45
Editable
Router
OSPF Router
Id
Standard dot
notation
Sets the router ID for the OSPF.
It is recommended that the SHELF address (if
provisioned) is used as the OSPF Router Id.
Yes
Link State External (default),
Router, Summary
Sets the type of link state announcement used.
This parameter is not used and can be left at the
default value (External).
Yes
Route
Summarization
ON (default), OFF Sets whether routes (Off) or route summaries (On)
are redistributed.
Yes
Autonomous
System Border
Router
ON (default), OFF Sets the autonomous system border router (ASBR).
ASBR identifies whether an OSPF router can accept
input (route redistribution) from another autonomous
system such as IISIS, or static routes.
ATTENTION
It is recommended to keep the ASBR on its default
value (ON). If ASBR is turned off, it will prevent route
redistribution into OSPF.
Yes
The OSPF Circuit option has two tables:
The upper table displays information about the OSPF circuit. Use the Add
button to add an OSPF circuit. Use the Delete button to delete an existing
OSPF circuit.
The lower Area List table displays information about the area lists
provisioned for the OSPF circuit.
Area lists are not supported in this release and the table will always be
empty. The area list fields and the Enter and Delete buttons on the Add
OSPF Circuit Parameters dialog box are disabled.
Redistribution
Route
Redistribution/
List
IISIS Distribution,
Static Distribution
(default)
Sets the origin of the route(s) to be redistributed. Yes
notation
Sets the IP subnet address for redistribution. Yes
notation
Sets the subnet mask for redistribution. Yes
Metric 1 to 65535 Sets the metric for redistribution. Yes
Internal
Sets the metric type for redistribution. Yes
Table 2-46
Editable
Unit OTM4 ports Displays the OTM4 ports available for OSPF. Yes
Carrier GCC0, GCC1 Sets the GCC on the OTM4 port for the OSPF
circuit.
Yes
Network Area Standard dot notation Sets the area (defaults to backbone area of 0.0.0.0). Yes
Cost 1 to 65534 (default
10)
Sets the cost of the route (reflects speed of
interface). Defaults as follows:
GCC0/1: 75
Yes
Area Default
Cost
1 to 16777215
(default 1)
Sets the cost of the route to the next area.
No
Editable
Dead Interval 1 to 65535 (default
40)
Sets the interval (in seconds) at which hello packets
must not be seen before neighbors declare the
router down.
Yes
Hello Interval 1 to 65535 (default
10)
Sets the interval (in seconds) between the hello
packets that the router sends on the interface.
Yes
Retransmit
Interval
1 to 3600 (default 5) Sets the interval (in seconds) required between
link-state advertisement retransmissions.
No
Transmit
Delay
1 to 3600 (default 1) Sets the estimated time (in seconds) it takes to
transmit a link state update packet over this
interface.
No
Priority 0 to 255 (default 1) Sets the router priority value used in multi-access
networks for the election of the designated router (0
indicates that router is not eligible to become
designated router).
Yes
Area Off (default), NSSA,
Stub
Sets whether the router is in a not so stubby area
(NSSA) or stub area. NSSA and Stub not supported
in this release.
Yes
Area Virtual
Link
Standard dot notation Sets the IP address of the OSPF router id
designated as a virtual interface.
No
Password
Authentication
On, Off (default) Sets whether password authentication is performed
on the OSPF circuit. If On is selected, the password
on the neighbor must match this password to form
an adjacency.
Yes
Circuit
Password
Character string
(1 to 8 characters)
Sets the password if password authentication is
selected. Characters can be any combination of
upper case, lower case, numbers, or special
characters.
Yes
Opaque Link
State
Advertisement
On (default), Off Sets whether opaque link state advertisement
performs on the OSPF circuit.
Yes
Passive OSPF
Circuit
On, Off (default) Determines whether OSPF adjacency loss should
be detected. If set to On, OSPF adjacency loss will
be ignored.
Yes
Editable
Area List
IP Subnet Standard dot notation Sets the IP subnet address of the OSPF area.
No
Subnet Mask Standard dot notation Sets the subnet mask of the OSPF area.
No
Result Displays the OPSF areas entered in the area list. Up
to 10 OSPF area ranges can be configured.
No
Editable
Transponder connections parameters
The following tables detail the 100G circuit pack parameters associated with
the Transponder Connections Site Manager application.
Table 2-47 provides transponder connections application parameters for
100G circuit packs.
For some circuit packs, the transponder connections associated with
pluggable facilities are automatically added/deleted when the pluggable
facilities are added/deleted, and cannot be manually added/deleted.
Table 2-48 on page 2-205 does not include these transponder connections.
Table 2-47
Transponder Connections application parameters for 100G circuit packs
Connection ID The connection identifier string is used to identify a provisioned transponder
connection. The transponder connection ID can contain a maximum of 64
characters, with the exception of the \, , and % characters.
This release only supports a connection identifier for:
ODU2 connections on 10x10GE MUX and 10x10G MUX circuit packs
ODU4 connections on 100G OCLD, 100GE OCI, 100G OCI, 100G
WaveLogic 3 OCLD, Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD, 10x10GE MUX, and 10x10G
MUX circuit packs
Rate Select the rate as ODU4 for all 100G circuit packs. (This is the only connection
rate supported on 100G circuit packs.)
Type Select the connection type as 2WAY (Bidirectional) for all 100G circuit packs.
(This is the only connection type supported on 100G circuit packs.)
From and To panels Select the Equipment and Facility for the From and To endpoints as
required. Refer to Table 2-48 on page 2-205 for details.
Table 2-48
Equipment and facility parameters for transponder connections for 100G circuit packs
100G OCLD circuit packs
ODU4 100GOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5 for 7-slot shelf
slot# = 2, 3, 5, 9, 10, 11, 13 for
14-slot shelf
slot# = 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14,
15, 17, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27, 31, 33,
34, 35, 37 for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
100GE OCI circuit packs
ODU4 PCFP-shelf#-slot#-port# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1 for 7-slot shelf
slot# = 3 and 9 for 14-slot shelf
slot# = 1, 5, 11, 15, 21, 25, 31,
35 for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
100G OCI circuit packs
ODU4 PCFP-shelf#-slot#-port# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1, 4 for 7-slot shelf
slot# = 1, 4, 9, 12 for 14-slot
shelf
slot# = 1, 4 13, 16, 21, 24, 33, 36
for 32-slot shelf
port# = 1
100G WaveLogic 3 OCLD and Flex2 WaveLogic 3 OCLD
ODU4 100GOCLD-shelf#-slot# OTM4-shelf#-slot#-port# shelf# = 1 to 254
slot# = 1 to 6, 9 to 14 for 14-slot
shelf
slot# = 1-8, 11-18, 21-28, and
port# = 1
10x10GE MUX circuit packs
slot# = 1, 4, 9, 12 for 14-slot
shelf
slot# = 1, 2, 4, 6, 12, 13, 16, 21,
22, 24, 26, 32, 33, 36 for 32-slot
shelf
port# = 100
10x10G MUX circuit packs
slot# = 1, 4, 9, 12 for 14-slot
shelf
slot# = 1, 2, 4, 6, 12, 13, 16, 21,
22, 24, 26, 32, 33, 36 for 32-slot
shelf
port# = 100
Equipment and facility parameters for transponder connections for 100G circuit packs
6500 Packet-Optical Platform
40G, 100G, OSIC, and SLIC10 Circuit Packs
Release 9.3
Publication: 323-1851-102.4
Document status: Standard
Issue 3
Document release date: February 2014
CONTACT CIENA
For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at
www.ciena.com

7750 Installation Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7750 Installation Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ciena

Confidential and Proprietary

You might also like